BR112020013026A2 - provisions for surgical evacuation sensors - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention relates to surgical systems that can include evacuation systems to evacuate fluid, and / or particulate smoke from a surgical site. The surgical evacuation system may be intelligent and may include one or more sensors to detect one or more properties of the surgical system, the evacuation system, the surgical procedure, the surgical site, and / or the patient's tissue, for example.

Description

Invention Patent Descriptive Report for "PROVISIONS OF SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSORS".

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED ORDERS

[0001] This application claims priority benefit under title 35 of USC § 119 (e) to US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 691,219, entitled "SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSING AND MOTOR CONTROL", filed on 28 June 2018, the description of which is incorporated herein as a reference in its entirety.

[0002] This application claims priority benefit under title 35 of USC § 119 (e) to US Provisional Patent Application serial number 62 / 650,887, entitled "SURGICAL SYSTEMS WITH OPTIMIZED SENSING CAPABILITIES", filed on 30 March 2018, to US Provisional Patent Application serial number 62 / 650,877, entitled "SURGICAL SMOKE EVACUATION SENSING AND CONTROLS", filed on March 30, 2018, to US Provisional Patent Application serial number 62 / 650,882, entitled "SMOKE EVACUATION MODULE FOR INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed on March 30, 2018, and to US Provisional Patent Application No. 62 / 650,898, entitled "CAPACITIVE COUPLED RETURN PATH PAD WITH SEPARABLE ARRAY ELEMENTS", deposited as of March 30, 2018, each of which has its description incorporated herein for reference in its entirety.

[0003] This application also claims priority benefit under title 35 of USC § 119 (e) to US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 640,417, entitled "TEMPERATURE CONTROL IN ULTRASONIC DEVICE AND CONTROL SYSTEM THEREFOR ", filed on March 8, 2018, and to US Provisional Patent Application serial number 62 / 640,415, entitled" ESTIMATING STATE OF ULTRASO-

NIC END EFFECTOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM THEREFOR ", deposited on March 8, 2018, each of which has its description incorporated by reference in its entirety for reference.

[0004] This application also claims priority benefit under title 35 of USC § 119 (e) to US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 611.341, entitled "INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed at December 28, 2017, US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 611,340, entitled "CLOUD-BA- SED MEDICAL ANALYTICS", filed on December 28, 2017, and US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 611,339, entitled "ROBOT ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed on December 28, 2017, each of which has its description incorporated by way of reference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

[0005] The present invention relates to surgical systems and their evacuators. Surgical smoke evacuators are configured to evacuate smoke, as well as fluids and / or particulates, from a surgical site. For example, during a surgical procedure involving an energy device, smoke can be generated at the surgical site.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[0006] In several modalities, a surgical evacuation system includes a pump, a motor operationally coupled to the pump, a flow path coupled in fluid communication with the pump and a sensor system. The sensor system comprises a first pressure sensor and a second pressure sensor. The first pressure sensor is positioned along the flow path. The second pressure sensor is positioned along the flow path upstream of the first pressure sensor. The surgical evacuation system additionally comprises a control circuit configured to determine a pressure differential between the first pressure sensor and the second pressure sensor. The control circuit is additionally configured to adjust an operating parameter of the engine based on the pressure differential.

[0007] In several modalities, a surgical evacuation system includes a pump comprising an engine, a flow path coupled in fluid communication with the pump and a sensor system. The sensor system comprises a first pressure sensor and a second pressure sensor. The first pressure sensor is positioned along the path to detect a first pressure. The second pressure sensor is positioned along the flow path upstream of the first pressure sensor to detect a second pressure. The surgical evacuation system further comprises a control circuit configured to determine a ratio between the second pressure and the first pressure, and to determine an operating condition of the surgical evacuation system based on the reason.

[0008] In several modalities, a non-transitory computer-readable medium is revealed, which stores computer-readable instructions. When executed, the computer-readable instructions make a machine receive a first signal from a first sensor positioned along a flow path through a surgical evacuation system, receive a second signal from a second sensor positioned along the flow path through the surgical evacuation system, determine an operating condition of the surgical evacuation system based on the first signal and the second signal, and adjust an operating parameter of the surgical evacuation system based on the operating condition.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0009] The appeals of several aspects are presented with particularity in the attached claims. The various aspects, however, with regard to both the organization and the methods of operation, together with additional objectives and advantages of the same, can be better understood by reference to the description presented below, taken together with the attached drawings, as follows.

[0010] Figure 1 is a perspective view of an evacuation cabinet for a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0011] Figure 2 is a perspective view of an electrosurgical surgical evacuation tool, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0012] Figure 3 is an elevation view of a surgical evacuation tool that is releasably attached to an electrosurgical pen, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0013] Figure 4 is a schematic diagram showing the internal components in an evacuator cabinet for a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0014] Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of an electrosurgical system that includes a smoke evacuator, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0015] Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of a surgical evacuation system, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0016] Figure 7 is a perspective view of a surgical system that includes a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0017] Figure 8 is a perspective view of an evacuator cabinet of the surgical evacuation system of Figure 7, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0018] Figure 9 is a cross-sectional elevation view of a socket in the evacuation cabinet of Figure 8, along the plane indicated in Figure 8, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0019] Figure 10 is a perspective view of a filter for an evacuation system, according to at least one aspect of this description.

[0020] Figure 11 is a cross-sectional view in perspective of the filter of Figure 10, taken along a central longitudinal plane of the filter, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0021] Figure 12 illustrates a pump for a surgical evacuation system, like the surgical evacuation system of Figure 7, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0022] Figure 13 is a perspective view of a portion of a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0023] Figure 14 is a front perspective view of a fluid collector of the surgical evacuation system of Figure 13, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0024] Figure 15 is a rear perspective view of the fluid collector of Figure 14, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0025] Figure 16 is a cross-sectional elevation view of the fluid collector in Figure 14, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0026] Figure 17 is a cross-sectional elevation view of the fluid collector of Figure 14 with portions removed for clarity that illustrates liquid captured inside the fluid collector and smoke flowing through the fluid collector, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0027] Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of an evacuation cabinet for an evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0028] Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of an evacuation cabinet from another evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0029] Figure 20 is a schematic representation of a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0030] Figure 21 is a schematic representation of a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0031] Figure 22 is a perspective view of an evacuator cabinet for a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0032] Figure 23 is (A) a graphical representation of particle count over time and (B) a graphical representation of engine speed over time for a surgical evacuation system, according to at least one aspect of this description.

[0033] Figure 24A is a cross-sectional view of a bypass valve for a surgical evacuation system, representing the bypass valve in a first position, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0034] Figure 24B is a cross-sectional view of the bypass valve of Figure 24A in a second position, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0035] Figure 25 is a graphical representation (A) of the fluid content in the air flow over time and (B) of the work cycle over time for a surgical evacuation system, according to least one aspect of the present description.

[0036] Figure 26 is a flowchart representing an adjustment algorithm for a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0037] Figure 27 is a flowchart representing an adjustment algorithm for a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0038] Figure 28 is a flowchart representing an adjustment algorithm for a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0039] Figure 29 is a flowchart representing an adjustment algorithm for a surgical system, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0040] Figure 30 is a perspective view of a surgical system, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0041] Figure 31 is a flowchart representing an algorithm for displaying the efficiency data of a surgical evacuation system, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0042] Figure 32 is a flowchart representing an adjustment algorithm for a surgical evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0043] Figure 33 is a graphical representation (A) of the particle count over time and (B) of the ratio between current and RF voltage over time for a surgical system, according to at least one aspect of this description.

[0044] Figure 34 is a flowchart representing an adjustment algorithm for a surgical system, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0045] Figure 35 is a flow chart for controlling an engine based on at least one of a first signal received from a first sensor of an evacuation system and a second signal received from a second sensor of the evacuation system, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0046] Figure 36 is a graphical representation (A) of the particles counted over time, (B) of the power and voltage of a generator over time, and (C) of the motor speed over time to an evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0047] Figure 37 is a graphical representation of the ratio of a pressure detected in a first sensor to a pressure detected in a second sensor, and a pulse width modulation duty cycle for an evacuation system engine. over time, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0048] Figure 38 is a graphical representation (A) of the particles counted over time and (C) of the speed of the air flow over time for an evacuation system, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description. .

[0049] Figure 39 is a block diagram of an interactive surgical system implemented by computer, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0050] Figure 40 is a surgical system being used to perform a surgical procedure in an operating room, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0051] Figure 41 is a central surgical controller paired with a visualization system, a robotic system and an intelligent instrument, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0052] Figure 42 is a partial perspective view of a compartment of the central surgical controller, and of a combined generator module that can be received slidingly in a drawer of the central surgical controller compartment, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0053] Figure 43 is a perspective view of a combined generator module, with bipolar, ultrasonic and monopolar contacts, and a smoke evacuation component, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0054] Figure 44 illustrates different power bus connectors for a plurality of side coupling ports of a side modular cabinet configured to receive a plurality of modules, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0055] Figure 45 illustrates a vertical modular cabinet configured to receive a plurality of modules, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0056] Figure 46 illustrates a surgical data network that comprises a central modular communication controller configured to connect modular devices located in one or more operating rooms of a health care facility, or any environment in a hospital. installation of public services specially equipped for surgical operations, to the cloud, in accordance with at least one aspect of this description.

[0057] Figure 47 illustrates an interactive surgical system implemented by computer, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0058] Figure 48 illustrates a central surgical controller that comprises a plurality of modules coupled to the modular control tower, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0059] Figure 49 illustrates an aspect of a central controller device of a universal serial bus (USB) network, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0060] Figure 50 illustrates a logical diagram of a control system for an instrument or surgical tool, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0061] Figure 51 illustrates a control circuit configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0062] Figure 52 illustrates a combinational logic circuit configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0063] Figure 53 illustrates a sequential logic circuit configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0064] Figure 54 illustrates an instrument or surgical tool that comprises a plurality of motors that can be activated to perform various functions, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0065] Figure 55 is a schematic diagram of a robotic surgical instrument configured to operate a surgical tool described here, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0066] Figure 56 illustrates a block diagram of a surgical instrument programmed to control the distal translation of a displacement member, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0067] Figure 57 is a schematic diagram of a surgical instrument configured to control various functions, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0068] Figure 58 is a simplified block diagram of a generator configured to provide adjustment without inductor, among other benefits, in accordance with at least one aspect of the present description.

[0069] Figure 59 illustrates an example of a generator, which is a form of the generator of Figure 20, according to at least one aspect of the present description.

[0070] Figure 60 is a timeline representing the situational recognition of a central surgical controller, according to an aspect of the present description.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

[0071] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications, filed on June 29, 2018, each of which has its description incorporated by reference in its entirety for reference: ● US Patent Application No. serial __________, entitled "CAPACITIVE COUPLED RETURN PATH PAD WITH SEPARABLE ARRAY ELEMENTS", n ° of the power of attorney document END8542USNP / 170755; ● US Patent Application Serial Number __________, entitled "CONTROLLING A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ACCORDING TO SENSED CLOSURE PARAMETERS", power of attorney document END8543USNP / 170760; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SYSTEMS FOR ADJUSTING END EFFECTOR PARAMETERS BASED ON PERIOPERATIVE INFORMATION", Proxy Document No. END8543USNP1 / 170760-1; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SAFETY SYSTEMS FOR SMART POWERED SURGICAL STAPLING", proxy document number END8543USNP2 / 170760-2; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled

"SAFETY SYSTEMS FOR SMART POWERED SURGICAL STAPLING", n ° of the power of attorney document END8543USNP3 / 170760-3; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SURGICAL SYSTEMS FOR DETECTING END EFFECTOR TISSUE DISTRIBUTION IRREGULARITIES", Proxy Document No. END8543USNP4 / 170760-4; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SYSTEMS FOR DETECTING PROXIMITY OF SURGICAL END EFFECTOR TO CANCEROUS TISSUE", proxy document number END8543USNP5 / 170760-5; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CARTRIDGE SENSOR ASSEMBLIES", proxy document number END8543USNP6 / 170760-6; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "VARIABLE OUTPUT CARTRIDGE SENSOR ASSEMBLY", power of attorney document END8543USNP7 / 170760-7; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING A FLEXIBLE ELECTRODE", proxy document number END8544USNP / 170761; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING A FLEXIBLE CIRCUIT", power of attorney document END8544USNP1 / 170761-1; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH A TISSUE MARKING ASSEMBLY", proxy document number END8544USNP2 / 170761-2; ● US Patent Application Serial Number __________, entitled "SURGICAL SYSTEMS WITH PRIORITIZED DATA TRANSMISSION CAPABILITIES", power of attorney document number END8544USNP3 / 170761-3; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled

"SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSING AND MOTOR CONTROL", n ° of the power of attorney document END8545USNP / 170762; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SURGICAL EVACUATION FLOW PATHS", No. of the proxy document END8545USNP2 / 170762-2; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSING AND GENERATOR CONTRROL", Proxy Document No. END8545USNP3 / 170762-3; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSING AND DISPLAY", Proxy Document No. END8545USNP4 / 170762-4; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "COMMUNICATION OF SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM PARAME- TERS TO HUB OR CLOUD IN SMOKE EVACUATION MODULE FOR INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", No. of proxy document END8546USNP / 170763; ● US Patent Application Serial Number __________, entitled "SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM INCLUDING A SEGMENTED CONTRROL CIRCUIT FOR INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", power of attorney document END8546USNP1 / 170763-1; ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled "SURGICAL EVACUATION SYSTEM WITH A COMMUNICATION CIR-

CUIT FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A FILTER AND A SMOKE EVACUATION DEVICE ", power of attorney document END8547USNP / 170764; and ● US Patent Application Serial No. __________, entitled" DUAL IN-SERIES LARGE AND SMALL DROPLET FILTERS ", No. of the power of attorney document END8548USNP / 170765.

[0072] The applicant for this application holds the following provisional US patent applications, filed on June 28, 2018, each of which has its description incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for reference: ● US Provisional Patent Application no. series 62 / 691.228, entitled "A METHOD OF USING REINFORCED FLEX CIRCUITS WITH MULTIPLE SENSORS WITH ELECTROSURGICAL DEVICES"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 691,227, entitled "CONTROLLING A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ACCORDING TO SENSED CLOSURE PARAMETERS"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 691,230, entitled "SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING A FLEXIBLE ELECTRODE"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 691,219, entitled "SURGICAL EVACUATION SENSING AND MOTOR CONTROL"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 691,257, entitled "COMMUNICATION OF SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM PA-

RAMETERS TO HUB OR CLOUD IN SMOKE EVACUATION MODULE FOR INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM "; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 691,262, entitled" SURGICAL EVACUATION SYSTEM WITH A COMMUNICATION

CIRCUIT FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A FILTER AND A SMOKE EVACUATION DEVICE "; and ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 691,251, entitled" DUAL IN-SERIES LARGE AND SMALL DROPLET FILTERS ".

[0073] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications, filed on March 29, 2018, each of which has its description incorporated by reference in its entirety for reference: ● US Patent Application No. Serial 15 / 940,641, entitled "INTERACTIVE SURGICAL SYSTEMS WITH ENCRYPTED COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES";

● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,648, entitled "IN-

TERACTIVE SURGICAL SYSTEMS WITH CONDITION HANDLING OF DEVICES AND DATA CAPABILITIES "; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,656, entitled" SURGICAL HUB COORDINATION OF CONTROL AND COMMUNI- CATION OF OPERATING ROOM DEVICES "; ● US Patent Application No. Serial 15 / 940,666, entitled "SPATIAL AWARENESS OF SURGICAL HUBS IN OPERATING RO- WHO"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,670, entitled "CO-

OPERATIVE UTILIZATION OF DATA DERIVED FROM SECONDARY SOURCES BY INTELLIGENT SURGICAL HUBS "; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,677, entitled" SURGICAL HUB CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS "; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,632, entitled" DATA STRIPPING METHOD TO INTERROGATE PATIENT REC- ORDS AND CREATE ANONYMIZED RECORD "; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,640, entitled" COMMUNICATION HUB AND STORAGE DEVICE FOR STORING

PARAMETERS AND STATUS OF A SURGICAL DEVICE TO BE SHARED WITH CLOUD BASED ANALYTICS SYSTEMS "; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,645, entitled" SELF DESCRIBING DATA PACKETS GENERATED AT AN ISSUING IN-STRUMENT "; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,649, entitled "DATA PAIRING TO INTERCONNECT A DEVICE MEASURED PA-RAMETER WITH AN OUTCOME"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,654, entitled "SURGICAL HUB SITUATIONAL AWARENESS"; ● Patent Application US Serial No. 15 / 940,663, entitled

"SURGICAL SYSTEM DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,668, entitled "AGGREGATION AND REPORTING OF SURGICAL HUB DATA"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,671, entitled "SURGICAL HUB SPATIAL AWARENESS TO DETERMINE DEVICES IN OPERATING THEATER"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,686, entitled "DISPLAY OF ALIGNMENT OF STAPLE CARTRIDGE TO PRIOR LI-NEAR STAPLE LINE"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,700, entitled "STERILE FIELD INTERACTIVE CONTROL DISPLAYS"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,629, entitled "COMPUTER IMPLEMENTED INTERACTIVE SURGICAL SYS-TEMS"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,704, entitled "USE OF LASER LIGHT AND RED-GREEN-BLUE COLORATION TO DETERMINE PROPERTIES OF BACK SCATTERED LIGHT"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,722, entitled "CHARACTERIZATION OF TISSUE IRREGULARITIES THROUGH THE USE OF MONO-CHROMATIC LIGHT REFRACTIVITY"; and ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,742, entitled "DUAL CMOS ARRAY IMAGING".

[0074] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications, filed on March 29, 2018, each of which has its description incorporated by reference in its entirety for reference: ● US Patent Application No. serial number 15 / 940,636, entitled "ADAPTIVE CONTROL PROGRAM UPDATES FOR SURGICAL DEVICES"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,653, entitled

"ADAPTIVE CONTROL PROGRAM UPDATES FOR SURGICAL HUBS"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,660, entitled "CLOUD-BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR CUSTOMIZATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS TO A USER"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,679, entitled "CLOUD-BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR LINKING OF LOCAL US-

AGE TRENDS WITH THE RESOURCE ACQUISITION BEHAVIORS OF LARGER DATA SET "; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,694, entitled" CLOUD-BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR MEDICAL FACILITY SEGMENTED INDIVIDUALIZATION OF INSTRUMENT FUNCTION "; ● US Patent Application; Serial No. 15 / 940,634, entitled "CLOUD-BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR SECURITY AND AU- THENTICATION TRENDS AND REACTIVE MEASURES"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,706, entitled "DATA HANDLING AND PRIORITIZATION IN A CLOUD ANALYTICS NETWORK "; and ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,675, entitled" CLOUD INTERFACE FOR COUPLED SURGICAL DEVICES ".

[0075] The applicant for this application holds the following US patent applications, filed on March 29, 2018, each of which has its description incorporated by reference in its entirety for reference: ● US Patent Application No. serial number 15 / 940,627, entitled "DRIVE ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLAT-FORMS"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,637, entitled "COMMUNICATION ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS";

● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,642, entitled "CONTROLS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,676, entitled "AU-TOMATIC TOOL ADJUSTMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,680, entitled "CONTROLLERS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,683, entitled "CO-OPERATIVE SURGICAL ACTIONS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS"; ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,690, entitled "DISPLAY PLAY ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLAT-FORMS"; and ● US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 940,711, entitled "SENSING ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS".

[0076] The applicant for this application holds the following provisional US patent applications, filed on March 28, 2018, each of which has its description incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for reference: ● US Provisional Patent Application no. series 62 / 649,302, entitled "INTERACTIVE SURGICAL SYSTEMS WITH ENCRYPTED COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,294, entitled "DATA STRIPPING METHOD TO INTERROGATE PATIENT RE- CORDS AND CREATE ANONYMIZED RECORD"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,300, entitled "SURGICAL HUB SITUATIONAL AWARENESS"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,309, including

titled "SURGICAL HUB SPATIAL AWARENESS TO DETERMINE DEVICES IN OPERATING THEATER"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,310, entitled "COMPUTER IMPLEMENTED INTERACTIVE SURGICAL SYS-TEMS"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,291, entitled "USE OF LASER LIGHT AND RED-GREEN-BLUE COLORATION TO DETERMINE PROPERTIES OF BACK SCATTERED LIGHT"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,296, entitled "ADAPTIVE CONTROL PROGRAM UPDATES FOR SURGICAL DEVICES"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,333, entitled "CLOUD-BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR CUSTOMIZATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS TO A USER"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,327, entitled "CLOUD-BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS FOR SECURITY AND AUTHENTICATION TRENDS AND REACTIVE MEASURES"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,315, entitled "DATA HANDLING AND PRIORITIZATION IN A CLOUD ANALYTICS NETWORK"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,313, entitled "CLOUD INTERFACE FOR COUPLED SURGICAL DEVICES"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,320, entitled "DRIVE ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS"; ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,307, entitled "AUTOMATIC TOOL ADJUSTMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGICAL PLATFORMS"; and ● US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 649,323, including

entitled "SENSING ARRANGEMENTS FOR ROBOT-ASSISTED SURGI-CAL PLATFORMS".

[0077] The applicant for this application holds the following provisional US patent applications, filed on April 19, 2018, each of which has its description incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for reference: ● US Provisional Patent Application no. serial number 62 / 659,900, entitled "METHOD OF HUB COMMUNICATION".

[0078] Before explaining in detail the various aspects of surgical instruments and generators, it should be noted that the illustrative examples are not limited, in terms of application or use, to the details of construction and arrangement of parts illustrated in the drawings and in the attached description. Illustrative examples can be implemented or incorporated into other aspects, variations and modifications, and can be practiced or executed in several ways. Furthermore, except where otherwise indicated, the terms and expressions used in the present invention were chosen for the purpose of describing illustrative examples for the convenience of the reader and not for the purpose of limiting it. In addition, it should be understood that one or more of the aspects, expressions of aspects, and / or examples described below can be combined with any one or more of the other aspects, expressions of aspects and / or examples described below. Smoke evacuation and energy devices

[0079] The present description refers to energy devices and intelligent surgical evacuation systems to evacuate smoke and / or other fluids and / or particles from a surgical site. During a surgical procedure that uses one or more energy devices, smoke is often generated. Energy devices use energy to affect tissue. In a power device, power is supplied by a generator. Energy devices include devices with electrodes for contact with tissue, such as an electrosurgical device equipped with electrodes that operate on one or more radio frequencies (RF), and devices with vibrating surfaces, such as an ultrasonic device fitted with an ultrasonic blade. . For an electrosurgical device, a generator is configured to generate oscillating electrical currents to energize the electrodes. For an ultrasonic device, a generator is configured to generate ultrasonic vibrations to energize the ultrasonic blade. The present description describes generators in more detail.

[0080] Ultrasonic energy can be used for coagulation and tissue cutting. Ultrasonic energy coagulates and cuts the tissue through the vibration of an energy application surface (for example, an ultrasonic sheet) in contact with the tissue. The ultrasonic blade can be coupled to a waveguide that transmits vibrational energy from an ultrasonic transducer, which generates mechanical vibrations and is powered by a generator. Vibrating at high frequencies (for example, 55,500 times per second), the ultrasonic blade generates heat and friction between the blade and the tissue, that is, at the blade-tissue interface, and this denatures the proteins in the tissue to form a clot sticky. The pressure exerted on the tissue by the surface of the slide flattens blood vessels and allows the clot to form a hemostatic seal. The precision of cutting and coagulation can be controlled by the doctor's technique and by adjusting the energy level, blade edge, tissue traction and blade pressure, for example.

[0081] Ultrasonic surgical instruments are finding increasingly widespread applications in surgical procedures due to the unique performance characteristics of these instruments. Depending on the specific instrument configurations and specific operating parameters, ultrasonic surgical instruments can substantially provide both coagulation cut and hemostasis, which can, desirably, minimize trauma to the patient. The cutting action is typically performed by an end actuator, or blade tip, at the distal end of the ultrasonic instrument. The ultrasonic end actuator transmits ultrasonic energy to the tissue placed in contact with the end actuator. Ultrasonic instruments of this nature can be configured for open surgical use, laparoscopic or endoscopic surgical procedures, including, for example, robotically assisted procedures.

[0082] Electric energy can also be used for coagulation and / or cutting. An electrosurgical device typically includes a handle and an instrument that has a correctly mounted end actuator (for example, one or more electrodes). The end actuator can be positioned against and / or adjacent to the tissue, so that electric current is introduced into the tissue. Electrosurgery is widely used and offers many advantages including the use of a single surgical instrument for both coagulation and cutting.

[0083] The electrode or tip of the electrosurgical device is small at the point of contact with the patient to produce an RF current with a high current density to produce a surgical coagulation and / or tissue cutting effect by cauterization. The return electrode transports the same RF signal back to the electrosurgical generator after the signal passes through the patient, thus providing a return path for the RF signal.

[0084] Electrosurgical devices can be configured for bipolar or monopolar operation. During bipolar operation, the current is introduced into the tissue and returned from it through the active and return electrodes, respectively, of the end actuator. During monopolar operation, a current is introduced into the tissue by an active electrode of the end actuator and returned via a return electrode (for example, a grounding plate) separately located on or against the patient's body. The heat generated by the current flowing through the tissue can form hemostatic seals within the tissue and / or between tissues and, therefore, can be particularly useful for sealing blood vessels, for example. The end actuator of an electrosurgical device sometimes also comprises a cutting member that is movable in relation to the tissue and the electrodes, to transpose the tissue.

[0085] In application, an electrosurgical device can transmit RF current at low frequency through the tissue, which causes friction, or ionic agitation (ie, resistive heating), which therefore increases the tissue temperature. Due to the fact that a boundary is created between the affected tissue and the surrounding tissue, doctors can operate with a high level of precision and control, without sacrificing the unaddressed adjacent tissue. The low operating temperature of the RF energy is useful for removing, shrinking or sculpting soft tissues while simultaneously cauterizing blood vessels. RF energy can work particularly well in connective tissue, which mainly comprises collagen and shrinks when it comes in contact with heat. Other electrosurgical instruments include, without limitation, irreversible and / or reversible electroporation, and / or microwave technologies, among others. The techniques disclosed here are applicable to ultrasonic, bipolar or monopolar (electrosurgical) RF, irreversible and / or reversible electroporation and / or microwave-based surgical instruments, among others.

[0086] The electrical energy applied by an electrosurgical device can be transmitted to the instrument from a generator. The generator is configured to convert electricity into high-frequency waveforms produced from oscillating electrical currents, which are transmitted to the electrodes to affect tissue. The current passes through the tissue to glow (a form of coagulation in which an arc of current over the tissue creates scorching of the tissue), to dry (a direct application of energy that draws water from the cells), and / or to cut (an direct energy that vaporizes the cellular fluid causing cellular explosions) the tissue. The response of the fabric to the current is a function of the resistance of the fabric, the density of the current passing through the fabric, the output power and the time of application of the current. In certain cases, as described hereinafter, the current waveform can be adjusted to perform a different surgical function and / or accommodate tissue with different properties. For example, different types of tissue, such as vascular tissue, nerve tissue, muscles, skin, fat and / or bone tissue may respond differently to the same waveform.

[0087] Electric energy can be in the form of RF energy, which can be in a frequency range described in document EN 60601-2-2: 2009 + A11: 2011, Definition 201.3.218 - "HIGH FREQUENCY" . For example, frequencies in monopolar RF applications are typically restricted to less than 5 MHz to minimize problems associated with high frequency dispersion current. Frequencies above 200 kHz can typically be used for monopolar applications to avoid unwanted nerve and muscle stimulation, which would result from using a low frequency current.

[0088] In bipolar RF applications, the frequency can be almost any. Lower frequencies can be used for bipolar techniques in certain situations, as in the case of a risk analysis showing that the possibility of neuromuscular stimulus has been mitigated to an acceptable level. It is generally accepted that 10 mA is the lower limit of thermal effects on tissue. Higher frequencies can also be used in the case of bipolar techniques.

[0089] In certain cases, a generator can be configured to digitally generate an output waveform and supply it to a surgical device, so that the surgical device can use the waveform for various effects in fabrics. The generator can be a monopolar generator, a bipolar generator and / or an ultrasonic generator. For example, a single generator can supply power to a monopolar device, a bipolar device, an ultrasonic device or a combination of electrosurgical device / ultrasonic device. The generator can promote tissue-specific effects through waveforming, and / or it can direct RF energy and ultrasonic energy simultaneously and / or sequentially to a single surgical instrument or to multiple surgical instruments.

[0090] In one case, a surgical system can include a generator and several surgical instruments that can be used with it, including an ultrasonic surgical instrument, an RF electrosurgical instrument, and an ultrasonic instrument / instrument combination. RF electrosurgical. The generator can be configurable for use with various surgical instruments, as further described in US patent application No. 15 / 265,279, entitled "TECHNIQUES FOR OPERATING GENERATOR FOR DIGITALLY GENERATING ELEC- TRICAL SIGNAL WAVEFORMS AND SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS", deposited on September 14 2016, now US Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0086914, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0091] As described here, medical procedures for cutting tissue and / or cauterizing blood vessels are often performed using RF electric energy, which is produced by a generator and applied to the patient's tissue through a electrode that is operated by a doctor. The electrode releases an electrical discharge into the cell material of the patient's body adjacent to the electrode. The discharge causes the cellular matter to heat up, in order to cut the tissue and / or cause blood vessels.

[0092] The high temperatures involved in electrosurgery can cause thermal necrosis of the tissue adjacent to the electrode. The longer the tissue is kept exposed to the high temperatures involved in electrosurgery, the more likely the tissue is to suffer from thermal necrosis. In certain cases, thermal necrosis of the tissue can decrease the tissue cutting speed and increase postoperative complications, the production of bedsores and the healing time, as well as increasing the incidences of thermal damage to the tissue far from the cutting site. .

[0093] The concentration of the RF energy discharge affects both the efficiency with which the electrode is able to cut the tissue and the likelihood of damage to the tissue far from the cutting site. With a standard electrode geometry, RF energy tends to be distributed evenly over a relatively large area adjacent to the intended incision site. A generally uniform distribution of RF energy discharge increases the likelihood of unwanted charge loss to the surrounding tissue, which can increase the likelihood of unwanted damage to the surrounding tissue.

[0094] Typical electrosurgical generators generate various operating frequencies of RF electrical energy and output power levels. The specific operating frequency and output power of a generator varies depending on the particular electrosurgical generator used and the physician's needs during the electrosurgical procedure. The specific levels of operating frequency and output power can be manually adjusted on the generator itself by a doctor or other members of the operating room staff. The proper adjustment of these various parameters requires great knowledge, skill and attention from the doctor or other team members. After the physician has made the desired adjustments to the various configurations in the generator, the generator can maintain the output parameters during electrosurgery. In general, wave generators used for electrosurgery are adapted to produce RF waves with an output power in the range of 1 to 300 W in a cut mode, and from 1 to 120 W in coagulation mode, and a frequency in the range of 300 to 600 kHz. Typical wave generators are adapted to maintain the selected settings during electrosurgery. For example, if the doctor needed to adjust the generator's output power level to 50 W and then touch the patient with the electrode to perform electrosurgery, the generator's power level would increase rapidly and be maintained at 50 W. from the power level to a specific value, such as 50 W, allows the doctor to cut through the patient's tissue, by keeping such a high power level, the probability of thermal necrosis of the patient's tissue increases.

[0095] In some embodiments, a generator is configured to provide enough energy to effectively perform electrosurgery that makes use of an electrode that increases the concentration of RF energy discharge, while limiting unwanted damage to the fabric. , reduces postoperative complications and facilitates faster healing. For example, the waveform of the generator can be optimized by a control circuit during the entire surgical procedure. However, the claimed subject of the present invention is not limited to aspects that solve any disadvantages or that operate only in environments such as those described above. Instead, such background is provided only to illustrate an example of a technology area where some aspects described here can be practiced.

[0096] As disclosed herein, energy devices provide mechanical and / or electrical energy to the target tissue to treat the tissue (for example, cutting the tissue, cauterizing blood vessels and / or coagulating the tissue in and / or near target tissue). Cutting, cauterization and / or coagulation of the tissue can result in the release of fluids and / or particulates in the environment. Such fluids and / or particulates emitted during a surgical procedure may constitute smoke, for example, which may comprise carbon particles and / or other particles suspended in the air. In other words, a fluid can comprise smoke and / or other fluidic matter. Approximately 90% of open endoscopic and surgical procedures produce some level of smoke. Smoke can be unpleasant for the doctor (s), assistant (s) and / or patient (s) olfactory senses, can obstruct the doctor (s) view of the surgical site and , in some cases, can be harmful to health. For example, smoke produced during an electrosurgical procedure may contain toxic chemicals such as acrolein, acetonitrile, acrylonitrile, acetylene, alkylbenzenes, benzene, butadiene, butene, carbon monoxide, cresols, ethane, ethylene, formaldehyde, free radicals , hydrogen cyanide, isobutene, methane, phenol, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons, propene, propylene, pyridine, pyrrole, styrene, toluene and xylene, as well as dead and living cellular materials (including blood fragments) and viruses . Some materials that have been identified in surgical smoke have been identified as known carcinogens. It is estimated that one gram of tissue cauterized during an electrosurgical procedure may be equivalent to the toxins and carcinogens present in six unfiltered cigarettes. In addition, exposure to smoke released during an electrosurgical procedure is identified as causing irritation in the eyes and lungs of healthcare professionals.

[0097] In addition to the toxicity and unpleasant odors associated with the material present in surgical smoke, the size of particles in surgical smoke can be harmful to the respiratory system of physician (s), assistant (s) and / or patient (s). In certain cases, the particulates can be extremely small. Repeated inhalation of extremely small particles can lead to acute and chronic respiratory conditions in certain cases.

[0098] Many electrosurgical systems employ a surgical evacuation system that captures the smoke resulting from a surgical procedure, and directs the captured smoke through a filter and an escape door away from the doctor (s) and / or patient (s). For example, an evacuation system can be configured to evacuate the smoke that is generated during an electrosurgical procedure. The reader will recognize that such an evacuation system can be called a "smoke evacuation system", although that evacuation system can be configured to evacuate more than just smoke from a surgical site. Throughout this description, the "smoke" evacuated by an evacuation system is not limited to the smoke itself. Instead, the smoke evacuation systems disclosed herein can be used to evacuate a variety of fluids, including liquids, gases, vapors, smoke, water vapor, or combinations of the same. The fluids can be of biological origin and / or they can be introduced into the surgical site from an external source during a procedure. Fluids can include water, saline, lymph, blood, exudate and / or purulent discharge, for example. In addition, fluids may include particulates or other materials (for example, cellular matter or debris) that are released by the evacuation system. For example, such particulates can be suspended in the fluid.

[0099] Evacuation systems typically include a pump and a filter. The pump creates a suction that drains the smoke into the filter. For example, suction can be configured to drain smoke from the surgical site into the opening of a duct, through an evacuation duct and then into an evacuation cabinet of the evacuation system. An evacuation cabinet 50018 for a surgical evacuation system 50000 is illustrated in Figure 1. In one aspect of the present description, a pump and filter are positioned inside the evacuation cabinet 50018. The smoke drained into the cabinet from evacuator 50018, it goes to the filter through a suction duct 50036, and harmful toxins and unpleasant odors are removed from the smoke by filtration as it moves through the filter. The suction line can also be called a vacuum and / or evacuation line and / or pipe, for example. The filtered air can then escape from the surgical evacuation system as an exhaust. In certain cases, the various evacuation systems disclosed herein can also be configured to deliver fluids to a desired location, such as a surgical site.

[0100] Now, with reference to Figure 2, the suction duct 50036 coming out of the 50018 evacuator cabinet (Figure 1) can end in a handle, like the handle 50032. The handle 50032 comprises an electrosurgical instrument that includes an electrode tip 50034 and an opening of the evacuation duct near and / or in a position adjacent to the electrode tip 50034. The opening of the evacuation duct is configured to capture the fluid and / or particulates that are released during a surgical procedure. In this case, the evacuation system 50000 is integrated with the electrosurgical instrument 50032. Still with reference to Figure 2, smoke S is pulled into the suction duct 50036.

[0101] In certain cases, the 50000 evacuation system may include a separate surgical tool that comprises an opening in the duct and is configured to suck smoke into the system. In still other cases, a tool comprising opening the evacuation duct can be snapped onto an electrosurgical tool, as shown in Figure 3. For example, a portion of a 51036 suction duct can be positioned around (or adjacent to) a 51034 electrode tip. In one case, the suction line 51036 can be releasably attached to a 51032 grip of an electrosurgical tool comprising the 51034 electrode tip using clamps or other fasteners.

[0102] Various internal components of a 50518 evacuator cabinet are shown in Figure 4. In several cases, the internal components in Figure 4 can also be incorporated into the 50018 evacuator cabinet of Figure 1. With reference mainly to Figure 4, a system 50500 evacuation valve includes 50518 evacuator cabinet, 50502 filter, 50520 exhaust mechanism and pump

50506. The evacuation system 50500 defines a flow path 50504 through the evacuation cabinet 50518 which has an inlet port 50522 and an outlet port 50524. Filter 50502, exhaust mechanism 50520 and pump 50506 are arranged sequentially in line with the flow path 50504 through the evacuation cabinet 50518 between inlet port 50522 and outlet port 50524. Inlet port 50522 can be coupled in fluid communication with a suction duct, such as suction duct 50036 in Figure 1, for example, which can comprise a distal opening of the conduit that can be positioned at the surgical site.

[0103] The 50506 pump is configured to produce a pressure differential in the 50504 flow path by mechanical action. The pressure differential is configured to drain smoke 50508 from the surgical site into the entrance port 50522 and along the 50504 flow path. After smoke 50508 has passed through filter 50502, smoke 50508 can be considered smoke filtered, or air, 50510, which can then continue on flow path 50504 and then be expelled through outlet port 50524. Flow path 50504 includes a first zone 50514 and a second zone 50516. The first zone 50514 is upstream pump 50506; the second zone 50516 is downstream of the pump 50506. The pump 50506 is configured to pressurize the fluid in the flow path 50504 so that the fluid in the second zone 50516 has a higher pressure than the fluid in the first zone

50514. A 50512 motor drives the 50506 pump. Several suitable motors are additionally described here. The 50520 exhaust mechanism is a mechanism that can control the speed, direction and / or other properties of the filtered smoke 50510 exiting the evacuation system 50500 at the exit port 50524.

[0104] The 50504 flow path through the 50500 evacuation system can be comprised of a pipe or other conduit that substantially contains and / or isolates the fluid that moves through the 50504 flow path of the fluid on the side of out of the flow path

50504. For example, the first zone 50514 of the flow path 50504 may comprise a tube through which the flow path 50504 extends between the filter 50502 and the pump 50506. The second zone 50516 of the flow path 50504 may also include a tube through which flow path 50504 extends between pump 50506 and exhaust mechanism 50520. Flow path 50504 also extends through filter 50502, pump 50506 and exhaust mechanism 50520 so that the flow path 50504 extends continuously from input port 50522 to output port 50524.

[0105] In operation, smoke 50508 can flow into filter 50502 at inlet port 50522 and can be pumped through flow path 50504 by pump 50506 so that smoke 50508 is drained into filter 50502. A filtered smoke 50510 can then be pumped through the exhaust mechanism 50520 and out of the exhaust port 50524 of the evacuation system 50500. The filtered smoke 50510 from the evacuation system 50500 at the exhaust port 50524 is the exhaust, and may consist of in filtered gases that passed through the 50500 evacuation system.

[0106] In several cases, the evacuation systems disclosed here (for example the 50000 evacuation system and the 50500 evacuation system) can be incorporated into a computer-implemented interactive surgical system, such as the 100 system (Figure 39) or system 200 (Figure 47), for example. In one aspect of the present description, for example, the computer-implemented surgical system 100 may include at least one central controller 106 and a cloud

104. Referring mainly to Figure 41, the central controller 106 includes a smoke evacuation module 126. The operation of the smoke evacuation module 126 can be controlled by the central controller 106 based on its situational recognition and / or the feedback provided by its components and / or based on information from the cloud 104. The surgical systems implemented by computer 100 and 200, as well as their situational recognition, are described later in this document.

[0107] Situational recognition encompasses the ability of some aspects of a surgical system to determine or infer information related to a surgical procedure from data received from databases and / or instruments. The information may include the type of procedure being performed, the type of tissue being operated on, or the body cavity that is the object of the procedure. By having contextual information related to the surgical procedure, the surgical system can, for example, improve the way in which it controls the modular devices (for example, a smoke evacuation system) that are connected to it and provide contextual information or suggestions to the doctor during the course of the surgical procedure. Situational recognition is described later in this document and in US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 611,341, entitled "INTE-RACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed on December 28, 2017, which is incorporated herein as a reference in its entirety.

[0108] In several cases, the surgical systems and / or the surgical evacuation systems disclosed herein may include a processor. The processor can be programmed to control one or more operating parameters of the surgical system and / or the evacuation system based on detected and / or aggregated data and / or one or more user actions, for example. Figure 5 is a schematic representation of a 50300 electrosurgical system that includes a 50308 processor. The 50300 electrosurgical system is powered by a 50302 AC source, which provides either 120 V or 240 V alternating current. 50302 AC source is directed to a 50304 AC / DC converter, which converts 120 V or 240 V alternating current to 360 V direct current. The 360 V direct current is then directed to a 50306 power converter. (for example, a "buck" converter). The 50306 power converter is a DC to DC reduction converter. The 50306 power converter is adapted to reduce the input voltage of 360 V to a desired level within a range between 0 and 150 V.

[0109] The 50308 processor can be programmed to regulate various aspects, functions and parameters of the 50300 electrosurgical system. For example, the 50308 processor can determine the desired output power level at a 50334 electrode tip, which can be similar in many respects to the 50034 electrode tip in Figure 2 and / or to the 51034 electrode tip in Figure 3, for example, and to instruct the 50306 power converter to decrease the voltage to a low level

specified in order to provide the desired output power. The 50308 processor is coupled to a 50310 memory configured to store instructions executable by machine to operate the 50300 electrosurgical system and / or subsystems thereof.

[0110] Connected between the 50308 processor and the 50306 power converter is a digital to analog converter ("DAC") 50312. The DAC 50312 is adapted to convert a digital code created by the 50308 processor to an analog signal ( current, voltage, or electrical charge) that controls the voltage reduction performed by the power converter

50306. After the 50306 power converter reduces the voltage to 360 V to a level that the 50308 processor has determined will provide the desired output power level, the voltage is directed to the 50334 electrode tip to perform the electrosurgical treatment of the tissue from a patient and is then directed to a 50335 return or grounding electrode. A 50314 voltage sensor and a 50316 current sensor are adapted to detect the voltage and current present in the electrosurgical circuit, and communicate to the 50308 processor the parameters detected so that the 50308 processor can determine whether or not to adjust the output power level. As noted, typical wave generators are adapted to maintain the settings selected during an electrosurgical procedure. In other cases, the operational parameters of a generator can be optimized during a surgical procedure based on one or more inputs for the 5308 processor, such as inputs from a central surgical controller, cloud and / or module. situational recognition, for example, as described later in this document.

[0111] The 50308 processor is coupled to a 50318 communication device to communicate over a network. The communication device includes a 50320 transceiver configured to communicate over physical or wireless wires. The communication device 50318 may further include one or more additional transceivers. Transceivers may include, but are not limited to, cellular modems, wireless mesh network transceivers, Wi-Fi® transceivers, low power remote network (LPWA) transceivers and / or near field communication transceivers ( NFC). The communication device 50318 can include or can be configured to communicate with a mobile phone, a sensor system (for example, environmental, position, motion etc.) and / or a sensor network (wired and / or wireless), a computing system (for example a server, a workstation computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a tablet computer (for example iPad®, GalaxyTab® and the like), a ultraportable computer, ultra-mobile computer, netbook computer and / or subnotebook computer, etc. In at least one aspect of the present description, one of the devices may be a coordinating node.

[0112] The 50320 transceivers can be configured to receive serial transmission data from the 50308 processor through respective universal asynchronous transmitters and receivers (UARTs - "universal asynchronous receivers / transmitters") to modulate the serial transmission data in one RF carrier to produce a transmit RF signal and to transmit the transmit RF signal through respective transmit antennas. The transceiver (s) is (are) additionally configured (s) to receive, via respective RF antennas, an RF reception signal that includes an RF carrier modulated with serial reception data, to demodulate the receive RF signal to extract the receive serial data and supply it to the respective UARTs to supply to the processor. Each RF signal has an associated carrier frequency and an associated channel bandwidth. The channel bandwidth is associated with the carrier frequency, transmission data and / or reception data. Each RF carrier frequency and channel bandwidth are related to the operating frequency range (s) of the transceiver (s)

50320. Each channel bandwidth is additionally related to the wireless communication standard and / or protocol to which the 50320 transceiver (s) can conform. In other words, each 50320 transceiver can correspond to an implementation of a selected wireless communication standard and / or protocol, for example, the IEEE 802.11 a / b / g / n standard for Wi-Fi® or the standard IEEE 802.15.4 for wireless mesh networks that use Zigbee routing.

[0113] The 50308 processor is coupled to a 50324 intelligent detection and control device that is coupled to a smoke evacuator

50326. The 50326 smoke evacuator may include one or more 50327 sensors, and may also include a pump and pump motor controlled by a 50328 motor driver. The 50328 motor driver is coupled in communication with the 50308 processor and with the pump motor on the 50326 smoke evacuator. The 50324 intelligent detection and control device includes 50321 sensor algorithms and 50322 communication algorithms that facilitate communication between the 50326 smoke evacuator and other devices to adapt your control programs. The 50324 intelligent detection and control device is configured to evaluate fluids, particulates and gases extracted through a 50336 evacuation duct to improve smoke extraction efficiency and / or reduce smoke output from the device, eg - as described further in the present description. In certain cases, the 50324 intelligent detection and control device is coupled in communication with one or more 50327 sensors in the 50326 smoke evacuator, one or more 50330 internal sensors and / or one or more 50332 external sensors of the 50300 electrosurgical system.

[0114] In certain cases, a processor may be located inside an evacuation cabinet of a surgical evacuation system. For example, with reference to Figure 6, a 50408 processor and its 50410 memory are arranged inside a 50440 evacuator cabinet of a 50400 surgical evacuation system. Processor 50408 is in communication. signal with a motor driver 50428, several internal sensors 50430, a screen 50442, memory 50410 and a communication device 50418. The communication device 50418 is similar in many respects to the communication device 50318 described above with reference to Figure 5. The 50418 communication device can enable the 50408 processor in the 50400 surgical evacuation system to communicate with other devices in a surgical system. For example, the communication device 50418 may enable wired and / or wireless communication with one or more external sensors 50432, one or more surgical devices 50444, one or more central controllers 50448, one or more clouds 50446 and / or one or more additional surgical systems and / or tools. The reader will readily recognize that the 50400 surgical evacuation system in Figure 6 can, in certain cases, be incorporated into the 50300 electrosurgical system in Figure 5. The 50400 surgical evacuation system also includes a 50450 pump, which includes a 50451 pump motor, an evacuation duct 50436 and an exhaust 50452. Various pumps, evacuation ducts and exhausts are described later in this document. The 50400 surgical evacuation system may also include a smart detection and control device, which can be similar in many ways to the 50324 smart detection and control device, for example. For example, such a sensing device and intelligent controls may be in signal communication with the 50408 processor and / or one or more of the 50430 sensors and / or the external 50432 sensors.

[0115] The 50300 electrosurgical system (Figure 5) and / or the 50400 surgical evacuation system (Figure 6) can be programmed to monitor one or more parameters of a surgical system and can perform a surgical function based on one or more algorithms stored in a memory in signal communication with the 50308 processor and / or the 50408 processor. Several exemplifying aspects disclosed here can be implemented by such algorithms, for example.

[0116] In one aspect of the present description, a processor and a sensor system, such as the 50308 and 50408 processors and the respective sensor systems in communication with the processors (Figures 5 and 6), are configured to detect the flow of air through a vacuum source to adjust parameters of the smoke evacuation system and / or external devices and / or systems that are used in conjunction with the smoke evacuation system, such as an electrosurgical system, an energy device and / or a generator, for example. In one aspect of the present description, the sensor system can include multiple sensors positioned along the airflow path of the surgical evacuation system. The sensors can measure a pressure differential within the evacuation system, to detect a state or condition of the system between the sensors. For example, the system between two sensors can be a filter, and the pressure differential can be used to increase the speed of the pump motor as the flow through the filter is reduced, in order to maintain a flow through the system. As another example, the system can be a fluid collector from the evacuation system, and the pressure differential can be used to determine an airflow path through the evacuation system. In yet another example, the system can be the inlet and outlet (or exhaust) of the evacuation system, and the pressure differential can be used to determine the maximum suction load in the evacuation system to maintain the maximum suction load below limit value.

[0117] In one aspect of the present description, a processor and a sensor system, such as the 50308 and 50408 processors and the respective sensor systems in communication with the processors (Figures 5 and 6), are configured to detect the proportion of an aerosol or carbonized particles, that is, smoke, in the fluid extracted from a surgical site. For example, the detection system can include a sensor that detects the size and / or composition of the particles, and the information is used to select an airflow path through the evacuation system. In this case, the evacuation system can include a first filtration path, or a first filtration state, and a second filtration path, or a second filtration state, which can have different properties. In one case, the first path includes only a particulate filter, and the second path includes both a fluid filter and the particulate filter. In certain cases, the first path includes a particulate filter, and the second path includes the particulate filter and a finer particulate filter arranged in series. The invention also contemplates additional and / or alternative filtration paths.

[0118] In one aspect of the present description, a processor and a sensor system, such as the 50308 and 50408 processors and the respective sensor systems in communication with the processors (Figures 5 and 6), are configured to perform an analysis chemical action on particles evacuated from a patient's abdominal cavity. For example, the 50324 intelligent detection and control device can detect the particle count and type to adjust the power level of the ultrasonic generator to induce the ultrasonic blade to produce less smoke. In another example, sensor systems can include sensors to detect particle count, temperature, fluid content and / or the percentage of contamination from the evacuated fluid, and can communicate property or pro-

detected properties to a generator to adjust its output. For example, the 50326 smoke evacuator and / or the 50324 smart detection and control device can be configured to adjust the evacuation flow and / or the pump motor speed and, at a predefined particulate level , can operationally affect the generator's output power or waveform to decrease the smoke generated by the end actuator.

[0119] In one aspect of the present description, a processor and a sensor system, such as the 50308 and 50408 processors and the respective sensor systems with the processors (Figures 5 and 6), are configured to evaluate the particle count and contamination in the operating room by assessing one or more properties in the ambient air and / or in the exhaust that leaves the evacuator cabinet. Particle counts and / or air quality can be displayed on the smoke evacuation system, for example in the evacuator cabinet, to communicate the information to a doctor and / or establish the effectiveness of the ventilation system. smoke evacuation and its filter (s).

[0120] In one aspect of the present description, a processor, such as the 50308 processor or the 50408 processor (Figures 5 and 6), for example, is configured to compare an image of the sample rate obtained from an endoscope with the count of particles in the evacuator provided by the detection system (for example, the 50324 intelligent control and detection device) to determine a correlation and / or to adjust the pump speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). In one case, generator activation can be communicated to the smoke evacuator so that an estimated required smoke evacuation rate can be implemented. The activation of the generator can be communicated to the surgical evacuation system through a central surgical controller, cloud communication system and / or direct connection, for example.

[0121] In one aspect of the present description, the sensor systems and algorithms for a smoke evacuation system (see, for example, Figures 5 and 6) can be configured to control the smoke evacuator, and can adapt engine parameters to adjust the filtration efficiency of the smoke evacuator based on the needs of the surgical field at any given time. In one case, an airflow pump speed adaptation algorithm is provided to automatically adjust the pump engine speed based on the particulate count detected at the smoke evacuator inlet and / or released at the outlet. or escape from the smoke evacuator. For example, the 50324 intelligent detection and control device (Figure 5) can include a user-selectable speed and an automatic mode speed, for example. At automatic mode speed, the air flow through the evacuation system can be scalable based on the smoke entering the evacuation system and / or the lack of filtered particles released from the smoke evacuation system. The speed of the automatic mode can enable automatic detection and compensation for the laparoscopic mode in certain cases.

[0122] In one aspect of this description, the evacuation system can include a communication and electrical architecture (see, for example, Figures 5 and 6) that provides data collection and communication features to improve interactivity with a central surgical controller and a cloud. In one example, a surgical evacuation system and / or processor, such as processor 50308 (Figure 5) and processor 50408 (Figure 6), for example, may include a segmented control circuit that is energized in a method in stages to check for errors, shorts and / or for system security checks. The segmented control circuit can also be configured to have an energized portion and a non-energized portion until the energized portion performs a first function. The segmented control circuit can include circuit elements to identify and show the user the status updates of the connected components. The segmented control circuit also includes circuit elements to run the motor in a first state, in which the motor is activated by the user, and in a second state, in which the motor was not activated by the user, but starts the pump in a quieter mode and at a slower pace. A segmented control circuit can enable the smoke evacuator to be energized in stages, for example.

[0123] The communication and electrical architecture for the evacuation system (see, for example, Figures 5 and 6) can also enable the interconnectivity of the smoke evacuator with other components present in the central surgical controller, both for interactions and for communicating data with a cloud. Communication of the parameters of the surgical evacuation system to a central surgical controller and / or cloud can be provided in order to affect the output or the operation of other connected devices. The parameters can be operational or detected. Operational parameters include air flow, pressure differentials and air quality. The detected parameters include particulate concentration, percentage of aerosol and chemical analysis.

[0124] In one aspect of the present description, the evacuation system, such as the 50400 surgical evacuation system, for example, may also include a replaceable compartment and components, controls and a screen. Circuit elements are provided to communicate the safety identification (ID) between such replaceable components. For example, communication between a filter and the electronic smoke evacuation circuit can be provided to check the component's authenticity, remaining service life, update parameters on the component, record errors and / or limit the number and / or the type of components that can be identified by the system. In several cases, the communication circuit can authenticate resources to enable and / or disable configuration parameters. The communication circuit can use encryption and / or error handling schemes to manage security and ownership relationships between the component and the electronic smoke evacuation circuit. In certain cases, disposable / reusable components are included.

[0125] In one aspect of this description, evacuation systems can provide fluid management and extraction and airflow filter configurations. For example, a surgical evacuation system is provided that includes a fluid capture mechanism, the fluid capture mechanism having a first and a second set of extraction or airflow control features arranged in series to extract large and small fluid droplets, respectively. In certain cases, the air flow path may contain a recirculation channel or secondary fluid channel returning to the main reservoir downstream of the exhaust port of the main fluid management chamber.

[0126] In one aspect of the present description, an advanced block can be coupled to the electrosurgical system. For example, the grounding electrode 50335 of the 50300 electrosurgical system (Figure 5) may include an advanced block with localized detection that is integrated into the block while maintaining the capacitive coupling. For example, the capacitive coupling return path of the block may have small separable matrix elements that can be used to detect control signals and / or nerve movement from certain anatomical sites, to detect the proximity of the monopolar tip to a nervous bundle.

[0127] An electrosurgical system may include a signal generator, an electrosurgical instrument, a return electrode and a surgical evacuation system. The generator can be an RF wave generator that produces RF electrical energy. Connected to the electrosurgical instrument is a utility conduit. The utility conduit includes a cable that carries electrical energy from the signal generator to the electrosurgical instrument. The utility conduit also includes a vacuum hose that carries smoke and / or fluid captured / collected away from a surgical site. Such an exemplary 50601 electrosurgical system is shown in Figure 7. More specifically, the 50601 electrosurgical system includes a 50640 generator, a 50630 electrosurgical instrument, a 50646 return electrode and a 50600 evacuation system. The 50630 electrosurgical instrument includes a 50632 cable and a 50632 cable. distal opening of the 50634 duct coupled in fluid communication with a 50636 suction hose from the 50600 evacuation system. The 50630 electrosurgical instrument also includes an electrode that is powered by the 50640 generator. The first 50642 electrical connection, for example a wire, extends from the 50630 electrosurgical instrument to the generator

50640. The second electrical connection 50644, for example a wire, extends from the 50630 electrosurgical instrument to the electrode, that is, the 50646 return electrode. In other cases, the 50630 electrosurgical instrument can be a bipolar electrosurgical instrument. The distal opening of the conduit 50634 in the electrosurgical instrument 50630 is coupled in fluid communication with the suction hose 50636 which extends to an end cap of the filter 50603 of a filter installed in an evacuation cabinet 50618 of the 50600 evacuation system.

[0128] In other cases, the distal opening of conduit 50634 of the 50600 evacuation system may be arranged in a handle or tool that is separate from the 50630 electrosurgical instrument. For example, the 50600 evacuation system may include a tool surgery that is not coupled to the 50640 generator and / or does not include tissue energizing surfaces. In certain cases, the distal opening of the 50634 duct of the 50600 evacuation system can be releasably attached to an electrosurgical tool. For example, the 50600 evacuation system may include a flue-fixed or press-fit conduit ending in a distal conduit opening, which can be releasably attached to a surgical tool (see, for example, Figure 3).

[0129] The 50630 electrosurgical instrument is configured to supply a patient's target tissue with electrical energy to cut the tissue and / or cauterize blood vessels within the target tissue and / or next to it, as described here . Specifically, an electrical discharge is provided to the patient by the electrode tip to cause the patient's cell matter to heat up in close contact with or in a position adjacent to the electrode tip. The tissue is heated at a suitably high temperature to allow the 50630 electrosurgical instrument to be used to perform electrosurgery. The return electrode 50646 is applied to or placed in close proximity to the patient (depending on the type of return electrode), to complete the circuit and provide an electrical return path to the 50640 generator for the energy that passes to the patient's body.

[0130] The heating of the patient's cell matter by the electrode tip, or cauterization of blood vessels to prevent bleeding, often results in the release of smoke at the place where the cauterization occurs, as described here. In such cases, as the 50634 evacuation duct opening is close to the electrode tip, the 50600 evacuation system is configured to capture the smoke that is released during a surgical procedure. Vacuum suction can drain the smoke into the conduit opening 50634, via the 50630 electrosurgical instrument, and into the suction hose 50636 towards the 50618 evacuator cabinet of the 50600 evacuation system.

[0131] Referring now to Figure 8, the 50618 evacuator cabinet of the 50600 evacuation system is shown (Figure 7). The 50618 evacuator cabinet includes a 50620 socket that is sized and structured to receive a filter. The 50618 evacuator cabinet can cover all or some of the internal components of the 50618 evacuator cabinet. Socket 50620 includes a first receptacle 50622 and a second receptacle 50624. A transition surface 50626 extends between the first receptacle 50622 and the second receptacle. - Ceptacle 50624.

[0132] Referring primarily to Figure 9, socket 50620 is shown along a cross-section plane shown in Figure 8. Socket 50620 includes a first end 50621 that is opened to receive a filter, and a second end 50623 in communication with a 50699 flow path through the 50618 evacuator cabinet. A 50670 filter (Figures 10 and 11) can be removably positioned with socket 50620. For example, the 50670 filter can be inserted and removed from the first end 50621 from socket 50620. The second receptacle 50624 is configured to receive a 50670 filter connection nozzle.

[0133] Surgical evacuation systems often use filters to remove unwanted pollutants from smoke before it is released as an escape. In certain cases, the filters can be replaced. The reader should consider that the 50670 filter shown in Figures 10 and 11 can be used in the various evacuation systems disclosed here. The 50670 filter can be a replaceable and / or disposable filter.

[0134] The filter 50670 includes a front cover 50672, a rear cover 50674 and a filter body 50676 disposed between them. The front cover 50672 includes a 50678 filter inlet which, in certain cases, is configured to receive smoke directly from the 50636 suction hose (Figure 7) or from another source of smoke. In some aspects of the present description, the front cover 50672 can be replaced by a fluid collector (for example, the fluid collector 50760 shown in Figures 14 to 17) which directs the smoke directly from the smoke source, and which after removing at least a portion of the filter fluid passes the partially processed smoke into the 50676 filter body for further processing. For example, the 50678 filter inlet can be configured to receive smoke through a fluid collector exhaust port, such as a 50766 port on a 50760 fluid collector (Figures 14 to 17) to pass partially processed smoke. into the 50670 filter.

[0135] After entering the 50670 filter, the smoke can be filtered by components housed within the 50676 filter body. The filtered smoke can then escape from the 50670 filter through a 50680 filter exhaust set in the 50674 rear cover of the filter 50670. When the 50670 filter is associated with an evacuation system, the suction generated in the 50618 evacuation cabinet of the 50600 evacuation system can be communicated to the 50670 filter through the 50680 filter exhaust to pull the smoke through the components internal filters of the 50670 filter. A filter usually includes a particulate filter and a charcoal filter. The particulate filter can be a high efficiency particulate air filter (HEPA) or an ultra low penetration air filter (ULPA), for example. ULPA filtration uses a depth filter that is similar to a labyrinth. Particulate particles can be filtered using at least one of the following methods: direct interception (in which particles larger than 1.0 microns are captured because they are too large to pass through the fibers of the filter medium); inertial impaction (in which particles between 0.5 and 1.0 microns collide with the fibers and remain there; and diffusion interception (in which particles smaller than 0.5 microns are captured by the effect of the Brow- nian as they "look for" and stick to fibers).

[0136] The charcoal filter is configured to remove toxic gases and / or odors generated by surgical smoke. In several cases, charcoal can be "activated", which means that the charcoal has been treated with a heating process to expose the places of active absorption. The charcoal can be of activated virgin coconut shells, for example.

[0137] Now with reference to Figure 11, filter 50670 includes a layer of coarse filter medium 50684 followed by a filter layer of fine particles 50686. In other cases, filter 50670 can consist of a single type of filter. In still other cases, the 50670 filter may include more than two filter layers and / or more than two different types of filter layers. After the removal of particulate matter by the filter layers 50684 and 50686, the smoke is drained through a 50688 coal reservoir in the 50670 filter to remove gaseous contaminants in the smoke, such as volatile organic compounds, for example. In several cases, the 50688 coal reservoir may comprise a charcoal filter. The filtered smoke, which is now substantially free of particulate matter and gaseous contaminants, is drained through the 50680 filter exhaust and into the 50600 evacuation system for further processing and / or disposal.

[0138] The 50670 filter includes a plurality of barriers between components of the 50676 filter body. For example, a first 50690 barrier is positioned between the 50678 filter inlet (Figure 10) and a first particulate filter, as the medium coarse filter 50684, for example. A second barrier 50692 is positioned between a second particulate filter, such as the fine particulate filter 50686, for example, and the 50688 coal reservoir. In addition, a third 50694 barrier is positioned between the 50688 coal reservoir and the es-

filter cap 50680. Barriers 50690, 50692 and 50694 may comprise a gasket or seal, which is configured to prevent movement of components within the body of the 50676 filter. In many cases, the size and shape of the barriers 50690, 50692 and 50694 can be selected to prevent distension of the filtration components in the direction of the applied suction.

[0139] The 50684 coarse filter media may include a low air-resistant filter material, such as fiberglass, polyester and / or pre-set filters that are configured to remove most particles larger than 10 µm, for example. In some aspects of the present description, this includes filters that remove at least 85% of particles larger than 10 µm, more than 90% of particles larger than 10 µm, more than 95% of particles larger than 10 µm, more 99% of particles larger than 10 µm, more than 99.9% of particles larger than 10 µm, or more than 99.99% of particles larger than 10 µm.

[0140] Additionally or alternatively, the 50684 coarse filter medium may include a low air resistance filter that removes most particles larger than 1 µm. In some aspects of the present description, this includes filters that remove at least 85% of particles greater than 1 µm, more than 90% of particles greater than 1 µm, more than 95% of particles greater than 1 µm, more than 99 % of particles larger than 1 µm, more than 99.9% of particles larger than 1 µm, or more than 99.99% of particles larger than 1 µm.

[0141] The 50686 fine particulate filter can include any more efficient filter than the 50684 coarse filter medium. This includes, for example, filters that are capable of filtering a higher percentage of particles of the same size as the coarse filter medium 50684 and / or capable of filtering smaller particles than coarse filter medium 50684. In some aspects of the present description, the fine particulate filter

50686 can include a HEPA filter or an ULPA filter. In addition or alternatively, the fine particulate filter 50686 can be pleated to increase its surface area. In some aspects of the present description, the coarse filter medium 50684 includes a pleated HEPA filter and the fine particulate filter 50686 includes a pleated ULPA filter.

[0142] After particulate filtration, the smoke enters a section downstream of the 50670 filter that includes the 50688 coal reservoir. The 50688 coal reservoir is bounded by 50696 and 50698 porous dividers between the intermediate barrier and the terminal barrier 50692 and 50694, respectively. In some aspects of this description, porous dividers 50696 and 50698 are rigid and / or inflexible and define a constant spatial volume for the 50688 coal reservoir.

[0143] The 50688 coal reservoir may include additional absorbents that act cumulatively with or independently of the carbon particles to remove gaseous pollutants. Additional absorbents may include, for example, absorbents such as magnesium oxide and / or copper oxide, for example, which can act to adsorb gaseous pollutants such as carbon monoxide, ethylene oxide and / or ozone, for example . In some aspects of the present description, additional absorbents are dispersed throughout the 50688 reservoir and / or are positioned in separate layers above, below or within the 50688 reservoir.

[0144] Again referring to Figure 4, the 50500 evacuation system includes the 50506 pump inside the evacuator cabinet

50518. Similarly, the 50600 evacuation system shown in Figure 7 can include a pump located in the 50618 evacuator cabinet, which can generate suction to drain smoke from the surgical site, through the 50636 suction hose and through the 50670 filter ( Figures 10 and 11). In operation, the pump can create a pressure differential inside the 50618 evacuator cabinet which causes smoke to flow into the 50670 filter and outside the exhaust mechanism (for example, the 50520 exhaust mechanism in Figure 4) on exit from the flow path. The 50670 filter is configured to extract harmful, unpleasant or otherwise unwanted particles present in the smoke.

[0145] The pump can be arranged in line with the flow path through the 50618 evacuator cabinet so that the gas flowing through the 50618 evacuator cabinet enters the pump at one end and exits the pump at the other far end. The pump can provide a sealed positive displacement flow path. In several cases, the pump can produce the sealed positive displacement flow path by confining (sealing) a first volume of gas and decreasing that volume to a smaller second volume as the gas moves through the pump. Decreasing the volume of the trapped gas increases the gas pressure. The second volume of pressurized gas can be released from the pump at an outlet of the pump. For example, the pump can be a compressor. More specifically, the pump may comprise a hybrid regenerative blower, a claw pump, a lobe compressor and / or a spiral compressor. Positive displacement compressors can provide optimized compression ratios and operating pressures while limiting vibrations and noise generated by the 50600 evacuation system. In addition or alternatively, the 50600 evacuation system can include a fan to move fluid through it.

[0146] An example of a positive displacement compressor, for example a 50650 spiral compressor pump, is shown in Figure

12. The 50650 spiral compressor pump includes a stator coil 50652 and a mobile coil 50654. The stator coil 50652 can be fixed in position while the mobile coil 50654 performs an eccentric orbit. For example, the mobile spiral 50654 can perform an eccentric orbit by rotating around the central longitudinal axis of the stator spiral 50652. As shown in Figure 12, the central longitudinal axes of the stator spiral 50652 and the mobile spiral 50654 extend perpendicularly to the viewing plane of the spirals 50652, 50654. The stator spiral 50652 and the movable spiral 50654 are interspersed with each other to form separate sealed compression chambers 50656.

[0147] In use, a gas can enter the 50650 spiral compressor pump at an inlet 50658. As the mobile spiral 50654 rotates around the stator spiral 50652, the gas at the inlet is trapped first in the compression chamber 50656. The compression chamber 50656 is configured to move a distinct volume of gas along the contour of the spirals 50652 and 50654 towards the center of the 50650 spiral compressor pump. The compression chamber 50656 defines a sealed space in the which the gas resides. In addition, as the mobile spiral 50654 moves the captured gas towards the center of the stator spiral 50652, the compression chamber 50656 decreases in volume. This decrease in volume increases the gas pressure inside the 50656 compression chamber. The gas inside the sealed 50656 compression chamber is trapped while the volume decreases, pressurizing the gas. When the pressurized gas reaches the center of the 50650 spiral compressor pump, the pressurized gas is released through an outlet 50659.

[0148] Now with reference to Figure 13, a portion of a 50700 evacuation system is shown. The 50700 evacuation system can be similar in many respects to the 50600 evacuation system (Figure 7). For example, the evacuation system 50700 includes the evacuation cabinet 50618 and the suction hose 50636. Again with reference to Figure 7, the evacuation system 50600 is configured to produce suction and thus drain the smoke from the distal end of the hose. suction tube 50636 into the 50618 evacuator cabinet for processing. Notably, the suction hose 50636 is not connected to the 50618 evacuator cabinet through the 50603 filter end cap in Figure 13. Instead, the 50636 suction hose is connected to the 50618 evacuator cabinet via the fluid collector. 50760. A filter, similar to the 50670 filter, can be positioned inside the 50618 evacuator cabinet socket behind the fluid collector 50760.

[0149] The 50760 fluid collector is a first processing point that extracts and retains at least a portion of the fluid (eg liquid) from the smoke before redirecting the partially processed smoke to the 50700 evacuation system for processing additional and filtration. The 50700 evacuation system is configured to process, filter and otherwise clean smoke to reduce or eliminate unpleasant odors or other problems associated with the production of smoke in the operating room (or other operating environment), as described here. By extracting droplets of liquid and / or aerosol from the smoke before being further processed by the 50700 evacuation system, the 50760 fluid collector can, among other things, increase the efficiency of the 50700 evacuation system and / or increase the service life filters associated with the system in certain cases.

[0150] With reference mainly to Figures 14 to 17, the fluid collector 50760 is shown separate from the evacuator cabinet 50618 (Figure 13). The fluid collector 50760 includes an inlet port 50762 defined on a cover or front surface 50764 of the fluid collector

50760. Inlet port 50762 can be configured to reliably receive suction hose 50636 (Figure 13). For example, one end of the suction hose 50636 can be inserted at least partially into the inlet port 50762 and can be secured with an interference fit. In many cases, the interference fit may be a fluid-tight and / or air-tight fit so that substantially all of the smoke that passes through the 50636 suction hose is transferred to the 50760 fluid collector. In some cases, other mechanisms can be used to couple or connect the suction hose 50636 to the inlet port 50762, such as a compression fitting with a lock, a sealing ring, and screw the suction hose 50636 with the port. inlet 50762, for example, and / or other coupling mechanisms.

[0151] In several cases, a fluid-tight and / or air-tight fitting between the 50636 suction hose and the 50760 fluid collector is configured to prevent fluids and / or other materials in the evacuated smoke from leaking into or near the junction between these components. In some cases, the suction hose 50636 can be attached to the inlet port 50762 via an intermediate coupling device, such as a sealing ring and / or adapter, for example to ensure an air-tight connection and / or fluid between the suction hose 50636 and the fluid collector 50760.

[0152] As discussed above, fluid collector 50760 includes exhaust port 50766. The exhaust port extends in the opposite direction to a cap or rear surface 50768 of the fluid collector

50760. The exhaust port 50766 defines an open channel between an inner chamber 50770 of the fluid collector 50760 and the outside environment. In some cases, the 50766 exhaust port is dimensioned and shaped to be firmly associated with a surgical evacuation system or its components. For example, the exhaust port 50766 can be sized and shaped to associate with and direct at least partially processed smoke from the 50760 fluid collector to a filter housed within a 50618 evacuator cabinet (Figure 13). In certain cases, the exhaust port 50766 may extend in the opposite direction from the front plate, a top surface or a lateral surface of the 50760 fluid collector.

[0153] In certain cases, the exhaust port 50766 includes a membrane, which separates the exhaust port 50766 from the evacuator cabinet

50618. Such a membrane can act to prevent water or other liquid collected in the fluid collector 50760 from passing through the exhaust port 50766 and entering the 50618 evacuator cabinet, and at the same time allowing air, water and / or steam to pass through freely into the 50618 evacuator cabinet. For example, a high flow microporous polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) can be positioned downstream of the 50766 exhaust port and upstream of a pump to protect the pump or other components of the exhaust system. evacuation 50700 against damage and / or contamination.

[0154] The 50760 fluid collector also includes a 50772 pressure region, which is positioned and sized to assist a user in handling the 50760 fluid collector and / or in connecting the 50760 fluid collector with the water hose. suction 50636 and / or evacuator cabinet 50618. Grip region 50772 is shown to be an elongated recess; however, the reader should readily consider that the 50772 grip region may include at least one recess, groove, protuberance, tassel and / or ring, for example, which can be sized and shaped to accommodate the user's fingers or otherwise to provide a gripping surface.

[0155] Referring mainly to Figures 16 and 17, the internal chamber 50770 of the fluid collector 50760 is shown. The relative positioning of the inlet port 50762 and the exhaust port 50766 is configured to promote the extraction and retention of fluid extracted from the smoke as it passes into the fluid collector 50760. In certain cases, the inlet port 50762 may comprise a notched cylindrical shape, which can direct the smoke and the associated fluid to a 50774 fluid reservoir. fluid collector 50760 or otherwise in the direction opposite the exhaust port 50766. An example of such a fluid flow is shown with arrows such as A, B, C, D and E in Figure 17.

[0156] As shown, smoke enters fluid collector 50760 through inlet port 50762 (illustrated by arrow A) and exits fluid collector 50760 through exhaust port 50766 (illustrated by arrow E). At least partially due to the geometry of the entrance door (for example a longer upper side wall 50761 and a shorter lower side wall 50763), the smoke that enters the entrance door 50762 is initially directed mainly down into the reservoir. fluid 50774 from fluid collector 50760 (illustrated by the arrows (B). As it continues to be pulled down and into the fluid collector 50760 along arrows A and B, the smoke that started downwardly, continues to descend and is directed laterally in the direction opposite to its source to move in a substantially opposite path, but parallel towards the upper portion of the fluid collector 50760 and out of the exhaust port 50766 ( illustrated by arrows D and E).

[0157] The directional flow of smoke through the fluid collector 50760 can ensure that the liquids present in the smoke will be extracted and retained in the lower portion (for example, the fluid reservoir 50774) of the fluid collector 50760. In addition, the relative positioning of the exhaust port 50766 vertically above the inlet port 50762 when the fluid collector 50760 is in a vertical position is configured to prevent accidental transport of liquid through the exhaust port 50766 through the smoke stream, but without substantially prevent the flow of fluids into and out of the fluid collector

50760. Additionally, in certain cases, the configuration of the inlet port 50762 and the outlet port 50766 and / or the size and shape of the 50760 fluid collector itself can make the fluid collector 50760 resistant to spillage.

[0158] In several cases, an evacuation system may include a plurality of sensors and intelligent controls, as described later in this document with reference to Figures 5 and 6, for example. In one aspect of the present description, an evacuation system can include one or more temperature sensors, one or more fluid detection sensors, one or more pressure sensors, one or more particle sensors and / or one or more chemical sensors - cos. A temperature sensor can be positioned to detect the temperature of a fluid at the surgical site, which moves through a surgical evacuation system, and / or which is released into a surgical room from a surgical evacuation system. A pressure sensor can be positioned to detect pressure within the evacuation system, such as inside the evacuator cabinet. For example, a pressure sensor can be positioned upstream of the filter, between the filter and the pump and / or downstream of the pump. In certain cases, a pressure sensor can be positioned to detect pressure in the environment outside the evacuation system. Similarly, a particle sensor can be positioned to detect particles within the evacuation system, such as inside the evacuator cabinet. A particle sensor can be upstream of the filter, between the filter and the pump and / or downstream of the pump, for example. In many cases, a particle sensor can be positioned to detect particles in the environment to determine the air quality in the operating room, for example.

[0159] A 50818 evacuator cabinet from a 50800 evacuation system is shown schematically in Figure 18. The 50818 evacuator cabinet can be similar in many respects to the 50018 and / or 50618 evacuator cabinets, for example , and / or can be incorporated into the various evacuation systems disclosed herein. The 50818 evacuator cabinet includes several sensors that are further described here. The reader will recognize that certain evacuator cabinets may not include each sensor shown in Figure 18 and / or that they may include one or more additional sensors. Similar to the evacuator cabinets 50018 and 50618 disclosed here, the evacuator cabinet 50818 in Figure 18 includes an inlet 50822 and an outlet

50824. A fluid collector 50860, a filter 50870 and a pump 50806 are aligned sequentially along a flow path 50804 through the evacuator cabinet 50818 between inlet 50822 and outlet 50824.

[0160] An evacuator cabinet can include modular and / or replaceable components, as described later in this document. For example, an evacuator cabinet may include a 50871 socket or receptacle sized to receive a modular fluid collector and / or a replaceable filter. In certain cases, a fluid collector and a filter can be incorporated into a single 50859 interchangeable module, as shown in Figure 18. More specifically, the 50860 fluid collector and the 50870 filter form the 50859 interchangeable module, which can be modular and / or replaceable, and can be removably installed in receptacle 50871 in the 50818 evacuator cabinet. In other cases, fluid collector 50860 and filter 50870 can be separate and distinct modular components, which can be assembled together and / or installed separately in the 50818 evacuator cabinet.

[0161] Still referring to the 50818 evacuator cabinet, the 50818 evacuator cabinet includes a plurality of sensors to detect various parameters in the cabinet and / or environment parameters. In addition or alternatively, one or more modular components installed in the 50818 evacuator cabinet may include one or more sensors.

sores. For example, still referring to Figure 18, the 50859 exchangeable module includes a plurality of sensors to detect various parameters within it.

[0162] In several cases, the 50818 evacuator cabinet and / or one or more modular components compatible with the 50818 evacuator cabinet may include a processor, such as the 50308 and 50408 processors (Figures 5 and 6, respectively), which it is configured to receive inputs from one or more sensors and / or communicate the outputs to one or more systems and / or drivers. Various processors for use with the 50818 evacuator cabinet described later in this document.

[0163] In operation, smoke from a surgical site can be drained to the 50822 inlet of the 50818 evacuator cabinet through the 50860 fluid collector. The flow path 50804 through the 50818 evacuator cabinet in Figure 18 may comprise a conduit or 50805 sealed tube that extends between the various in-line components. In many cases, smoke can flow through a 50830 fluid detection sensor and a 50832 chemical sensor to a 50834 bypass valve, which is described later in this document. A fluid detection sensor, such as the 50830 sensor, can detect particles of fluid in the smoke. In one case, the 50830 fluid detection sensor can be a continuity sensor. For example, the 50830 fluid detection sensor can include two spaced electrodes and a sensor to detect the degree of continuity between them. When there is no fluid present, the continuity can be zero, or substantially zero, for example. The 50832 chemical sensor can detect the chemical properties of smoke.

[0164] At the 50834 bypass valve, the fluid can be directed into a condenser 50835 of the fluid collector 50860 and the smoke can continue towards the 50870 filter. Deflectors 50864 are positioned inside the condenser 50835 to facilitate condensation of fluid droplets present in the smoke in a reservoir in the 50860 fluid collector. A 50836 fluid detection sensor can ensure that any fluid in the evacuator cabinet will be fully, or at least substantially, captured within the 50860 fluid collector.

[0165] Still referring to Figure 18, the smoke can then be directed to flow into the 50870 filter of the 50859 interchangeable module. At the 50870 filter inlet, the smoke can flow through a 50838 particle sensor and a 50840 pressure sensor. In one embodiment, the 50838 particle sensor may comprise a laser particle counter, as described later in this document. The smoke can be filtered through a pleated ultra low penetration air filter (ULPA) 50842 and a charcoal filter 50844, as shown in Figure 18.

[0166] After leaving the filter, the filtered smoke can flow through a 50846 pressure sensor and can then continue along the 50804 flow path within the 50818 evacuator cabinet towards the 50806 pump. When moving through the pump 50806, filtered smoke can flow through a 50848 particle sensor and a 50850 pressure sensor at the outlet to the evacuator cabinet

50818. In one form, the 50848 particle sensor may comprise a laser particle counter, as further described in this document. The evacuator cabinet 50818 in Figure 18 also includes an air quality particle sensor 50852 and an ambient pressure sensor 50854 to detect various properties of the environment, such as the environment within the operating room. The air quality particle sensor, or external / ambient air particle sensor, 50852 can comprise a laser particle counter in at least one embodiment. The various sensors represented in the Figure

18 are described later in this document. In addition, in several cases, alternative detection means can be used in the smoke evacuation systems disclosed here. For example, alternative sensors for counting particles and / or determining the concentration of particulates in a fluid are also disclosed here.

[0167] In several cases, the 50860 fluid collector shown in Figure 18 can be configured to prevent spillage and / or leakage of the captured fluid. For example, the geometry of the 50860 fluid collector can be selected to prevent spillage and / or leakage of the captured fluid. In certain cases, fluid collector 50860 may include deflectors and / or splash screens, such as screen 50862, to prevent captured fluid from splashing out of the fluid collector

50860. In one or more cases, the 50860 fluid collector may include sensors to detect the volume of fluid within the fluid collector and / or determine whether the 50860 fluid collector is completely full. The 50860 fluid collector may include a valve for draining fluid from the collector. The reader will readily understand that several alternative fluid collector arrangements and geometries can be employed to capture the fluid drained into the 50818 evacuator cabinet.

[0168] In certain cases, the 50870 filter may include a greater and / or lesser number of filtration levels. For example, the 50870 filter may include one or more filter layers selected from the following filter group: a coarse filter medium filter, a fine filter medium filter and a sorbent-based filter. The coarse filter medium filter can be a low air resistance filter, which can be comprised of fiberglass, polyester and / or pleated filters, for example. The fine filter medium filter can be a high efficiency particulate air filter (HEPA) and / or an ultra low penetration air filter (ULPA). The sorbent-based filter can be an activated charcoal filter, for example. The reader should readily consider that several alternative filter arrangements and geometries can be used to filter smoke drained along the flow path through the 50818 evacuator cabinet.

[0169] In one or more cases, the 50806 pump shown in Figure 18 can be replaced by and / or used in combination with another compressor and / or pump, such as a hybrid regenerative blower, a grapple pump and / or lobe compressor, for example. The reader should readily consider that various pumping arrangements and alternative geometries can be employed to generate suction in the 50804 flow path to drain smoke into the 50818 evacuator cabinet.

[0170] The various sensors in an evacuation system, like the sensors shown in Figure 18, can communicate with a processor. The processor can be incorporated into the evacuation system and / or it can be a component of another surgical instrument and / or a central surgical controller. Several processors are further described here. An integrated processor can be configured to adjust one or more operating parameters of the evacuator system (for example a motor for the 50806 pump) based on inputs provided by one or more sensors. Additionally or alternatively, an integrated processor can be configured to adjust one or more operating parameters of another device, such as an electrosurgical tool and / or an imaging device based on inputs provided by one or more sensors.

[0171] Now with reference to Figure 19, another 50918 evacuator cabinet from an 50900 evacuation system is illustrated. The 50918 evacuator cabinet shown in Figure 19 can be similar in many ways to the 50818 evacuator cabinet shown in Figure 18. For example, evacuator cabinet 50918 defines a flow path 50904 between an inlet 50922 of the evacuator cabinet 50918 and an outlet 50924 of the evacuator cabinet 50918. Between inlet 50922 and outlet 50924, a fluid collector 50960, a filter 50970 and a 50906 pump are arranged sequentially. The 50918 evacuator cabinet may include a 50971 socket or receptacle sized to receive a modular fluid collector and / or a replaceable filter, similar to the 50871 receptacle, for example. In a 50934 bypass valve, the fluid can be directed into a condenser 50935 of the fluid collector 50960 and the smoke can continue towards the filter 50970. In certain cases, the fluid collector 50960 may include deflectors , such as baffles 50964, and / or splash screens, such as screen 50962, for example, to prevent the captured fluid from splashing out of the fluid collector 50960. The 50970 filter includes an ultra low penetration pleated air filter (ULPA ) 50942 and a charcoal filter 50944. A 50905 sealed duct or pipe extends between the various in-line components. Evacuator cabinet 50918 also includes sensors 50830, 50832, 50836, 50838, 50840, 50846, 50848, 50850, 50852 and 50854 which are described later in this document and shown in Figures 18 and 19.

[0172] Still referring to Figure 19, the 50918 evacuator cabinet also includes a 50980 centrifugal blower arrangement and a 50990 recirculation valve. The 50990 recirculation valve can selectively open and close to recirculate the fluid through the 50960 fluid collector For example, if the fluid detection sensor 50836 detects a fluid, the 50990 recirculation valve can be opened so that the fluid is redirected in the opposite direction of the 50970 filter and back into the 50960 fluid collector. fluid detection sensor 50836 does not detect a fluid, the 50990 valve can be closed so that the smoke is directed into the 50970 filter. When it is recirculated through the 50990 recirculation valve, the fluid can be drained through a recirculation 50982. The 50980 centrifugal blower arrangement is engaged with the recirculation duct 50982 to generate a recirculating suction force in the recir duct. 50982. More specifically, when the 50990 recirculation valve is opened and the 50906 pump is activated, the suction force generated by the 50906 pump downstream of the 50970 filter can generate rotation of the first centrifugal blower, or squirrel cage , 50984, which can be transferred to the second centrifugal blower, or squirrel cage, 50986, which extracts the recirculated fluid through the 50990 recirculation valve and into the 50960 fluid collector.

[0173] In various aspects of the present description, the schematic control diagrams in Figures 5 and 6 can be used with the various sensor systems and evacuator cabinets in Figures 18 and 19.

[0174] Smoke evacuated from a surgical site may include liquids, aerosols and / or gases, and / or may include material with different chemical and / or physical properties, such as particulate matter and particles with different sizes and / or densities, for example. The different types of materials evacuated from a surgical site can affect the efficiency of the surgical evacuation system and its pump. In addition, certain types of material may require the pump to consume excess energy and / or risk damaging the pump motor.

[0175] The energy supplied to the pump can be modulated in order to control the flow of smoke through the evacuation system, based on an input from one or more sensors along the flow path. The output of the sensors can be indicative of a state or quality of the smoke evacuation system and / or one or more properties of the evacuated smoke, such as the one or more types and reasons of matter, chemical properties, density and / or particulate size, for example. In one aspect of the present description, a pressure differential between two pressure sensors in the evacuation system can indicate the state of the region between them, such as the state of a filter, a fluid collector and / or the system in general, for example. Based on the sensor input, an operating parameter of the motor for the pump can be adjusted by changing the current supplied to the motor and / or the duty cycle, which is configured to change the motor speed.

[0176] In one aspect of this description, by modulating the flow of smoke through the evacuation system, the efficiency of the filter can be improved and / or the engine can be protected against wear.

[0177] A surgical evacuation system can include one or more particle counters, or particle sensors, to detect the size and / or the concentration of particulates in the smoke. Again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, particle sensors 50838 and 50848 are shown. The reader will readily understand that various means of measuring particles are possible. For example, a particle sensor can be an optical sensor, a laser sensor, a photoelectric sensor, an ionization sensor, an electrostatic sensor and / or combinations thereof. Several particle sensors are further described here.

[0178] In several cases, the motor speed and, therefore, the pump speed can be adjusted based on the particulate concentration detected by one or more particle sensors in a surgical evacuation system. For example, when one or more particle sensors detect an increased concentration of particulates in the flow path, which can correspond to an increased amount of smoke in the flow path, the motor speed can be increased to increase the pump speed. and to drain more fluid from the surgical site into the smoke evacuation system. Similarly, when one or more particle sensors detect a decreased concentration of particulates in the flow path, which can correspond to a decreased amount of smoke in the flow path, the engine speed can be decreased to decrease the pump speed and to reduce suction from the surgical site. Additional and alternative adjustment algorithms for the surgical evacuation system are additionally described here. In addition, in certain cases, based on sensor data from the smoke evacuation system, a generator in the surgical system can be controlled to adjust the amount of smoke generated at the surgical site, as additionally described here.

[0179] In addition to the particle sensors positioned along the flow path of the surgical evacuation system, the system can include one or more sensors to detect the concentration of particles in the environment, for example in the operating room or in the surgery Center. Again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, the 50852 air quality particle sensor is installed on an external surface of the 50818 evacuator cabinet. Alternative locations for the 50852 air quality particle sensor are also provided.

[0180] In at least one case, a particle sensor can be positioned downstream of the filter and, in certain cases, it can be positioned at, or close to, the filter outlet. For example, the particle sensor 50848 is positioned downstream of filter 50870 and pump 50806 in the smoke evacuation system 50800, and is positioned downstream of the filter 50970 and pump 50906 in the smoke evacuation system 50900. As the sensor particle 50848 is positioned downstream of one or more filters 50870, 50970, the particle sensor is configured to confirm that the one or more filters 50870, 50970 have removed sufficient particulates from the smoke. In many cases, this type of sensor may be adjacent to exhaust outlet 50824, 50924 in the evacuator cabinet

50818, 50918, respectively. In one aspect of the present description, an electrostatic particle sensor can be used. For example, the exhaust outlet 50824, 50924 may include an electrostatic particulate sensor through which the exhaust passes downstream of the filtration system and before it is expelled to the operating room.

[0181] The concentration of particulates detected by one or more sensors in the surgical evacuation system can be communicated to a doctor in several ways. For example, the evacuator cabinet 50818, 50918 and / or the evacuation device (for example the electrosurgical instrument 50032 in Figure 2) may include an indicator, such as one or more lights and / or display screens . For example, an LED in the 50818, 50819 evacuator cabinet may change color (for example, from blue to red) depending on the particulate volume detected by one or more sensors. In other cases, the indicator may include an alarm or warning, which can be tactile, auditory, and / or visual, for example. In such cases, when the concentration of particulates in the ambient air detected by the air quality sensor (for example, the 50852 particle sensor) exceeds a limit quantity, one or more doctors in the operating room may be notified by one or more more indicators.

[0182] In certain cases, a surgical evacuation system may include an optical sensor. The optical sensor can include an electronic sensor that converts light, or a change in light, into an electronic signal. The optical sensor can use a light scattering method to detect and count the particles in the smoke, in order to determine the concentration of particles in the smoke. In several cases, the light is based on laser. In one case, for example, a laser light source is configured to illuminate the particles as they move through a detection chamber. As the particles pass through the laser beam,

the light source is obscured, redirected and / or absorbed. The diffused light is recorded by a photodetector, and the recorded light is analyzed. For example, the registered light can be converted into an electrical signal indicating the size and quantity of the particles, which corresponds to the concentration of particulates in the smoke. The particulate concentration in the smoke can be calculated in real time by an optical laser sensor, for example. In one aspect of the present description, at least one of the 50838, 50848, 50852 particle sensors is an optical laser sensor.

[0183] A photoelectric sensor to detect particles in the smoke can be a beam-passing sensor, a reflective sensor, or a diffuse sensor. A 51000 reflective photoelectric sensor is represented in Figure 20. With reference to Figure 20, the reflective 51000 photoelectric sensor is a light scattering sensor in which a beam of light 51002 emitted from a 51006 light source through a 51012 lens is shifted from a photodetector, or photocell, 51004. For example, photodetector 51004 in Figure 20 is shifted 90 degrees from light source 51006. When smoke S obscures beam 51002 between the source light 51006 and a light collector 51008, the light is reflected, and the reflected light 51010 is spread towards a 51014 lens and over the 51004 photodetector. The 51004 photodetector converts the light into an electrical signal (current) corresponding to the particulate concentration in smoke S. The output signal can be supplied to a 51016 processor, which can be in many respects similar to the 50308 and / or 50408 processor represented in Figures 5 and 6, respectively, which can affect a operational parameter of the motor based on the electrical signal and the corresponding particulate concentration. For example, the output signal from the 51000 reflective photoelectric sensor can be an input to a control algorithm

control for the motor and / or an entrance for a central surgical controller.

[0184] A 51100 pass-through photoelectric sensor is shown in Figure 21. As shown in Figure 21, a line of sight extends between the 51102 light source and the 51104 photodetector. In these cases, the light intensity reaching the 51104 photodetector can be converted into an electrical signal (current) that corresponds to the particulate concentration in smoke S. The output signal can be supplied to a 51106 processor coupled to a 24 V direct current source, which may be similar in many respects to the 50308 and / or 50408 processors shown in Figures 5 and 6. The 51106 processor can affect an engine operating parameter, based on the electrical signal and the corresponding particulate concentration. For example, the output signal from the 51100 photoelectric sensor can be an input to a control algorithm for the motor and / or an input to a central surgical controller.

[0185] In a photoelectric sensor for a surgical evacuation system, such as the 51000 sensor in Figure 20 and / or the 51100 sensor in Figure 21, the wavelength of the light can be selected to adjust the 51000 sensor for specific types smoke, while ignoring other types of smoke. In certain cases, multiple sensors and / or multiple wavelengths can be used to mark the 51000 sensor in one or more correct combinations. Water vapor, even though it is thick water vapor, absorbs light of a certain wavelength. For example, water vapor absorbs infrared light, instead of reflecting it. Due to these water vapor absorption properties, infrared light can be useful in the presence of water vapor to accurately count the particles in the fluid in a surgical evacuation system.

[0186] In certain cases, an ionization sensor can be used to detect particles in the smoke. An ionization sensor includes two electrodes and radioactive material, which converts air molecules into positive and negative ions. The positive ions move towards the negative electrode, and the negative ions move towards the positive electrode. If smoke passes between the electrodes, the smoke binds to the ions, which interrupts the circuit. Falls in the current through the circuit can be converted into an electrical signal (current) that corresponds to the volume of smoke that passes between the electrodes.

[0187] A 51200 ionization sensor is shown in Figure 22. The 51200 ionization sensor uses Americium-241 to ionize air in a confined area. The 51200 sensor includes a small 51202 ionization chamber having two 51204 electrodes spaced apart. The 51202 ionization chamber can be made of polyvinyl chloride or polystyrene, for example, and the 51204 electrodes can be spaced about 1 cm apart within the 51202 ionization chamber, for example. A source of Amerício-241 51208 can supply Amerício-241 51202 to the ionization chamber. About 0.3 µg of Amerício-241 can be integrated into a gold foil matrix that is arranged between a silver support and a 2 micron thick palladium laminate layer, for example. Amerício-241 can have a half life of 432 years and falls by emitting 51206 alpha rays. The gold foil matrix is configured to retain radioactive material, while allowing alpha 51206 rays to pass through of you. In many cases, alpha rays are preferred over beta rays and gamma waves because they easily ionize particles in the air, have low penetrating power and can be easily contained.

[0188] During ionization, electrons are removed from the oxygen and nitrogen molecules, which produces charged ions. The charged ions are attracted to electrodes of opposite charges and thus form a current in the chamber. As the 51210 smoke particles are larger than the air molecules, the ionized particles collide and combine with the smoke particles. The combined particles act as recombination centers and neutralize the ions, which reduces the amount of ionized particles in the 51202 ionization chamber and reduces the total current. Current drops can be converted into an electrical signal corresponding to the volume of smoke that passes between the 51204 electrodes. The output signal can be supplied to a processor, such as the 50308 processor and / or the 50408 processor, shown in Figures 5 and 6, respectively, for example, which can affect an engine operating parameter. For example, the output signal from the 51200 ionization sensor can be an input to a control algorithm for the engine and / or an input to a central surgical controller, as further described here.

[0189] In several cases, double ionization chambers can be used. A first chamber, which acts as a detection chamber, can be opened to the atmosphere and affected by particulate matter, humidity and atmospheric pressure. A second chamber can be isolated against smoke and particulate matter. Although positioned outside the smoke flow path, the second chamber is still affected by humidity and atmospheric pressure. Through the use of two chambers, changes in humidity and atmospheric pressure can be minimized, as the outputs of both chambers are affected equally and cancel each other out. Since humidity and pressure can vary significantly during a surgical procedure - depending on the type of surgical procedure, the one or more surgical devices employed, and the type of tissue found, for example - a double ionization chamber can be useful in a system smoke evacuation to compensate for pressure and humidity changes.

[0190] In certain cases, a combined approach can be used to determine the concentration of particulates in the smoke. For example, multiple different types of smoke detectors or sensors can be used. These sensors can be arranged in series, aligned with the flow path. For example, a plurality of particle sensors can be positioned along flow path 50804 in Figure 18 and / or flow path 50904 in Figure 19. The various sensors can provide inputs for a pump motor control algorithm, like the various tuning algorithms described here.

[0191] In certain cases, the surgical evacuation system can be configured to adjust the sensor parameters in order to more accurately detect particulates in the smoke. The adjustment of the sensor parameters may depend on the type of surgical device, the type of surgical procedure and / or the type of tissue. Surgical devices often create a predictable type of smoke. In certain procedures, for example, a predictable type of smoke can be smoke with a high water vapor content. In these cases, an infrared photoelectric sensor can be used, because the infrared light is substantially absorbed and not reflected by the water vapor. Additionally or alternatively, a predictable type of smoke can be smoke having particles of a certain size or concentration. Based on the expected particle size, the sensor can be adjusted to more accurately determine the particulate concentration in the smoke.

[0192] In certain cases, situational recognition can make it easier to adjust the sensor parameters. Information relevant to situational recognition can be provided to a surgical evacuation system by a doctor, an intelligent electrosurgical instrument in signal communication with the surgical evacuation system, via a robotic system, central controller and / or cloud. For example, a central controller can include a situational recognition module, which can aggregate data from various sensor systems and / or input systems, including a smoke evacuation system, for example. Sensors and / or inputs in an interactive computer-implemented surgical system can be used to determine and / or confirm the surgical device used in the surgical procedure, the type and / or stage of the surgical procedure and / or the type of fabric, for example. In certain cases, situational recognition can predict the type of smoke that will result in a specific moment. For example, a situational recognition module can determine the type of surgical procedure and the stage of it to determine which type of smoke is likely to be produced. Based on the type of smoke expected, the sensors can be adjusted.

[0193] In certain cases, one or more of the particle sensors presented in the present invention may be fluid detection sensors. For example, the particle sensor can be positioned and configured to determine whether aerosols and / or liquid droplets are present in the evacuated smoke. In one aspect of the present description, the size and / or concentration of the detected particles may correspond to aerosol, liquid droplets, solid matter and / or a combination thereof. In certain cases, situational recognition can determine and / or confirm whether the detected particles are an aerosol or solid matter. For example, a situational recognition module in signal communication with the processor (for example, processor 50308 in Figure 5 and / or processor 50408 in Figure 6) can report the identification of particles in the fluid.

[0194] Now with reference to Figure 23, a graphical representation of particle count 51300 and motor speed 51302 is shown over time for a surgical evacuation system, such as the 50400 surgical evacuation system (Figure 6) , for example. A 51304 motor speed can be predefined and stored in the memory of the processor that is in signal communication with the motor

(see, for example, Figures 5 and 6.). In many cases, the processor can be configured to maintain the target speed of the 51304 engine under normal operating conditions. For example, the target speed of the 51304 engine can be stored in memory 50410 (Figure 6), and the 50408 processor (Figure 6) can be configured to maintain the target speed of the 51304 engine under normal operating conditions. In such cases, when the 50400 surgical evacuation system (Figure 6) is activated, the 50451 engine can run at the target speed of the 51304 engine, and can continue to run at the target speed of the 51304 engine unless one or more conditions are detected and / or communicated to the 50408 processor.

[0195] In certain cases, the 50408 processor may be in signal communication with a particle sensor, which is configured to detect in real time the concentration of particulates in the inflow smoke. Several examples of particulate concentration sensors, such as a laser particle counter sensor, are described here. In one aspect of the present description, particle sensor 50838 (Figures 18 and 19), which is positioned at the entrance to filter 50870 in Figure 18 and at the entrance to filter 50970 in Figure 19, may be in signal communication. with the 50408 processor (Figure 6). For example, the 50838 laser particle sensor may correspond to one of the 50430 sensors in Figure 6.

[0196] In several cases, when the particle sensor 50838 (Figures 18 and 19) detects that the concentration of particulates (for example, parts per million of particulate matter in the fluid) falls below a 51306 limit value, the Processor 50408 can instruct motor driver 50428 to slow engine 50451. For example, at time t1 in Figure 23, the particle count, or particle concentration, 51300 falls below the limit quantity 51306. As particle count 51300 dropped below the limit quantity 51306, the engine speed 51302 may be reduced below the target engine speed

51304. After that, if the particle sensor 50838 (Figures 18 and 19) detects that the particle count 51300 again exceeds the limit quantity 51306, as at time t2, processor 50408 can instruct the motor starter 50428 to increase engine speed 50451 in order to resume the target speed of engine 51304. The concentration of particulates may correspond to the size of the particles in the smoke. For example, smoke can contain smaller particles between time t1 and time t2. By reducing the speed of the 50451 engine, the suction generated by the 50450 pump can be reduced, which can ensure that smaller particles are not sucked through the 50400 surgical evacuation system filter. For example, reduce the engine speed or reducing the pump pressure can ensure that the filtration system has adequate time and capacity to capture particulate matter and ensure that fine filter media can capture the smallest particles. In other words, the slower speed can optimize the filtration efficiency of the 50400 surgical evacuation system.

[0197] In certain cases, the speed of the 50451 motor that drives the 50450 pump can be adjusted based on a particle sensor positioned downstream of the filter. For example, again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, the particle sensor 50848 is positioned downstream of filter 50870 in Figure 18 and downstream of filter 50970 in Figure

19. As the particle sensor 50848 is positioned downstream of the filter assembly, the particle sensor 50848 is configured to detect particulate in the exhaust of the 50800 surgical evacuation system or the 50900 evacuation system, for example. In other words, this type of particle sensor 50848 is configured to detect particulate matter that has passed through the 50818, 50918 evacuator cabinet and is being expelled into ambient air. The particle sensor 50848 is positioned adjacent to outlet 50824, 50924 of the evacuator cabinet 50818, 50918, respectively. In one case, when the particulate concentration in the exhaust (for example, the particulate concentration detected by the 50848 particle sensor) exceeds a predefined limit quantity, the 50308 processor (Figure 5) and / or the 50408 processor (Figure 6) can implement an adjustment for the pump. For example, again with reference to Figure 6, the speed of the 50451 engine can be adjusted to optimize the filtration efficiency of the 50400 surgical evacuation system.

[0198] The motor speed can be adjusted by limiting the current supplied to the motor and / or changing the motor's duty cycle. For example, a pulse modulation circuit may employ pulse width modulation and / or pulse frequency modulation to adjust the length and / or frequency of the pulses.

[0199] Additionally or alternatively, the exhaust fluid can be redirected through one or more filters in the surgical evacuation system, if the particle count in the exhaust exceeds a predefined limit quantity that could be dangerous or risky for one or more operators and doctors in the operating room. For example, if the 50838 particle sensor detects an exhaust gas particle count above a limit quantity, the 50308 processor (Figure 5) and / or the 50408 processor (Figure 6) can open a downstream valve filter, which can recirculate the exhaust and inject the recirculated exhaust into the flow path upstream of the filter. In certain cases, the valve can inject the recirculated exhaust in an alternative flow path that includes one or more additional and / or different filters, for example.

[0200] In certain cases, the surgical evacuation system may include an override option, in which the evacuation system continues to operate and / or continues to operate at a predefined power level, despite exceeding a defined limit. For example, in a surpass mode,

the surgical evacuation system can continue to operate and expel particles, even if the particle sensor downstream of the filter detects a particulate concentration that exceeds the limit quantity. An operator in the operating room can activate the override feature or override mode by activating a key, lever, button or other actuator in the evacuator cabinet and / or an entrance to the central surgical controller, for example.

[0201] Now with reference to Figure 27, a flowchart is shown representing an adjustment algorithm 52300 for a surgical evacuation system. Various surgical evacuation systems disclosed herein can use the 52300 adjustment algorithm in Figure 27. In addition, the reader will readily understand that, in certain cases, the 52300 adjustment algorithm can be combined with one or more additional adjustment algorithms here. described. Adjustments to the surgical evacuation system can be implemented by a processor, which is in signal communication with the evacuation pump motor (see, for example, the processors and pumps in Figures 5 and

6.). For example, the 50408 processor can implement the 52300 tuning algorithm. This processor can also be in signal communication with one or more sensors in the surgical evacuation system.

[0202] In several cases, a surgical evacuation system can initially operate in a 52302 standby mode, as shown in Figure 27, in which the engine is operated at low power, as indicated in block 52310, in order to sample fluid from the surgical site. For example, in 52302 standby mode, a small sample of fluid can be evacuated from the surgical site by the surgical evacuation system. 52302 standby mode can be the default mode of the evacuation system.

[0203] If a particle sensor upstream of the filter (for example the particle sensor 50838) detects a particle count, or a concentration of particulates, which is greater than an X limit value, as indicated in block 52312, the surgical evacuation system can enter 52304 automatic evacuation mode. In 52304 automatic evacuation mode, the engine speed can be increased in block 52314 to drain additional smoke from the surgical site. For example, the particle count, or the concentration of particulates, can increase above the limit quantity X when an electrosurgical procedure begins, or when a specific electrosurgical power level is activated. In certain cases, the engine speed can be adjusted during the 52304 automatic evacuation mode, based on the detected particulate concentration. For example, as the particulate concentration detected by the 50838 particle sensor increases, the engine speed may increase accordingly. In certain cases, the predefined speeds of the motors can correspond to a predefined range of a particulate concentration detected by the 50838 particle sensor.

[0204] Still with reference to Figure 27, if a particle sensor downstream of the filter (for example, the particle sensor 50848) detects a particle count, or a concentration of particulates, which is less than a limit quantity Y in block 52316, the motor can resume a low power mode in block 52310, and / or be further adjusted in block 52314, as provided here. In addition, if the downstream particle sensor 50848 detects a particle count, or a concentration of particulates, which is greater than a limit quantity Y and less than a limit quantity Z in block 52318, the engine speed can be decreased in block 52320 to improve filter efficiency. For example, a concentration of particulates detected by the particle sensor 50848 between the limits Y and Z can correspond to small particles that are passing through the filter of the smoke evacuation system.

[0205] Still referring to Figure 27, if the particle sensor 50848 downstream of the filter detects a particle count that is greater than the limit quantity of Z in block 52318, the motor can be turned off in block 52322 to interrupt the evacuation procedure, and the surgical evacuation system may enter a 52306 override mode. For example, the Z limit may correspond to an air quality risk for doctors and / or other staff in the operating room . In certain cases, the operator can selectively override the shutdown function, as additionally provided here, so that the engine continues to operate on block 52310. For example, the surgical evacuation system can return to standby mode 52302, in which fluid samples are evacuated from the surgical site and monitored by the surgical evacuation system.

[0206] In certain cases, the pump's power level may be a function of a pressure differential across at least a portion of the surgical evacuation system. For example, a surgical evacuation system can include at least two pressure sensors. Again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, the 50854 ambient pressure sensor is configured to detect the pressure in the environment. The pressure sensor 50840 is configured to detect the pressure in the flow path 50804, in an intermediate position to the fluid collector 50860 and the filter, or filtration system, 50870 in Figure 18, and to detect the pressure in the flow path. 50904 in an intermediate position between the fluid collector 50960 and the filter system 50970 in Figure 19. In addition, the pressure sensor 50846 is configured to detect the pressure in the flow path 50804 between the filtration system 50870 and the pump 50806 in Figure 18, and in the flow path 50904 between the filtration system 50970 and the pump 50906 in Figure 19. Finally, the pressure sensor 50850 is configured to detect the pressure in the flow path 50804 and 50904 at the exhaust port or outlet 50824 and 50924, respectively. The reader will readily understand that certain smoke evacuation systems may include less than, or more than, the four pressure sensors 50840, 50846, 50850 and 50854 shown in Figures 18 and 19. In addition, pressure sensors can be positioned in alternative locations throughout the surgical evacuation system. For example, one or more pressure sensors may be positioned on a smoke evacuation device, along the evacuation duct that extends between the evacuator and the cabinet, and inside the cabinet, as upstream of the fluid collector and / or between the different layers of the filtration system, for example.

[0207] Now with reference to Figure 28, a flowchart representing an adjustment algorithm 52400 for a surgical evacuation system is shown. In several cases, the surgical evacuation systems disclosed herein can use the adjustment algorithm of Figure 28. In addition, the reader will readily understand that, in certain cases, the adjustment algorithm 52400 of Figure 28 can be combined with one or more algorithms additional adjustment settings described here. Adjustments to the surgical evacuation system can be implemented by a processor, which is in signal communication with the evacuation pump motor (see, for example, the processors and pumps in Figures 5 and 6.). For example, the 50408 processor can implement the 52400 tuning algorithm. The processor can also be in signal communication with one or more pressure sensors in the surgical evacuation system.

[0208] In several cases, the 50408 processor is configured to obtain a pressure measurement P1 from a first pressure sensor in the 52402 block, and a second pressure measurement P2 from a second pressure sensor in the block 52404. The first and second pressure sensors can be provided by sensors 50430 in Figure 6, for example. The 50408 processor is configured to compare measurements P1 and P2 in block 52406, in order to determine a pressure differential between the first pressure sensor and the second pressure sensor. In one case, if the pressure differential is less than or equal to a limit quantity X, as in block 52408, the pump speed can be maintained. On the other hand, if the pressure differential is greater than the limit quantity X, as in block 52410, the pump speed can be adjusted. An adjustment to an operating parameter of the motor is configured to adjust the pump speed. Adjustment algorithm 52400 can be repeated continuously and / or at regular intervals. In certain cases, a doctor can trigger the implementation of the 52400 adjustment algorithm.

[0209] The flow of smoke through the evacuation system may be a function of the pressure differential. In one case, if a pressure differential through an evacuation system increases significantly, the flow through the system can also increase. Actual flow can be predicted based on pressure differential and engine speed. Therefore, by monitoring the pressure differential, the flow can be determined with greater precision.

[0210] Additionally, obstructions in the flow path may correspond to increases in the pressure differential. For example, as the filter captures smoke particles, the pressure differential across the filter can increase for a given pump speed. In response to a predefined pressure drop through the filter, the engine speed and the corresponding pump speed can be increased to maintain the flow of smoke through the system, despite occlusions in the filter. For example, again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, a first pressure sensor can be positioned upstream of the filter (for example the pressure sensor 50840) and a second pressure sensor can be positioned downstream of the filter. (for example the 50846 pressure sensor). The pressure differential between the 50840 pressure sensor and the 50846 pressure sensor can correspond to the pressure drop through the filter. As the filter captures particles in the smoke, the captured particles can obstruct the flow path, which can increase the pressure differential through the filter. In response to the increased pressure differential, the processor can adjust an engine operating parameter to maintain flow through the system. For example, the motor speed and the corresponding pump speed can be increased to compensate for the partially blocked filter in the flow path.

[0211] In other cases, a predefined pressure drop may correspond to a blockage in the evacuation line. In one example, to avoid damage to the tissue when the evacuation duct is blocked by the tissue, for example, the motor speed and the corresponding pump speed can be decreased. The decrease in pump speed in these cases can be configured to avoid potential trauma to the tissue.

[0212] In another example, a first pressure sensor can be positioned upstream of the fluid collector, and a second pressure sensor can be positioned downstream of the fluid collector (for example, the 50840 pressure sensor). The pressure differential between the sensors can correspond to the pressure drop through the fluid collector, which can correspond to the flow and / or the flow path through the fluid collector. The pressure differential across the fluid collector can also be estimated by other sensors in the fluid evacuation system. In certain cases, it is desirable to reduce the flow through the fluid collector to ensure sufficient removal of liquid from the smoke, before it enters one or more filters and the downstream pump. In such cases, the pressure differential can be reduced by reducing the motor speed and the corresponding pump speed.

[0213] In still other cases, a first pressure sensor can be positioned at the entrance to the surgical evacuation system, or in the evacuator cabinet thereof, and a second pressure sensor can be positioned at the exit to the surgical evacuation system ( for example the pressure sensor 50850). The pressure differential between the sensors can correspond to the pressure drop through the surgical evacuation system. In certain cases, the maximum suction load of the system can be kept below a limit value by monitoring the pressure drop across the system. When the pressure drop exceeds a limit quantity, the processor can adjust an engine operating parameter (for example, decelerating the engine) to reduce the pressure differential.

[0214] In one case, the 50832 chemical sensor can detect the pH of matter in physical contact with the sensor, such as fluid splashed over the 50832 sensor, for example. In one aspect of the present description, chemical sensor 50832 can detect the content of glucose and / or oxygen in the fluid. In certain cases, the 50382 chemical sensor can be configured to detect cancer by-products. If cancer by-products are detected, the parameters of the evacuation system can be adjusted to reduce the likelihood that such by-products will enter the operating room. In one instance, the pump speed can be reduced to improve the efficiency of a filter in the evacuation system, for example. In other cases, the evacuation system can be de-energized to ensure that cancerous by-products are not expelled to the surgical center.

[0215] Fluid extracted from a surgical site by a surgical evacuation system can contain liquids and various particulates. The combination of different types and / or states of matter in the evacuated fluid can make the evacuated fluid difficult to filter. Additionally or alternatively, certain types and / or states of matter can be harmful to certain filters. For example, the presence of liquid droplets in the smoke can damage certain filters and the presence of larger particles in the smoke can block certain filters for fine particles.

[0216] The sensors can be configured to detect a parameter of a fluid that moves through the evacuation system. Based on the parameter detected by one or more sensors, the surgical evacuation system can direct the evacuated fluid along an adequate flow path. For example, the fluid containing a percentage of liquid droplets above a certain limit parameter can be directed through a fluid collector. As another example, the fluid containing particulates above a limit size can be directed through a coarse filter medium, and the fluid containing particulates below the limit size can bypass the coarse filter medium and be directed to a easy medium. - fine trant.

[0217] By providing alternative flow paths through a surgical evacuation system, the surgical evacuation system and its one or more filters can operate more efficiently and be less prone to damage and / or blockage. The service life of the filters can also be extended. As provided herein, a filter may include one or more filter layers and, in certain cases, a filtration system may include one or more filters.

[0218] A 52934 bypass valve for a surgical evacuation system is shown in detail in Figures 24A and 24B. In one aspect of the present description, bypass valves 50834 and 50934 shown in surgical evacuation systems 50800 and 50900, in Figures 18 and 19 respectively, can comprise bypass valve 52934. Bypass valve 52934 comprises a ball valve 52396 , which is operationally structured to route a fluid from an entry path 52942 and along a first path 52940 or a second path

52938. In several cases, ball valve 52396 can be an electrically actuated ball valve comprising a controller. For example, a processor for the surgical evacuation system, such as the 50408 processor (Figure 6), can send a signal to the ball valve controller to initiate the rotation of the 52396 ball valve to change the flow path. smoke through it. When the bypass valve 52934 is in a first position (Figure 24A), the inflow of smoke through the bypass valve 52934 is directed along the first path 52940. When the bypass valve 52934 is in a second position (Figure 24B), the inflow of smoke through the bypass valve 52934 is directed along the second path 52938.

[0219] The first trajectory 52940 can correspond to a flow trajectory when no liquid has been detected in the smoke, or when the liquid-to-gas ratio or the percentage of aerosol detected is below a limit value. The second path 52938 can correspond to a flow path when liquid has been detected in the smoke, for example an aerosol, or when the liquid to gas ratio or the percentage of aerosol detected is equal to or greater than the limit value. In certain aspects of the present description, the first trajectory 52940 can deviate from a fluid collector, and the second trajectory 52938 can direct smoke through the fluid collector to capture fluids from the smoke, before the smoke is released. directed to the filter. By selecting a flow path based on the percentage of aerosols, the efficiency of the surgical evacuation system can be improved.

[0220] In other cases, bypass valve 52934 may include more than two path outlets for fluids. In addition, fluid paths can deflect / recirculate the fluid in relation to a fluid collector and / or direct the smoke along different filtration paths.

including different arrangements of fluid collectors, condensers and / or particulate filters, depending on the detected fluid parameters.

[0221] Again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, the fluid detection sensor 50830 is configured to detect the presence of aerosol, or the ratio of liquid to gas, in the smoke. For example, fluid detection sensor 50830 in Figure 18 is positioned at inlet 50822 to the 50818 evacuator cabinet. In other cases, fluid detection sensor 50830 may be positioned near inlet 50822 and / or in a location upstream of the 50870 filter and / or a socket for receiving the 50870 filter. Examples of fluid detection sensors are further described here. For example, the 50830 fluid detection sensor may include one or more of the particle sensors further disclosed here. Additionally or alternatively, in one aspect of the present description, the 50830 fluid detection sensor includes a continuity sensor.

[0222] In one case, if the 50830 fluid detection sensor detects a liquid-to-gas ratio equal to or above a limit value, the inflow can be diverted to a condenser before entering the particulate filter . The condenser can be configured to condense small liquid droplets in the flow path. In several cases, the condenser may include a honeycomb-like structure. The condenser can include a plurality of deflectors or other structures, on which the liquid is configured to condense. As the smoke flows through the condenser, the liquid can condense on the deflectors inside it, and can be directed to drip down into a fluid reservoir.

[0223] Referring mainly to Figure 18, the 50834 bypass valve is positioned to direct the inflow of smoke so as to bypass the condenser 50835, so that the smoke flows directly to the 50870 filter. With the bypass condenser 50835, the 50800 surgical evacuation system may require less power from the engine that drives the pump (see, for example, engine 50451 and pump 50450 in Figure 6). Now with reference to Figure 19, the bypass valve 50934 is positioned to direct the smoke into the condenser 50935 inside the fluid collector 50960, before the smoke flows into the filter 50970. On the other hand, if the fluid detection sensor 50830 detects a ratio of liquid to gas below the limit value, the inflow can deviate from condenser 50935 and be directed directly to filter 50970.

[0224] In many cases, the 50830 fluid detection sensor can detect the presence of smoke in the flow path. For example, the 50830 fluid detection sensor may comprise a particle sensor. The detection of particles, or the detection of a particulate concentration above a limit value, may indicate that there is smoke present in the flow path. In certain cases, the fluid detection sensor may not distinguish between solid particles (eg coal) and aerosol particles. In other cases, the 50830 fluid detection sensor can also detect the presence of aerosols. For example, the fluid detection sensor may include a continuity sensor, as described here, which can determine whether the detected particles are aerosols, for example.

[0225] In several cases, the surgical evacuation system may include additional or alternative flow paths. For example, the surgical evacuation system may include a flow path for high particulate content and a flow path for low particulate content. When a particle sensor such as the 50838 particle sensor (Figures 18 and 19), for example, detects a particulate concentration equal to or greater than a limit value, the smoke from the inflow can be deflected into a filter of particulates.

On the other hand, if the laser particle sensor detects a particulate concentration below the limit value, the smoke from the inflow can bypass the particulate filter. Similarly, different flow paths may correspond to different sizes and / or types of particles. For example, if larger particles are detected by the 50838 particle sensor, the smoke can be directed along a different path than it would be if smaller particles were detected. For example, a surgical evacuation system may include different types of particulate filters (for example, filters with coarse and fine filter media) and may use different filtration methods, such as direct interception, inertial impaction and diffusional interception based on the detected size (or size range) of the particles. Different flow paths can be selected to optimize fluid extraction and / or smoke particulate filtration, while minimizing energy consumption and / or engine effort. In certain instances, a standard flow path can be a more direct flow path and, by detecting a fluid parameter that exceeds a limit, the fluid can be diverted to the less direct flow path. The less direct flow path may require more energy.

[0226] In several cases, the engine for the surgical evacuation system can be adjusted based on the properties of the inflow smoke and / or the filter installed in the surgical evacuation system. Again with reference to the schematic diagram shown in Figure 6, the 50408 processor is in signal communication with the 50428 motor driver, which is coupled to the 50451 motor for the 50450 pump. The 50408 processor can be configured to adjust the 50451 motor based smoke and / or installed filter properties. In one case, the 50408 processor can receive inputs corresponding to the liquid volume within a flow path that includes the volume of aerosol suspended in the smoke and / or the volume of liquid droplets in contact with, or resting in, the piping system. surgical evacuation. Various sensors for detecting the fluid density of inlet smoke, such as continuity sensors, for example, are additionally described here.

[0227] The liquid to gas ratio of smoke can affect the efficiency of a smoke evacuation pump. For example, the one or more liquids in the smoke may be less compressible than the gas in the smoke, which can affect the efficiency of the pump. In addition, different types of pumps can operate differently in the presence of aerosols. In certain cases, the pump speed can be accelerated, and in other cases, the pump speed can be decelerated. To optimize the efficiency of the pump for the respective liquid to gas ratio, the processor can be configured to adjust the motor that drives the pump. In other words, a control program for the engine can be operationally adjust the pump speed based on the ratio of liquid to gas detected in the flow path.

[0228] Certain pumps can efficiently handle fluids that have a high liquid to gas ratio, so that the efficiency of the pump remains the same or increases. For example, certain volute pumps can handle aerosols in the smoke path. In these cases, the speed of rotation of the pump can be reduced with incompressible (or less compressible) fluids by increasing the air handling of the vacuum. Other pumps may be more sensitive to fluids with a high ratio of liquid to gas and thus can be slowed down to limit the pressure differential through the fluid collector.

[0229] In several cases, a sensor can be configured to detect the flow through a surgical evacuation system. For example, an optical sensor can be configured to measure the flow of particles within the surgical evacuation system. In certain cases, the flow detected through the surgical evacuation system can be used to manage the compressor's suction rate. An algorithm can determine the appropriate suction rate based on the flow and / or one or more smoke parameters detected (for example, particulate concentration, ratio between liquid and gas, etc.). For example, when a smoke having a high liquid-to-gas ratio enters the surgical evacuation system, the engine speed can be reduced to reduce the flow through the surgical evacuation system, including the fluid collector, so that more liquid can be extracted from the smoke before the smoke enters the pump. The liquid can damage certain pumps. For example, lobe pumps and regenerative blowers can be damaged if the liquid present in the smoke is allowed to enter.

[0230] Figure 25 shows a graphical representation of the fluid content in the air flow and the duty cycle over time for a surgical evacuation system, such as 50800 surgical evacuation systems (Figure 18) and / or 50900 (Figure 19). The fluid content can include aerosol and liquid droplets within the evacuation system, and can be detected by the fluid detection sensors 50830 and 50836 (Figures 18 and 19), for example. Again with reference to Figure 25, at the beginning of the procedure, the fluid detection sensors 50830 and 50836 detect an equal, or substantially equal, content of fluid in the smoke. In other words, the fluid content upstream of the respective fluid collector 50860, 50960 is the same, or substantially the same, as the fluid content downstream of the respective fluid collector 50860, 50960. The fluid content detected by both sensors 50830 and 50836 continues to increase as the procedure continues.

[0231] At time t1, the fluid content detected by both sensors 50830 and 50836 exceeds a fluid content limit (CT) 52102 and, to avoid damage to the filtration system, the smoke is redirected through the fluids, such as 50860 and / or 50960 fluid collectors. The CT 52102 fluid content limit may correspond to a fluid volume and / or aerosol percentage that would be detrimental to the filter system. Referring mainly to the 50900 evacuation system in Figure 19, the 50990 recirculation valve can be opened (as shown in Figure 19), so that the fluid can be redirected back into the 50935 fluid collector condenser 50960, before entering the 50970 filter. By recirculating the fluid, additional liquid droplets can be removed from it. As a result, again with reference to Figure 25, the fluid content detected by the fluid detection sensor 50836, positioned upstream of the 50970 filter, can decrease even below the fluid content limit CT 52102. In several cases, through the path air flow, the evacuator cabinet is adjusted at time t1, the engine duty cycle can be maintained, as shown in Figure 25.

[0232] Still with reference to the graphic representations in Figure 25, as the smoke is recirculated through the fluid collector, which captures some of the aerosol and / or liquid droplets, the downstream fluid detection sensor 50836 begins to detect a lower liquid content in the smoke. However, the upstream fluid detection sensor 50830 continues to detect an increasing amount of liquid in the smoke. In addition, at time t2, the downstream fluid detection sensor 50836 again detects a fluid content that exceeds the CT 52102 fluid content limit. To cope with the increasing fluid content, despite the smoke recirculation through the collector of fluids, the duty cycle for the pump motor is shortened at time t2 to reduce the pump speed, so that more liquid can be extracted from the smoke before the smoke enters the pump. As the pump adjusts to the reduced duty cycle, the fluid collector can more effectively capture aerosols and / or liquid droplets present in the smoke, and the fluid content detected by the 50836 fluid detection sensor eventually begins to decrease until below the limit for the CT 52102 fluid content.

[0233] In certain cases, the volume of fluid in the fluid collector and / or the leveling of the enclosure can be used to determine if the fluid level inside is approaching a limit, which may correspond to reaching the deflectors prevent spillage and / or the fluid collector outlet port to the particulate filter. The liquid can damage the particulate filter and / or reduce its efficiency, as further described here. To prevent liquid from entering the particulate filter, the processor can adjust the engine to minimize the likelihood of bringing the liquid into the particulate filter. For example, when a predefined volume of liquid enters the fluid collector and / or when the liquid inside the collector reaches a defined level or marker inside the compartment that exceeds a predefined safe level, the processor can instruct the engine to slow down.

[0234] In several cases, the control program for the engine can be additionally affected by the use of the pressure differential between pressure sensors in an evacuation system, such as pressure sensors 50840 and 50846 in the surgical evacuation system 50900 (Figure 19). For example, based on the pressure differential across the 50970 filter and the motor speed for the 50906 pump, a processor for the 50900 surgical evacuation system can be configured to predict the actual flow through the 50970 filter. In addition, the flow rate can be adjusted (by adjusting the engine speed, for example), to limit the flow and reduce the likelihood that the fluid will be pulled out of a reservoir in the 50960 fluid collector and to inside the 50970 filter.

[0235] As shown in the present invention, the surgical evacuation system may include one or more sensors configured to detect the presence of aerosol in the smoke (for example, a ratio between liquid and gas) and one or more sensors configured to de - detect the presence of carbonized particulates in the smoke (for example, a measurement in parts per million). In determining whether the fluid extracted is mainly steam, mainly smoke and / or the respective ratio between each, the surgical evacuation system can provide valuable information to a doctor, a smart electrosurgical instrument, a robotic system, a controller central and / or a cloud. For example, the ratio of steam to smoke may indicate the extent of tissue fusion and / or collagen cauterization. In several cases, the energy algorithm for an electrosurgical instrument and the generator for it can be adjusted based on the steam to smoke ratio.

[0236] In one aspect of the present description, when the extracted fluid is primarily vapor or comprises a high percentage of aerosol, a processor can adjust the amplitude and / or the power of an ultrasonic generator, such as generator 800 ( Figure 58). For example, a processor for a smoke evacuation system may be communi- catively coupled to generator 800. In one case, excess steam or aerosols may be generated when the energy is too high for a specific surgical scenario. In such cases, the power level of the generator can be reduced in order to reduce the generation of water vapor / aerosols by the power tool. In other cases, for higher particulate ratios, a processor can adjust the generator's power level. For example, the power level may be decreased due to particulate reasons above a limit value. In certain cases, the voltage can be adjusted to reduce the particulate generated by the power tool.

[0237] Now with reference to Figure 26, an adjustment algorithm 52200 is shown for a surgical evacuation system. Various surgical evacuation systems disclosed here can use the adjustment algorithm

52200. In addition, the reader will readily understand that, in certain cases, the 52200 tuning algorithm can be combined with one or more additional tuning algorithms described here. Adjustments to the surgical evacuation system can be implemented by a processor, which is in signal communication with the evacuation pump motor (see, for example, the processors and pumps in Figures 5 and 6). For example, the adjustment algorithm 52200 can be implemented by the 50408 processor in signal communication with the motor driver 50428 and / or a controller for a bypass valve, as additionally described here. The processor is configured to use multiple sensors to monitor the properties of the evacuated smoke. In one aspect of the present description, with reference to Figure 26, the processor is configured to determine whether inflow smoke includes particles and aerosols above a limit value.

[0238] At the beginning of the 52200 adjustment algorithm, a standard flow can start at block 52202 and one or more properties of inflow smoke can be monitored at block 52204. At block 52206, a sensor can be configured to check for the presence of particles in the fluid. If no particles are detected by the sensor, the standard flow and / or the power level can be maintained in the 52202 block. In one case, the standard flow can be a minimum flow, or an idle flow, as further described here. If particles are detected in block 52206 and it is determined that the particles are not aerosol particles in block 52208, a first adjustment of the flow and / or power level can be implemented in block 52210. For example, the flow and the level of potency can be increased to increase the evacuation of particles, ie smoke, from the surgical site. In certain cases, if the particles are determined to be aerosol particles in the 52208 block, or if a portion of the particles are aerosol particles, a second adjustment can be implemented.

[0239] In one aspect of the present description, the second adjustment may depend on the percentage of aerosol in the smoke. For example, if it was determined that the percentage of aerosol is greater than a first limit quantity, such as X%, in block 52212 of Figure 26, the smoke can be directed to a fluid collector in block 52214. On the other hand, if the aerosol concentration in the smoke is less than or equal to the limit quantity X%, the smoke can be directed to bypass the fluid collector in block 52216. The ducts and valves to direct the flow of fluids inside a system smoke evacuation are further described here. In certain cases, the flow and / or power level can be adjusted to sufficiently drain the fluid along the selected flow path, such as towards the fluid collector and / or around the fluid collector, for example . In one aspect of the present description, additional power and / or suction may be required to drain fluid into the fluid collector.

[0240] Still with reference to Figure 26, when leaving the fluid collector, if aerosol particles are still detected in the smoke in block 52218, and if the aerosol concentration is greater than a second limit quantity in the block 52220, as Y% in Figure 26, the flow can be reduced in block 52224 to ensure adequate extraction of the aerosol present in the smoke. On the other hand, if the aerosol concentration of the downstream fluid collector is less than or equal to the second limit quantity, Y%, the flow can be maintained in block 52222. As shown in Figure 26, when redirecting the suit - flow history and / or adjust and / or maintain the flow in adjustment algorithm 52200, the adjustment algorithm can return to block 52204 to continue monitoring one or more parameters of the smoke evacuation system. In certain cases, the adjustment algorithm 52200 can operate continuously in a cyclic manner, so that the smoke properties are being continuously monitored and / or transmitted to the processor in real time, or almost in real time. In other cases, the adjustment algorithm 52200 can repeat predefined times and / or intervals.

[0241] In certain cases, the surgical evacuation system may additionally include a chemical sensor, such as the chemical sensor 50832 (Figures 18 and 19.). The chemical sensor 50832 is located next to entrance 50822 for the surgical evacuation system 50800 and close to entrance 50922 for the surgical evacuation system

50900. The 50832 chemical sensor is configured to detect chemical properties of particles evacuated by the surgical evacuation system. For example, the 50832 chemical sensor can identify the chemical composition of the particles present in the smoke evacuated from a patient's abdominal cavity during an electrosurgical procedure. The different types of chemical sensors can be used to determine the type of material extracted by the surgical evacuation system. In certain cases, the smoke evacuation system can be controlled based on what is being extracted from the surgical site, such as what is being detected by the chemical sensor

50832.

[0242] A chemical analysis of the extracted fluids and / or particles can be used to adjust a generator function, such as a generator 800 function (Figure 58). For example, the generator function can be adjusted based on the detection of cancerous material by the chemical sensor 50832. In certain cases, when the cancerous material is no longer detected by the chemical sensor 50832, the doctor may be alerted that all cancerous material has been removed and / or the generator may cease operation of the power device. Alternatively, when a cancerous material is detected by the 50832 chemical sensor, the physician can be alerted and the generator can optimize the operation of the energy device to remove the cancerous material.

[0243] In certain instances, a generator function can be adjusted based on the properties of the tissue detected by a surgical system. Referring mainly to Figure 29, a flow chart is shown that represents an adjustment algorithm 52500 for a surgical system. Various surgical systems disclosed herein may use the 52500 adjustment algorithm. In addition, the reader will readily understand that, in certain cases, the 52500 adjustment algorithm can be combined with one or more additional adjustment algorithms described herein. Adjustments to the surgical system can be implemented by a processor (see, for example, processor 50308 in Figure 5). In various aspects of the present description, to determine the type of fabric, the 50308 processor (Figure 5) can be configured to receive information from a plurality of sources.

[0244] Still referring to Figure 29, one or more 52502 sensors in a surgical evacuation system can provide information to the 50308 processor (Figure 5). Referring mainly to Figure 28, the one or more 52502a particle sensors, one or more 52502b chemical sensors and / or one or more 52502c fluid detection sensors from the surgical evacuation system, which may be similar to the sensors represented shown in Figures 18 and 19, for example, can provide data to the 50308 processor that are indicative of the type of fabric. In addition, the one or more 52504 external sensors can provide information to the 50308 processor. The 52504 external sensors can be remote to the surgical evacuation system, but positioned on other surgical devices involved with the surgical procedure. For example, one or more 52504 external sensors can be positioned on a surgical instrument, a robotic tool and / or an endoscope. In certain instances, internal and external sensors 52502, 52504 can provide information for a situational recognition module or central surgical controller, which can provide 52506 situational recognition to the various 52502, 52504 sensors. In addition, 52506 situational recognition can inform the 50308 processor regarding the various sensor data. Based on the 52506 situational recognition and data from the 52502, 52504 sensors, the type of tissue can be determined by the 50308 processor (Figure 5) in block 52510.

[0245] In certain cases, the ratio between elastin and collagen of the extracted material can be determined from the type of fabric. For example, elastin can correspond to a first melting temperature and collagen can correspond to a second melting temperature, which is higher than the first melting temperature. In cases where the 52504 external sensor is configured to detect the speed of a clamping arm and / or an electric motor parameter that corresponds to the clamping speed, the 52504 external sensor can indicate the tissue melting temperature and thus, the ratio between elastin and collagen. Elastin and collagen also define different refractories and absorptions. In certain cases, an infrared spectrometer and / or a refractive camera sensor can be used to determine and / or confirm the type of tissue.

[0246] In certain cases, the energy mode can be adjusted based on the type of tissue detected (elastin, collagen and / or elastin to collagen ratio). For example, certain energy devices are more efficient at fusing collagen than elastin, but they can be adjusted to better fuse elastin by adjusting the energy mode. In other cases, it may be desirable to fuse collagen and retain elastin. Additionally or alternatively, the ratio between elastin and collagen may indicate a type of physical structure, such as a vein or an artery, which may inform the system's 52506 situational recognition. For example, energy modality A can be implemented in block 52512 if collagen is detected in block 52510. In other cases, energy modality C can be implemented in block 52516 if elastin is detected in block 52510. In still other cases, when a combination of collagen and elastin is detected in block 52510, energy mode B can be implemented in the block

52514. The reader will readily understand what additional and / or alternative energy modalities are envisaged. For example, different modalities can be used, depending on the specific ratio between elastic and collagen and / or based on the surgical procedure and / or the stage of it being performed.

[0247] In various surgical procedures, they almost use energy devices to treat tissue, fluids and / or particles can be released, thus contaminating the atmosphere in, and / or around, a surgical site, as additionally described here. In an effort to improve the visibility of the atmosphere at the surgical site, for example, contaminants can be drained into a smoke evacuation system. In addition, as contaminants are directed along an airflow path in the smoke evacuation system, suspended fluids and / or particles can be removed by filtration to improve air quality. Depending on the efficiency of the smoke evacuation system and / or the amount of smoke and / or contaminants produced after the activation of an electrosurgical instrument, smoke can accumulate in the atmosphere at, and / or around, the surgical site. This accumulation of contaminants can, for example, prevent the doctor from being able to see the surgical site.

[0248] In one aspect of the present description, the surgical system may comprise a smoke evacuation system including a particle sensor, an electrosurgical instrument and a generator. This smoke evacuation system can monitor a concentration of particulates while an electrosurgical instrument applies energy to the tissue during the surgical procedure. For example, as a physician requests that power be supplied to the electrosurgical instrument, the generator is configured to supply the requested energy. A processor within the surgical system is configured to analyze the monitored particulate concentration, and the energy from the generator requested by the physician. If the energy requested by the doctor produces contaminants that lead to the concentration of particulates above a predetermined limit, the processor can prevent the generator from supplying the requested power. Instead, in these cases the generator can supply energy at a level that brings the particle concentration back below the predetermined limit.

[0249] In these cases, one or more doctors and / or one or more assistants do not need to individually monitor the concentration of particulates and adjust the energy modality in response. Instead, the instruments and devices in the surgical system can communicate with each other to instruct the generator to supply a specific power level in a specific situation, based on the input from the sensors to the smoke evacuation system. The reader will readily understand that situational recognition can further inform the generator's decision-making process. Several algorithms that are implementing the aforementioned monitoring process and / or the adjustments are additionally disclosed here.

[0250] A surgical system may include an electrosurgical device, a generator configured to supply power to the electrosurgical device, and a smoke evacuation system. A smoke evacuation system may include a sensor system configured to monitor the size and / or concentration of particulates in the smoke evacuation and / or inflow duct. Again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, particle sensor 50838 is shown. The particle sensor

50838 is an internal sensor that is located in a position along the 50804 flow path (Figure 18) and the 50904 flow path (Figure 19). In several cases, the particle sensor 50838 is positioned at a point in the flow path 50804, 50904 before filtration through the filter system 50870, 50970, respectively; however, the interior particle sensor 50838 can be positioned at any suitable location along the flow path 50804, 50904, in order to monitor the contaminated air flowing from the surgical site. In several cases, the 50800 and / or 50900 smoke evacuation system may comprise more than one interior particle sensor 50838 positioned at various locations along the 50804 and / or 50904 flow path, respectively. The reader will readily understand that various means of measuring particles are possible. For example, a particulate concentration sensor can be an optical sensor, a laser sensor, a photoelectric sensor, an ionization sensor, an electrostatic sensor and / or any suitable combinations thereof. Several sensors are further described here.

[0251] Electrosurgical generators are an essential component in an electrosurgical circuit, since they produce electrosurgical waveforms. The generator is configured to convert electricity into high frequency waveforms and creates the voltage for the flow of electrosurgical current. In many cases, the generator is configured to produce a variety of waveforms, with each waveform having a different effect on the tissue. A "cutting current" cuts the tissue but provides little hemostasis. A "coagulation current" provides coagulation with limited tissue dissection and creates a greater heating depth. A "mixed current" is an intermediate current between the cutting and coagulation currents, but the mixed current is generally not a combination of the cutting and coagulation currents. Instead, a mixed current can be a cut-off current in which the time during which that current is actually flowing is reduced from 100 percent to approximately 50 percent of the time. In several cases, the generator can automatically monitor the tissue impedance and adjust a power output to the power device in order to reduce tissue damage, resulting in an efficient and accurate cutting effect at the lowest possible setting.

[0252] An additional electrosurgical cutting mode, known as the Advanced Cutting Effect (ACE), provides a doctor with a scalpel-like cutting effect, with little or no thermal necrosis and no hemostasis . When a generator is placed in ACE mode, a constant voltage is maintained at the tip of an electrode on an end actuator. the active electrode at the end of the end actuator applies an RF current from the generator to the surgical site. Using ACE mode, the doctor has the ability to use electrosurgical devices on the skin and achieve equivalent wound healing results, often without the use of certain surgical instruments such as scalpels, needles and / or any surgical instrument that could cause injuries and / or punctures to the patient and / or any other team members who handle them.

[0253] In several aspects of the present description, the electrosurgical device comprises an ACE cutting system.

[0254] During the entire duration of a surgical procedure, contaminants and / or smoke may be produced. If the atmosphere at, and / or around, the surgical site is not effectively filtered by a smoke evacuation system, contaminants aggregate in the atmosphere, making it difficult for a doctor and / or assistant to see the ci site. - surgical. Additional concerns regarding smoke in the operating room are additionally raised in the present invention. In several cases, a processor within the surgical system can store information in a memory that is specific to the amount of smoke and / or contaminants produced when a doctor uses a specific surgical instrument during a specific period. This information can be directly stored in the processor's memory, in a centralized controller, and / or in a cloud. In several cases, the processors and memories shown in Figures 5 and 6 can be used to store this information.

[0255] In several cases, communication routes are established between the smoke evacuation system and the generator, in order to control the power supplied to the electrosurgical instrument. This power is controlled in order to effectively induce the electrosurgical instrument to produce less smoke and / or release less contaminants, and to allow the surgical site to be effectively filtered. In many cases, components of the surgical system can communicate directly with each other. In several cases, the components of the surgical system are in communication with each other via a central controller, as further described here in relation to Figures 39 to 60, for example. The reader will readily understand that any suitable communication route can be used.

[0256] As the surgical procedure is started and the electrosurgical instrument is activated, a sensor within the smoke evacuation system is configured to monitor a parameter related to air quality. These parameters may include, for example, particle count and / or concentration, temperature, fluid content and / or percentage of contamination. The sensor is configured to communicate the monitored parameter to the processor. In several cases, the sensor automatically communicates the monitored parameter after detection. In several cases, the sensor communicates the monitored parameter to the processor after the sensor has been interrogated; however, the reader will understand that any suitable way of communicating the monitored information can be used. In several cases, the sensor continuously communicates the monitored information to the processor; however, the reader will understand that any suitable sample rate can be used. The monitored information can be communicated in real time or almost in real time, for example.

[0257] In several cases, the processor stores information regarding a predetermined limit. The predetermined limit varies based on the parameter monitored by the smoke evacuation system sensor. For example, when the sensor is monitoring the particle count and / or concentration, this limit can indicate a level of particles in the atmosphere of the surgical site that, effectively and / or unsafely, obstruct the doctor's view within the surgical site. In other cases, the limit may correspond to the filtration system in the evacuator cabinet and the capacity of the filtration system to properly filter the particles. For example, if the particle concentration exceeds a specific limit, filtration may be unable to sufficiently filter particulate matter from the smoke, and toxins may pass through the evacuation system and / or obstruct and / or clog your filter. As the processor receives information regarding the monitored parameter from one or more sensors in the smoke evacuation system, the processor is configured to compare the one or more monitored parameters against one or more predetermined limits to ensure that the one or more limits are not have been exceeded.

[0258] In several cases, if the processor recognizes that the predetermined limit has been exceeded and / or is close to being exceeded, the processor can control various engine functions of the smoke evacuation system. The processor can adjust the flow of the smoke evacuation system by increasing or decreasing the speed of the engine, to more efficiently filter out contaminants from the surgical site. For example, if the sensor communicates information to the processor suggesting that the particle limit has been reached, the processor can increase the speed of the engine to drain more fluid, and probably more contaminants, from the surgical site into the evacuation system. smoke, for filtration.

[0259] In several cases, if the processor recognizes that the predetermined limit has been exceeded and / or is close to being exceeded, the processor can vary the energy supplied by the generator to the electrosurgical instrument. For example, if the sensor communicates information to the processor suggesting that the particle limit has been reached, the processor will prevent the generator from supplying any additional energy required to the handheld electrosurgical instrument. When the smoke evacuation system removes contaminants from the atmosphere by filtration to a level that falls below the particle limit, the processor can then allow the generator to supply the requested energy to the portable electrosurgical instrument.

[0260] Figure 33 is a graphical representation of a correlation between the detected particle count and the power level over a period of time during a surgical procedure. The upper graph 53300 represents the particle count and / or the particulate concentration detected by the internal particle sensor 50838 (Figures 18 and 19) as the particles and contaminants are filtered from a surgical site by a 50800 smoke evacuation system. and / or

50900. A CT particulate concentration is representative of a predetermined limit of particle count and / or concentration within a volume of evacuated fluid. The bottom graph 53302 represents the one or more power levels achieved during the surgical procedure, including the energy requested by the physician through a hand-held electrosurgical instrument (the dashed line), and the power actually supplied by the generator of the surgical system. (the continuous line). The one or more power levels are defined as the ratio between RF current and voltage for the electrosurgical system.

[0261] Before the start of a surgical procedure at time t <t1, a basal concentration of particulates 53304 is detected. When the doctor and / or the assistant activates the electrosurgical instrument at time t1, the doctor and / or the assistant requests that a specific power level is provided in order to perform a specific function. These functions include dissection and / or cutting through tissue within a surgical site. The application of energy to the tissue creates smoke and / or contaminants, which can be directed into the smoke evacuation system to improve visibility within the surgical site, for example. At time t1, the generator supplies the requested energy. The concentration of particulates detected is below the CT limit; however, the internal particle sensor 50838 begins to detect an increase in the concentration of particulates at time t2, after activation of the electrosurgical instrument at time t1.

[0262] In the graphical representation of Figure 33, the doctor does not request additional energy until time t3. The 53306 "rest" time between t1 and t3 can allow the tissue to cool, creating some degree of hemostasis, for example. As can be seen in Figure 33, the concentration of particulate matter detected and the power level decrease between time t2 and time t3. At time t3, the doctor requests a high level of power which, when supplied by the generator, creates an increase in the concentration of particulates at time t4. Finally, the doctor requests a power level that creates a concentration of particulates that rises around the predetermined limit CT at time t5. In some cases, exceeding the CT limit may indicate low visibility within the surgical site due to an accumulation of contaminants and / or particles, an ineffective smoke evacuation system, and / or an innovative smoke evacuation system.

[0263] In response to the particulate concentration that exceeds the CT particle limit at time t5, the surgical system processor is configured to adjust the energy supplied by the generator to bring the particulate concentration back below the particle limit. CT. As shown in Figure 33, the energy supplied by the generator differs from the energy requested by the handle, when the CT particle limit has been reached and / or exceeded due to the high power required by the handle. As the particulate concentration returns to the CT limit and / or falls below the CT limit, as at time t6, the generator once again provides a power level as requested by the hand held electrosurgical instrument. In addition, as the energy requested by the handle declines after t6, the particulate concentration detected by the 50838 particle sensor also decreases.

[0264] Figure 34 shows a representation of 53400 instructions stored by a memory in a surgical system, such as the memory in Figures 5 and 6, for example. In several cases, the surgical systems disclosed in the present invention can use the 53400 instructions. For example, the 53400 instructions can comprise adjustment algorithms for the surgical systems. In addition, the reader will readily understand that, in certain cases, the 53400 instructions can be combined with one or more algorithms and / or additional instructions described here. Instructions 53400 can be implemented by a processor, such as the 50308 processor in Figure 5, for example.

[0265] In block 53402, in instructions 53400, a processor can receive a request for energy from an electrosurgical instrument. For example, the electrosurgical instrument may comprise a handheld device and / or a robotic tool. The requested power can be supplied by the user through controls and / or a control console, for example. As discussed above, a sensor is configured to monitor a parameter related to the fluid that passes through the evacuation system. This parameter can include, for example, particle size, temperature, fluid content and / or percentage of contamination. The processor is configured to receive the monitored parameter from the sensor. In several cases, the processor receives this information in response to the interrogation of the sensor, as indicated in block 53404. In several cases, the sensor automatically communicates the information after detection. The processor then determines whether the information received exceeds a predetermined limit value in block 53406. If the limit value has been exceeded and / or is close to being exceeded, the processor is configured to prevent the generator from providing any or all among the energy requirements for the electrosurgical instrument in block 53408. In other cases, the waveform of the generator can be adjusted to reduce the smoke generated by the surgical device in block 53410, as additionally described here.

[0266] In several cases, the generator can supply power at a level that will not cause the limit value to be exceeded. If the limit value has not been exceeded, the processor is configured to allow the generator to supply the electrosurgical instrument with the requested energy in block 53410. In several cases, the processor is configured to receive information from the smoke evacuation system sensor throughout the duration of the surgical procedure, or at least while the processor is receiving requests for energy application from the electrosurgical instrument.

[0267] In various surgical procedures, radio frequency (RF) energy can be used to cut tissue and coagulate bleeding. As RF energy is used to treat tissue, fluids and / or particulates can be released, thus contaminating the air inside and / or around a surgical site. In an effort to improve the visibility of the surgical site for a physician, for example, contaminated air inside the surgical site can be drained into a smoke evacuation system. As the contaminated air is conducted along an air flow path, the fluids and / or suspended particles can be eliminated by filtering the contaminated air. The filtered air finally exits the smoke evacuation system through an exhaust port, and is released into the operating room atmosphere. Depending on the efficiency and / or effectiveness of the smoke evacuation system, the filtered air may still contain fluids and / or particulates when released into the atmosphere of the operating room. The remaining contaminants may, for example, be unpleasant to the olfactory senses of one or more doctors, assistants and / or patients and, in certain cases, it may not be healthy to inhale the contaminants.

[0268] The smoke evacuation system may comprise a sensor system configured to monitor the detected size and / or concentration of particulates in the air at various points along the airflow path, including at locations that are external evacuation system and internal to the evacuation system. In one aspect of the present description, the smoke evacuation system can determine the efficiency of the evacuation system based on comparing the concentration of particulates external to the evacuation system and internal to the evacuation system and / or by monitoring the concentration of particulates over time. In addition, the smoke evacuation system can, via a screen, alert one or more doctors to the presence of contaminated air in the operating room.

[0269] One or more doctors can be informed about the level of contaminants, such as fluids and / or particulates, suspended in the atmosphere of the operating room. An indication of the presence of contaminants in the air can indicate air quality in the operating room and alert one or more doctors and / or assistants that the smoke evacuation system requires adjustment and / or maintenance.

[0270] A smoke evacuation system can include a sensor system configured to monitor the size and / or concentration of particles in the air. Again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, particle sensors 50838 and 50852 are shown. The particle sensor 50838 is an internal sensor that is located in a position along the flow path. In several cases, the particle sensor 50838 is positioned at a point on the flow path 50804 (Figure 18), 50904 (Figure 19) before filtration; however, the interior particle sensor 50838 can be positioned at any suitable location along the respective flow path 50804, 50904, in order to monitor the contaminated air flowing from the surgical site. In several cases, the smoke evacuation system 50800, 50900 may include more than one interior particle sensor 50838 positioned at various locations along the flow path 50804, 50904, respectively.

[0271] The 50852 particle sensor is an external sensor that is positioned on an external surface of the 50800 smoke evacuation system (Figure 18), 50900 (Figure 19). In several cases, the smoke evacuation system 50800, 50900 may include more than one external particle sensor 50852. In several cases, the external particle sensor 50852 is located inside a recess in the smoke evacuation system 50800, 50900; however, the external particle sensor 50852 can be positioned on any suitable surface to detect air quality in the operating room. In many cases, the external particle sensor 50852 is located near the inlet 50822 (Figure 18), 50922 (Figure 19) of the smoke evacuation system 50800, 50900, respectively, to ensure that unfiltered air is not leaking from the surgical site to the operating room atmosphere. In several cases, the external particle sensor 50852 is located near an outlet port 50824 (Figure 18), 50924 (Figure 19) of the smoke evacuation system 50800, 50900, respectively, to analyze the air flowing to outside the smoke evacuation system 50800, 50900.

[0272] The reader will readily understand that the one or more external particle sensors 50852 can be located in any suitable location to properly monitor the atmosphere of the operating room. In addition, the reader will readily understand that various means of measuring particles are possible. For example, the particle sensor 50852 can be any suitable particulate concentration sensor, such as an optical sensor, a laser sensor, a photoelectric sensor, an ionization sensor, an electrostatic sensor and / or any suitable combinations of the same. Several sensors are further described here.

[0273] In several cases, a sensor system for the smoke evacuation system is configured to assess the size and / or concentration of particulate contamination in the operating room and to show the detected air quality. The display of this information can communicate the effectiveness of the smoke evacuation system, for example. In several cases, the information communicated includes detailed information about the one or more filters inside the smoke evacuation system, and can prevent contaminated air and / or smoke from accumulating in the operating room atmosphere. The smoke evacuation system can be configured to detect particulate concentration, temperature, fluid content and / or contamination percentage, for example, and communicate this to a generator to adjust its output, as further described here. In one aspect of the present description, the smoke evacuation system can be configured to adjust its flow and / or the speed of the engine and, at a predefined particulate level, operationally affect the output power or the waveform of the generator in order to reduce the amount of smoke generated by the end actuator.

[0274] In several cases, the sensor system, as described here, can be used to detect whether contaminants and / or smoke in the air are being properly and efficiently removed by one or more filters in the smoke evacuation system. . With the detection of one or more levels of air quality in the operating room, the smoke evacuation system is configured to prevent a high level of contamination from accumulating in the atmosphere of the operating room. The parameters monitored by the sensor system can be used to inform a doctor as to whether the smoke evacuation system is working and / or performing its intended purpose. In many cases, the monitored parameters can be used by a physician and / or assistant to determine whether a filter inside the smoke evacuation system needs to be repaired and / or replaced. For example, if the external sensor 50852 (Figures 18 and 19) detects a particle size and / or a concentration of contaminant above a predetermined and / or acceptable limit, the doctor will be instructed to check if a filter in the interior of the smoke evacuation system needs to be repaired and / or replaced.

[0275] In several cases, as described above, a processor inside the smoke evacuation system compares the parameters detected by the external sensor with the parameters detected by an internal sensor. In several cases, the smoke evacuation system comprises multiple internal sensors located at various points along the flow path, such as after each individual filter, for example. The reader will understand that the internal sensors can be positioned at any point along the flow path, in order to provide significant comparisons regarding the efficiency of the filters. Using this detected information, a doctor can determine if a filter in a specific location is not successfully removing contaminants and / or smoke from the air. In such cases, the doctor is directed to a precise location of the filter (or filtration layer) that needs attention for repair and / or replacement.

[0276] In several cases, the sensor system is configured to assess the dilution of contaminants and / or particles in the atmosphere of the operating room. As discussed in this document, the one or more internal sensors can be located in any suitable position along the flow path. When an internal sensor is located near an exit door of the smoke evacuation system and downstream of one or more filters, the internal sensor is effectively measuring the size and / or concentration of the particles that are emitted to the atmosphere of the operating system. In other words, the internal sensor is configured to detect particles and / or contaminants that were not captured during the filtration process. The external sensor is configured to monitor the concentration and / or the size of the diluted particles throughout the atmosphere of the operating room. The difference between the readings of the internal sensor and the external sensor can be important in determining the air quality of the specific operating room.

[0277] The size and / or concentration of particles emitted into the atmosphere can have different impacts on air quality in the operating room, based on parameters such as the size of the operating room and / or the ventilation in the operating room, for example. In one case, the size and / or concentration of the particles emitted could

they can have a more damaging impact on air quality if emitted in a smaller operating room than if particles of the same size and / or concentration were emitted in a larger operating room. In several cases, the presence and / or efficiency of a ventilation system in the operating room can impact how the air quality fluctuates in response to the emission of particles from the smoke evacuation system. For example, in operating rooms without a ventilation system or operating rooms with an inefficient ventilation system, particles emitted from the smoke evacuation system can more quickly accumulate to a potentially dangerous level, creating an unsatisfactory air quality inside the operating room.

[0278] In several cases, the information detected by the sensor system can be used to control one or more functions of the smoke evacuation engine. Before the start of a surgical procedure, the external sensor can detect an initial level of air quality. Air quality can be continuously monitored during the entire surgical procedure; however, the reader will understand that air quality can be monitored at any suitable rate. The external sensor communicates the detected information to a processor (for example, processors 50308 and 50408 in Figures 5 and 6, respectively) of the smoke evacuation system. The processor uses the initial air quality level as a baseline to compare against continuously detected air quality levels. When the processor determines that the one or more levels of air quality detected by the external sensor 50852 exhibit signs of increased particle size and / or concentration of contaminants in the operating room atmosphere, the processor instructs the engine to operate at a lower level. high. With the engine running at increased speed, more contaminated air and / or smoke is drained from the surgical site into the 50800, 50900 smoke evacuation system for filtration. In several cases, the processor stores instructions to increase the flow of contaminated air and / or smoke conducted into the 50800, 50900 smoke evacuation system during the procedure, when the internal sensor 50838 determines that a precautionary device and / or another electrosurgical device that creates smoke. By detecting the activation of smoke-generating surgical devices, the 50800, 50900 smoke evacuation system prevents, through engine control, a high level of contamination from accumulating in the atmosphere of the operating room.

[0279] In several cases, the engine speed level is automatically controlled when the processor determines that the atmosphere in the room has an unacceptable level of air quality. In several cases, the engine speed level is automatically controlled when the processor determines that a smoke-creating surgical device has been activated. For example, when the external sensor 50852 detects a level of contamination in the operating room atmosphere that exceeds a predetermined limit, the processor can automatically instruct the engine to operate at a faster speed. Then, when the external sensor 50852 detects a level of contamination that falls below the predetermined limit, the processor automatically slows down the motor. In several cases, the engine speed level is controlled manually after a doctor is notified of an unacceptable level of air quality. In several cases, the engine speed level is controlled manually after a doctor activates a smoke-creating surgical device. The reader will understand that any suitable combination of automatic and / or manual controls can be implemented and / or incorporated into a control algorithm for 50800, 50900 smoke evacuation systems.

[0280] In several cases, the smoke evacuation system processor can recognize when the external sensor 50852 detects an unacceptable and / or increased level of contamination in the operating room atmosphere. This detection is indicative that the 50800, 50900 smoke evacuation system is inefficient. The detected inefficiency can indicate that one or more filters are failing and / or need to be replaced. When the physician is notified of a failed filter, the physician can ensure that replacement filters are in stock for future maintenance to avoid one or more delays.

[0281] In several cases, a smoke evacuation system can be used in combination with a videoendoscope, during a surgical procedure, in order to efficiently manage the evacuation of contaminants and / or smoke from a surgical site. For example, the 50800, 50900 smoke evacuation systems can be used in combination with the imaging module 238 and the endoscope 239 (Figure 47). In one aspect of the present description, a central surgical controller, such as central controller 206 (Figure 48), can coordinate communication between the imaging module 238 and a surgical evacuation system, such as the smoke evacuator 226 ( Figure 48), for example. The videoendoscope is configured to monitor visual occlusion in the air, by capturing a series of images at a specific sampling rate. The collected images are sent to a processor (for example, processors 50308, 50408 in Figures 5 and 6, respectively) for evaluation. In several cases, the processor is also configured to receive monitored data from the sensor system, which may include the internal sensor 50838 and / or the external sensor 50852, as described here. The processor is configured to compare the images received from the videoendoscope with the count and / or concentration of particulates received from the sensor system in order to determine one or more correlations to improve the efficiency of smoke evacuation and / or contamination of the site surgical and / or operating room atmosphere.

[0282] In these cases, the visual occlusion determined by the video-doscope, as well as the particulate count and / or concentration determined by the sensor system, are compared in order to adjust the particle count to measure the motor speed of the smoke evacuation system. By comparing the collected data from the sensor system and the video endoscope, the processor can perform any of several steps. For example, based on the comparison, the processor may decide to: turn on the smoke evacuation system; increase the engine speed of the smoke evacuation system; decrease the engine speed of the smoke evacuation system; and / or switch off the smoke evacuation system. In several cases, the comparison is done automatically; however, the reader will understand that this comparison can occur after manual activation.

[0283] In several cases, the images captured by the videoendoscope and the count and / or the concentration of particles detected by the sensor system can be stored in a memory as a baseline comparison. In future surgical procedures, the doctor and / or the assistant can use only the images collected by the videoendoscope to confirm a smoke density and / or contamination. In these cases, the visual occlusion detected by the videoendoscope is associated with a specific count and / or concentration of particulate individuals. After the processor has analyzed the air, the processor can perform any one of a number of steps. For example, based on the analyzed images captured by the videoendoscope, in light of the comparison with the stored baseline, the processor can decide: to turn on the smoke evacuation system; increase the engine speed of the smoke evacuation system; decrease the engine speed of the smoke evacuation system; and / or turn off the smoke evacuation system.

[0284] In several cases, situational recognition can additionally inform the decision making process described here. For example, images from a videoendoscope can be significant in the context of a specific surgical procedure and / or stage of it, which can be configured and / or determined based on the situational recognition of a smoke evacuation system and / or a central controller communicating with it. A greater amount of smoke can be expected during certain surgical procedures and / or specific steps in them, and / or in the treatment of specific types of tissue, for example.

[0285] In several cases, the smoke evacuation system is in wireless communication with other surgical devices and / or central controllers installed in the operating room, in order to improve the efficiency of smoke evacuation during a surgical procedure. logical. For example, the activation of a generator for a surgical device can be communicated to a central controller, which forwards this information to the smoke evacuation system. The central controller can detect a current through a surgical energy device and / or detect a change in the generator's energy consumption for communication to the smoke evacuation system. In several cases, the central controller can store information relevant to the surgical procedure and / or the activated surgical device. This information can include, for example, the expected amount of smoke produced during the specific surgical procedure, and can use the specific surgical device and / or relevant information regarding the composition of a given patient's tissue to determine the amount Preview. Receiving this information can allow the smoke evacuation system to anticipate a specific smoke evacuation rate in order to more efficiently move smoke and / or contaminants out of the surgical site. The reader will understand that the various surgical devices can communicate information directly to the smoke evacuation system and / or indirectly through the central controller. The central controller can be a central surgical controller, such as the central surgical controller 206 (Figure 48), for example.

[0286] In several cases, the smoke evacuation system is in wired communication with other surgical devices and / or central controllers located in the operating room, in order to improve the efficiency of smoke evacuation during a surgical procedure. This wired communication can be established through a cable interconnection between a generator and the smoke evacuation system for communication regarding the activation of the generator. For example, an activation indication signal cable can be connected between the generator of a surgical device and the smoke evacuation system. When the generator is activated and a signal is received through the wired connection, the smoke evacuation system is automatically activated.

[0287] Wireless and / or wired communications between the generator of a surgical device and / or a central controller and / or the smoke evacuation system may include information about the activated surgical device. This information may include, for example, a current operating mode of the surgical device and / or information regarding the intensity of a specific energy setting and / or application. In several cases, once such information is communicated from the surgical device, the central controller and / or the smoke evacuation system memory is configured to store this information for future use. For example, the central controller can store information regarding the surgical device used during a specific procedure, as well as the count and / or count.

average concentration of smoke and / or contaminants. In future surgical procedures, when the same surgical device (or similar) is activated in the same surgical procedure (or similar) to treat the same type of tissue (or similar), the central controller can communicate this information to the information system. evacuation of smoke before an accumulation of smoke and / or contaminants.

[0288] In several cases, the smoke evacuation system is set up to inform a doctor about a level of contamination detected in the operating room atmosphere. The smoke evacuation system can use the sensor system to monitor a differential between a particle size and / or a concentration of particles detected by a first internal sensor and a second external sensor. In many cases, the monitored parameters of the sensor system can be used to alert a doctor and / or an assistant when a detected level of contamination exceeds a predetermined threshold.

[0289] In several cases, the processor instructs a screen to display the parameters monitored by the sensor system. In many cases, the screen is located on the outside of the smoke evacuation system cabinet. The processor can also communicate the monitored parameters with other surgical instruments located in the operating room and / or central controllers to assist in the situational recognition of the interactive surgical system. In this way, the other surgical instruments and / or central controllers can be used more efficiently together. In circumstances where the monitored parameters are communicated throughout the operating room, doctors and / or assistants can view the contamination alert from various screens around the operating room. The monitored parameters can be displayed on multiple monitors in the operating room, in addition to the display on the smoke evacuation system. The reader will understand that any suitable combination of screens can be used to communicate the air quality detected in the operating room.

[0290] Figure 30 represents a smoke evacuation system 53000 configured to monitor the air quality in the operating room atmosphere, and alert a doctor when the detected air quality exceeds a predetermined limit and / or becomes potentially new. captive. The smoke evacuation system 53000 is similar in many ways to the smoke evacuation system 50600 (Figure 7). For example, the smoke evacuation system 53000 includes the generator 50640, the first electrical connection 50642, the surgical instrument 50630 and the suction hose 50636. As shown in Figure 30, in several cases the smoke evacuation 53000 comprises a 53002 air quality index screen or monitor. The 53002 air quality index screen is configured to display information detected by a sensor system, such as a sensor system comprising one or more of the sensors 50830, 50832, 50836, 50838, 50840, 50846, 50848, 50850, 50852, which are further described here and shown in Figures 18 and 19. A processor, such as the 50308 processor and / or 50408 (Figures 5 and 6) may be in signal communication with the sensor system and the air quality index screen

53002. In several cases, the air quality index screen 53002 is configured to display a contaminant particle count monitored by the external sensor 50852, in order to verify that contaminants are not being circulated to the atmosphere of the room. operation at a dangerous level.

[0291] In several cases, the smoke evacuation system 53000 comprises a lockable door 53004 that can be accessed by the doctor to replace and / or change a filter housed in the evacuation cabinet of the smoke evacuation system 53000. For For example, by monitoring the particulate concentration through the smoke evacuation system 53000, a processor can determine that one or more filters are substantially clogged and reaching the end of their useful life and therefore need to be replaced. In such cases, the doctor can open the door with lock 53004 to replace the one or more filters. As further described here, based on the relative positioning of the internal sensors in the smoke evacuation system 53000, the filter and / or the specific filters that need to be replaced can be identified.

[0292] In several cases, a processor, such as the 50308 and / or 50408 processor (Figures 5 and 6), is configured to communicate the detected smoke parameters to the screen 53002, such as particle size and / or concentration. Screen 53002 is configured to display this detected information in any appropriate manner. For example, screen 53002 can show the level of contamination detected by each sensor, internal and external, in the entire sensor system. In many cases, the 53002 screen is configured to display information only when the air quality does not meet a predetermined limit. In several cases, the 53002 screen comprises a touch screen that allows the doctor to determine what information is displayed and / or the location where the information is displayed.

[0293] In several cases, the 53002 screen comprises a graphical interface, an LCD screen and / or a touch screen. The reader will understand that any suitable means for displaying the detected information and / or combinations thereof can be used in the smoke evacuation system 53000. For example, an LED light can be used as the screen 53002. When the processor 50308 and / or 50408 (Figures 5 and 6) determines that an unacceptable air quality is present in the operating room, the 50308 and / or 50408 processor is configured to activate the LED light.

[0294] Figure 31 shows a representation of instructions 53100 stored by a memory for a surgical evacuation system, such as memory 50310 and 50410 in Figures 5 and 6, for example. In several cases, the surgical evacuation systems disclosed here may use instructions 53100 in Figure 31. In addition, the reader will readily understand that, in certain cases, instructions 53100 in Figure 31 can be combined with one or more algorithms and / or additional instructions described here. Instructions 53100 stored in memory can be implemented by a processor, such as processors 50308 and / or 50408 in Figures 5 and 6, for example.

[0295] Still referring to Figure 31, as discussed above, an internal sensor, such as sensor 50838 (Figures 18 and 19), is configured to monitor an internal parameter, such as particle size and / or the concentration of a fluid . As the fluid flows through a flow path, particles and / or contaminants are removed by filtration before the fluid leaves the surgical evacuation system. An external sensor, such as sensor 50852 (Figures 18 and 19), located in the external cabinet of the surgical evacuation system, is configured to monitor an external parameter as the filtered fluid leaves the surgical evacuation system. This external parameter includes, for example, the particle size and / or the concentration of particles in the atmosphere in an operating room.

[0296] In block 53102 in instructions 53100, the processor is configured to interrogate the internal sensor and the external sensor regarding the internal parameter detected and the external parameter detected, respectively. In several cases, the processor continuously interrogates the internal and external sensors regarding this information; however, any suitable sample rate can be used. The processor is then configured to analyze the information received from the internal and external sensors, in order to determine an efficiency level of the surgical evacuation system in block 53104. After determining the efficiency level of the surgical evacuation system, the processor is configured to display the efficiency level determined on a screen in the block

53106. This screen can include raw information received from internal and external sensors, the level of efficiency determined by the processor, and / or an alert to the doctor if the level of efficiency falls below a predetermined threshold. The drop below the predetermined limit may indicate, for example, that a filter needs to be replaced and / or that the particles are not being efficiently filtered and are accumulating in the operating room atmosphere.

[0297] Figure 32 shows a representation of instructions 53200 stored by a memory for a surgical evacuation system, similar to those represented in Figure 31. In several cases, the surgical evacuation systems disclosed here can use the instructions of the Figure 32. In addition, the reader will readily understand that, in certain cases, the instructions in Figure 32 can be combined with one or more algorithms and / or additional instructions described here. Instructions can be stored in memory and executed by a processor, such as memory 50310 and / or 50410, and / or processors 50308 and / or 50408, in Figures 5 and 6, for example.

[0298] Still referring to Figure 32, before the start of a surgical procedure in block 53202, the processor is configured to interrogate an external sensor, such as sensor 50852 (Figures 18 and 19), for a line parameter. basis of air quality. The air quality baseline parameter is indicative of the operating room air quality before the surgical procedure. In block 53204, the processor is configured to continuously interrogate the internal sensor, in order to recognize that the surgical procedure is in progress. After the processor has determined that a surgical procedure is taking place, the processor continuously interrogates the external sensor in block 53206. When the processor determines that the air quality detected by the external sensor is deteriorating, as in block 53208 for example, the processor is configured to increase the speed of the engine in block 53210, in order to direct more fluid into the surgical evacuation system. If the detected air quality is equal to the baseline air quality, as in block 53212, the processor is configured to maintain the engine speed in block 53214. If the detected air quality has improved over air quality baseline, as in block 53216, for example, the processor is configured to maintain or decrease the speed of the motor in block 53218. In several cases, the processor continuously interrogates internal and external sensors for information; however, any suitable sample rate can be used.

[0299] Smoke evacuation systems play an important role in electrosurgical systems, removing harmful toxins and / or unpleasant odors from the operating room. However, the controls and adjustability of certain smoke evacuation systems may be deficient, which can lead to a decrease in engine life and / or an unsatisfactory filter longevity, for example.

[0300] In one aspect of the present description, sensors can be positioned and configured to detect the presence of particulates in a fluid that moves through various points in a flow path of an evacuation system. In some aspects of the present description, a control circuit can be used to modify a motor speed that drives an evacuation system pump based on the particulate concentration detected at the various points along the flow path. Additionally or alternatively, the control circuit can be used to modify the motor speed based on the pressures detected at the various points in the flow path.

[0301] Efficient regulation of the engine speed of an evacuation system can increase the life of the engine and / or increase the longevity of the filter. Additional benefits include potential energy savings and less noise in the operating room, for example.

[0302] As described here, electrosurgical instruments can apply electrical energy to a patient's target tissue in order to cut the tissue and / or cauterize blood vessels within the target tissue and / or close to it. Cutting and cauterization can result in smoke being released into the air. In several cases, the smoke can be unpleasant, obstructive to a doctor's view, and unhealthy to inhalation, as further described here. Electrosurgical systems can employ an evacuation system that captures the resulting smoke, directs the captured smoke through one or more filters, and expels the filtered smoke. More specifically, the smoke can travel through the evacuation system via a vacuum tube. Harmful toxins and unpleasant odors can be filtered and eliminated from the smoke as it moves through one or more of the filters in the evacuation system. The filtered air can then escape from the exhaust system as an exhaust through an exhaust port.

[0303] In various aspects of the present description, an evacuation system includes a receptacle or socket for a filter. The filter receptacle is configured to receive a filter. The evacuation system also includes a pump that has a sealed positive displacement flow path and a motor that drives the pump. The sealed positive displacement flow path of the pump may comprise one or more paths of fluid circulation within the pump. In one aspect of the present description, the pump has a first operating pressure and a second operating pressure. In certain cases, the pump can compress an incoming fluid to create a pressure differential along the flow path, as further described here.

[0304] As shown in Figure 4, the 50500 evacuation system includes the 50506 pump coupled to, and driven by, the engine

50512. As described here, the 50506 pump can be a positive displacement pump, such as a positive displacement reciprocating pump, a positive displacement rotary pump or a positive displacement linear pump, for example. In several cases, the 50506 pump can be a hybrid regenerative blower, a claw pump, a lobe compressor or a flying compressor, for example. In one aspect of the present description, the 50512 motor can be a permanent magnet synchronous direct current (DC) motor. Some aspects may include a brushless DC motor.

[0305] According to aspects of the present description, the 50512 engine can be regulated and / or controlled for several reasons, including to maintain flow rates, increase engine efficiency, increase engine life, increase pump life , increase the filter's longevity and / or conserve energy, for example. Since a control circuit for the evacuation system (see, for example, the control schemes in Figures 5 and 6) recognizes a specific condition, such as an obstruction in the flow path, unwanted pressure and / or unwanted particulate count, for example, the control circuit can regulate the 50512 engine to adjust or maintain the flow, which can increase the efficiency of the engine, increase the life of the engine, increase the life of the pump, increase the filter longevity and / or conserve energy, for example.

[0306] In one aspect of the present description, with reference to Figure 6, a processor may be internal to the evacuation system. For example, the 50408 processor can be internal to the 50618 evacuator cabinet in Figure 7. In other aspects of the present description, the processor can be external to the 50600 evacuation system. The external 50308 processor is represented in Figure 5, for example - plo. The external processor can be the processor of a central surgical controller. In yet another aspect, an internal processor and an external processor can communicate to cooperatively control the 50512 engine.

[0307] According to one aspect of the present description, the 50512 motor can be regulated by a control circuit, in order to increase the efficiency of the motor. For example, with reference to the evacuation systems in Figures 18 and 19, the fluid detection sensor 50830 is positioned upstream of the one or more filters and the filter receptacle. In many cases, the 50830 fluid detection sensor is configured to detect a fluid upstream of one or more filters. For example, the fluid detection sensor 50830 is configured to detect whether an aerosol or liquid droplets are present in the evacuated smoke. Based on the output from the 50830 fluid detection sensor, the control circuit can adjust a control parameter of the smoke evacuation system, such as valve and / or power adjustment for the engine, for example.

[0308] In certain cases, the evacuation system can detect whether a fluid (for example smoke) is present in the flow path. In certain cases, the 50830 fluid detection sensor can automatically scan for fluids, or a specific type of fluid, when a doctor begins to treat the patient's tissue with the use of an electrosurgical instrument, such as when the 50630 electrosurgical instrument (Figure 7) is activated by the 50640 generator (Figure 7), for example. Alternatively, or in combination with the 50830 fluid detection sensor, a separate sensor can be configured

to detect one or more fluids at the surgical site, such as an end actuator on a surgical instrument or imaging device, for example. In one case, the separate sensor can be positioned near the tip of the 50630 electrosurgical instrument. When the fluid detected in one or more of the one or more fluid detection sensors is below a limit value, the control circuit - trolley can regulate the speed of the pump motor to a level sufficient to monitor for the presence of a fluid, or a specific type of fluid. The engine speed in these cases can be a minimum engine speed, or an idle engine speed, which allows an accurate reading on one or more fluid detection sensors. Alternatively, the engine speed can be reduced to zero and periodically increased to the minimum engine speed, or idle engine speed, in order to monitor for the presence of a fluid, or a specific type of fluid.

[0309] When a fluid is detected by the fluid detection sensor, or a fluid level above a limit value, the control circuit can regulate the speed of the 50512 engine to a level that is sufficient to fully evacuate the fluid from the surgical site. In one example, a cloud, such as cloud 104 (Figure 39) and / or cloud 204 (Figure 46), can track and / or store the engine speed levels that have been established to be sufficient to efficiently evacuate fluids to a same or similar surgical procedure. In this example, the control circuit can access and / or use historical engine speed levels stored in the cloud as a reference, by configuring an appropriate engine speed level for that surgical procedure.

[0310] Additionally or alternatively, the engine speed can be adjusted based on a concentration of particulates detected along the flow path. For example, again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, evacuation systems 50800 and 50900 include laser particle sensors 50838 and 50848 along their respective flow paths 50804 and 50904. The particle sensor 50838 is positioned at upstream of filters 50842, 50844 and receptacle 50871 in the surgical evacuation system 50800, and upstream of filters 50942, 50944 and receptacle 50971 in the surgical evacuation system 50900. The particle sensor 50838 is configured to detect and / or counting particles upstream of one or more filters. The particle sensor 50848 is positioned downstream of one or more filters 50842, 50844 and receptacle 50871 in the surgical evacuation system 50800, and downstream of one or more filters 50942, 50944 and receptacle 50971 in the ventilation system. 50900 surgical evacuation. The 50848 particle sensor is configured to detect and / or count particles downstream of one or more filters.

[0311] In these cases, the 50800, 50900 evacuation system can detect (for example, through laser particle counter sensors) whether a fluid (for example, a smoke containing particulate matter) is present. For example, one or more sensors can detect a concentration of particulates in smoke. In certain cases, one or more particle count sensors can automatically scan and count particles, when a doctor begins to treat the patient's tissue with the use of an electrosurgical instrument, such as when the instrument electrosurgical 50630 is activated by generator 50640, for example.

[0312] When the particulate concentration detected by the 50838 particle sensor is below a limit value, the control circuit can regulate the motor speed to a level sufficient to sample the particulate concentration in the flow path. For example, the motor speed can be adjusted to a minimum or idle motor speed, which allows an accurate reading on the sensors. In an alternative aspect, the engine speed can be reduced to zero and periodically increased to the minimum speed, or idle engine, which is sufficient to monitor for the presence of a fluid (for example, a concentration of particulates in smoke) above a limit value). In these aspects, when detecting a concentration of particulates above a limit value, the control circuit can regulate the speed of the 50512 engine (Figure 4) to a level sufficient to fully evacuate the smoke and filter the particles from the surgical site. Again, a cloud can track and / or store engine speed levels that have been established as sufficient to efficiently evacuate fluids for an equal or similar surgical procedure, based on the concentration of particulates detected by the sensors. In this example, the control circuit can access and / or use these historical engine speed levels as a reference, by setting an appropriate engine speed level for that surgical procedure.

[0313] In one aspect of the present description, the 50512 engine is more efficient because it will either be off (ie at zero engine speed) or running at a predetermined minimum or idle speed, unless a fluid and / or a limit concentration of particulates. In such cases, energy can be saved and noise in the operating room can be minimized. In addition, if a fluid and / or a particulate concentration limit is detected, the 50512 engine can be operated at an efficient engine speed, that is, at an engine speed that is set to be sufficient to efficiently evacuate the fluid and / or particles, based on historical data. This is an improvement over otherwise manual methods to establish engine speed levels based on a subjective assessment (for example, a doctor's specific experience) and / or simply turn on an evacuation system and / or increase engine speed levels based on visual and / or olfactory cues (for example, when seeing and / or smelling smoke).

[0314] According to various aspects of this description, engine parameters such as engine speed, for example, are adaptable to adjust (for example, increase) the efficiency of an evacuation system and its filter, with based on the needs at the surgical site. As described in the present invention, if the smoke detected at the surgical site is below a limit value, it may be inefficient that the evacuation system is unnecessarily filtering air volumes. In that case, the engine speed can be decreased, reduced to zero, or kept at zero, so that the volume of air being filtered by the evacuation box is decreased, reduced to zero or maintained at zero, respectively. Efficient use of an evacuation system ultimately extends the life of the evacuation system and / or its components (eg fluid collector, filter, motor, pump, etc.) and reduces the associated costs of repair and / or replacement of the evacuation system and / or its components. The effort and wear and tear caused by operating the engine at full speed or at a speed greater than sufficient at all times is avoided. In addition, the motor that drives the pump in an evacuation system can produce varying levels of operating noise and / or vibration. This operating noise and / or vibration may not be desired in the operating room and / or in the environment, as it can inhibit communications between the surgical team and / or irritate and / or distract the surgical team, for example.

[0315] In certain cases, it may not be desirable to reduce the engine speed to zero. An electric motor, such as a permanent magnet synchronous DC motor, for example, may require a large starting torque in a completely stopped condition for use with the various pumps described here. Here, again with reference to Figure 4, the 50506 pump creates a pressure differential between a fluid entering the 50506 pump and a fluid leaving the 50506 pump. This pressure differential, or compression ratio, of the 50506 pump can result in a high motor 50512 starting torque in order to start the motor 50512 to turn the pump 50506. In one example, the pump 50506 can comprise a blower (for example, a hybrid regenerative blower). In this respect, the blower can operate at a compression ratio between about 1.1 and 1.2 to provide a higher volume of fluid (for example, relative to a fan or compressor) at an operating pressure between about 1.5 psig and 1.72 psig, for example. In another example, the 50506 pump may comprise a compressor (for example, a 50650 volute compressor pump in Figure 12). In that regard, the compressor can operate at a compression ratio greater than about 2 to provide a lower volume of fluid (for example, relative to a fan or blower) at an operating pressure greater than about 2, 72 psig, for example.

[0316] Aspects of the present description refer to systems and methods to improve the longevity of the filter set. The filter assembly may include a plurality of filter layers. For example, again with reference to Figure 11, the filter assembly includes a 50684 coarse filter medium, a 50686 fine particulate filter and a 50688 coal reservoir.

[0317] According to various aspects of the present description, a first pressure sensor (for example, the 50840 pressure sensor in Figures 18 and 19) can be positioned upstream of the filter receptacle within the flow path, and a second pressure sensor (for example, pressure sensor 50846 in Figures 18 and 19) can be positioned downstream of the filter receptacle within the flow path. In these cases, the first pressure sensor is configured to detect a first pressure and transmit a signal indicating the first pressure to the control circuit. Similarly, the second pressure sensor is configured to detect a second pressure and transmit a signal indicating the second pressure to the control circuit. In addition, the control circuit that receives the signal indicating the first pressure and the signal indicating the second pressure is configured to calculate the pressure differential between the first pressure sensor and the second pressure sensor. The control circuit can use the calculated pressure differential in various ways. In a first example, the control circuit can adjust the engine speed based on the pressure differential. In a second example, the control circuit may indicate that maintenance is required based on the pressure differential. For example, an indicator may appear on an evacuation system interface and / or a central surgical controller interface. The control circuit can calculate the pressure differential continuously, in real time, periodically or when the computational resources of the system are available.

[0318] Again with reference to Figure 4, in certain cases the particles that enter the 50504 flow path of the 50500 evacuation system can cause obstructions inside. For example, the particles can at least partially clog and / or block a portion of the 50504 flow path. In one case, the 50502 filter may be blocked by particles. An obstruction can occur abruptly or over time, depending on how the evacuation system is operated. Obstructions within the 50500 evacuation system can cause a pressure differential in the 50504 flow path to increase as flow is impeded. To maintain a desired flow and compensate for obstruction, the 50506 pump and / or the 50512 engine may require more power and / or increased speed. However, an increase in speed and / or power can decrease the efficiency of the 50512 engine and / or the 50506 pump. In addition, the operation of the engine

50512 and / or 50506 pump at an increased speed to compensate for an obstruction can shorten its service life. In other cases, to compensate for an obstruction, the control circuit can adjust the 50512 motor, as further described here.

[0319] In one aspect of the present description, the control circuit can send a drive signal to supply an adjusted current to the 50512 motor. The desired current supply can be obtained by varying a working cycle of pulse width modulation of an electrical input to the 50512 motor. In this respect, increasing the duty cycle of the current input to the motor can increase the speed of the motor, and decreasing the duty cycle of the current input to the motor can decrease the engine speed.

[0320] In one aspect of the present description, the evacuation system may comprise a relief valve within the flow path, in order to relieve excessive resistance pressures in the evacuation system. The relief valve may be in fluid communication with the surrounding environment, for example. Relieving excessive resistance pressures, through this relief valve, may prevent the 50512 engine from needing, or attempting to, compensate for excessive resistance pressure. In various aspects of the present description, this relief valve is configured to be operated (for example, open and / or closed) when receiving a signal from the control circuit.

[0321] In several aspects of the present description, the control circuit can recognize an obstruction based on the sensors positioned inside the evacuation system. For example, again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, the 50840 pressure sensor is positioned and configured to detect a pressure upstream of one or more filters, and the 50846 pressure sensor is positioned and configured to detect a pressure downstream of the one or more filters. The 50840 pressure sensor is additionally configured to transmit a signal indicating the detected pressure to the control circuit. Similarly, the 50846 pressure sensor is configured to transmit a signal indicating the detected pressure to the control circuit. In this case, the control circuit can determine that a portion of the filter assembly is at least partially blocked based on the pressure detected in 50846 and / or the pressure differential calculated between 50840 and 50846. In several aspects of the present description, the control circuit can determine that the filter assembly is blocked if, for example, (A) the pressure detected in the 50846 pressure sensor is above a certain limit, (B) the pressure differential calculated between the pressure sensor 50840 and pressure sensor 50846 is above a certain limit, (C) the pressure detected in the pressure sensor 50846 is above a certain limit established for the one or more filters, and / or (D) the differential pressure calculated between the pressure sensor 50840 and the pressure sensor 50846 is above a certain limit established for the one or more filters. In one case, the control circuit is configured to access and / or use as a reference the pressures expected for one or more filters, based on historical data stored in a cloud, such as cloud 104 (Figure 39) and / or cloud 204 (Figure 46).

[0322] Again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, the 50850 pressure sensor is positioned and configured to detect a pressure at or near the outlet of the evacuation system. In addition, the 50850 pressure sensor is configured to transmit a signal to the control circuit indicating the pressure detected at or near the outlet. In such cases, the control circuit can determine whether the flow path through the evacuation system downstream of one or more filters is at least partially blocked, based on the pressure detected in the 50846 pressure sensor and / or a pressure differential. calculated between pressure sensor 50846 and pressure sensor 50850. In several aspects of the present description, the control circuit can determine that the flow path is obstructed if, for example, the pressure detected by the pressure sensor 50846 is above a certain limit and / or the pressure differential between the 50846 pressure sensor and the 50850 pressure sensor is above a certain limit. The pressure differential generated by the pump can be considered when comparing the pressure differential between the 50846 pressure sensor and the pressure sensor

50850. In one case, the control circuit can access and / or use as a reference the expected pressures for one or more flow paths, based on historical data stored in a cloud, such as cloud 104 (Figure 39) and / or cloud 204 (Figure 46).

[0323] The speed of the 50512 motor can correspond to the current being supplied to the 50512 motor. In one aspect of the present description, the control circuit can decrease the pulse width modulation (PWM) duty cycle. Width Modulation ") of the current input to the 50512 motor, in order to decrease the rotation speed of the 50506 pump, and / or can increase the PWM duty cycle of the current input to the 50512 motor, in order to increase the speed of rotation of the 50506 pump. As described here, the PWM duty cycle adjustments can be configured to keep the flow substantially constant over a range of inlet pressures (for example, measured at the sensor pressure gauge 50840) and / or an output pressure range (for example, measured on the 50850 pressure sensor).

[0324] Now with reference to Figure 37, a control circuit can track and / or plot a ratio between the pressure detected in the upstream pressure sensor 50840 and the pressure detected in the downstream pressure sensor 50846 (ratio between pressures upstream and downstream) over time. For example, a control circuit comprising the 50308 and / or 50408 processor (Figures 5 and 6) can determine a ratio between pressures and implement various adjustments to the surgical evacuation system, based on the ratio between pressures.

[0325] In one case, with reference to graphical representation 54200 in Figure 37, the pressure differential between the upstream pressure sensor 50840 and the downstream pressure sensor 50846 may increase as the filter becomes clogged. In one aspect of the present description, the pressure ratio can increase as the downstream pressure measured by the 50846 pressure sensor decreases and / or the upstream pressure measured by the 50840 pressure sensor increases. The pressure in the 50840 pressure sensor can be equal a, or substantially equal to, pressure at the surgical site (for example, inside a patient's body). The pressure in the 50846 pressure sensor can be the pressure drained by the pump. An increase in the pressure ratio may correspond to an obstruction between the downstream pressure sensor 50846 and the upstream pressure sensor 50840, such as an obstruction in one or more filters. For example, as the filter becomes clogged, the pressure at the 50840 pressure sensor may remain the same or substantially the same (the pressure at the surgical site), and the pressure at the 50846 pressure sensor may decrease as the pump continues to drain a vacuum. .

[0326] The ratio between upstream and downstream pressure can be indicative of the filter life. For example, a low ratio may indicate that the filter does not need to be replaced and a high ratio may indicate that the filter needs to be replaced.

[0327] The progression from a new and unobstructed filter at time t0 to a filter almost completely obstructed at time t2 is shown in Figure 37. As shown in Figure 37, the ratio of pressures upstream and downstream (the pressure in the upstream pressure 50840 and pressure in the downstream pressure sensor 50846) starts at a non-zero ratio, which may be due to a baseline pressure differential from the air flow through the components and filtration materials. The ratio remains relatively constant from time t0 until just before time t1. At time t1, the ratio between upstream and downstream pressures increases at a relatively constant rate with a slope of α until the ratio between upstream and downstream pressures reaches a replacement ratio R ”. When reaching and / or exceeding the replacement ratio R ”, the filter is considered to be substantially blocked and needs to be replaced to avoid damage to the motor and / or the pump, for example. In one case, the control circuit can access and / or use as a reference, through the cloud, a replacement ratio R ”for a given filter that is installed or positioned in the filter receptacle of the evacuation system. For example, the replacement ratio R ”can be stored in memory 50410 accessible to the 50408 processor in Figure 6. Alternatively, the replacement ratio R” can be defined by the user and / or based on a history of local pressure data and / or global in the cloud. In various aspects of the present description, the control circuit can use the ratios tracked and / or plotted to display a metric of filter life (for example, 40% remaining) on an evacuation system and / or surgical controller interface central.

[0328] Still with reference to Figure 37, the control circuit can additionally track and / or plot the pulse width modulation (PWM) duty cycle of the evacuation system motor over time. For example, when one or more filters are considered relatively new after time t0 and even just before time t1, the engine's PWM duty cycle is set to a relatively low duty cycle or constant percentage. At time t 1, which corresponds to a partial blocking ratio R ', the control circuit is configured to increase the PWM duty cycle of the motor at a relatively constant rate with a slope of α1. The extended duty cycle can be selected to compensate for the filter block. As blockages in the filter continue to accumulate during use, the duty cycle can increase correspondingly to compensate for blockage of the filter. In several cases, the angular coefficient α1 can accompany the angular coefficient α as shown in Figure 37. The control circuit can access and / or use as reference a partial blocking ratio associated with a given filter installed in the filter receptacle of the evacuation system through a cloud, such as cloud 104 (Figure 39) and / or cloud 204 (Figure 46). Alternatively, the partial blocking ratio can be defined by the user and / or based on a history of local and / or global pressure data in the cloud.

[0329] In one aspect of the present description, increasing the engine duty cycle can increase the speed of the pump, so that the pump drains more air through the evacuation system. In other words, an increase in the pressure differential through the filter can trigger a corresponding increase in the PWM duty cycle from the motor to the pump.

[0330] The pump for the evacuation system is configured to transfer or effect the movement of a fluid along the flow path through mechanical action. In action, the pump can increase the pressure of that fluid as the fluid is moved. The pump may have more than one operating pressure. In one aspect of the present description, the pump can operate under a first operating pressure that results in a first flow of fluid through the flow path, and the pump can operate under a second operating pressure that results in a second flow of fluid through the flow path. The first and second fluid flows through the flow path can be the same or substantially similar, regardless of the difference in the first and second operating pressures of the pump. In one case, as obstructions accumulate within the flow path, the pump can operate under a higher operating pressure to maintain a constant flow.

[0331] Still with reference to the graphic representation 54200 in Figure 37, the control circuit can increase the PWM duty cycle of the motor to increase the current supplied to the motor and to increase the operating pressure of the pump. The control circuit can adjust the duty cycle based on one or more detected pressures, one or more pressure differentials and / or a ratio between detected pressures, for example. An increased operating pressure can be configured to compensate for obstructions, such as the obstructions in the filter that start around time t1 in Figure 37, while maintaining a constant flow of fluid through the flow path. In these cases, the control circuit is able to control the load on the pump, as the filter becomes clogged with particles, for example.

[0332] In several aspects of this description, the control circuit can increase the current supplied to the motor up to an established current limit of the motor. In one aspect, the control circuit can increase an established motor current limit in order to obtain a pressure differential necessary to maintain a desired flow. For example, despite obstructions in the flow path, a pressure differential and the desired flow can be maintained.

[0333] In another aspect of the present description, the control circuit can, for various reasons, decrease an established motor current limit. For example, the control circuit can lower the established motor current limit to protect against inadvertent tissue damage at the surgical site. For example, when a surgical door is blocked by patient tissue, the control circuit can reduce the motor current to reduce the pressure in the system and the suction force applied to the tissue. In one case, the control circuit can access and / or use as a reference an established motor current limit through a cloud, such as cloud 104 (Figure 39) and / or cloud 204 (Figure 46). Alternatively, the motor current limit can be set by the user and / or based on a history of local and / or global data in the cloud.

[0334] In several aspects of the present description, the control circuit can provide increased motor power and / or speed over a limited period of time, based on feedback from pressure sensors. During this time, an indication of one or more pressures and / or obstructions can be communicated to a user through an interface in the operating room, for example. In one case, a doctor can treat the obstruction by clearing the obstruction and / or replacing one or more filters in the filter receptacle, for example. The limited period of time can be determined based on data stored in the cloud, such as historical data referring to periods of operation at increased power and / or speed levels, before engine and / or power failure occurs. pump, for example. After the limited period of time, power and / or speed can be reduced, as further described here, until the obstruction is adequately corrected.

[0335] According to various aspects of the present description, the control circuit for an evacuation system can send a trigger signal to supply an increased or decreased current to the evacuation system motor, in order to adjust the speed of the evacuation system. motor and / or pump speed. In one case, the control circuit can send a trigger signal to obtain an

explosion at the start of the evacuation system and / or at the transition between power levels. For example, the explosion speed can be set to bring the evacuation system to a specified level at the start of an active evacuation mode. The specified level can correspond to a specified flow and / or specified pressure, for example. In many cases, the explosion speed can efficiently bring the evacuation system to a specified level in an energy efficient manner.

[0336] In one case, the explosion speed set via the control circuit is different from a constant operating speed set via the control circuit. For example, after an initial start-up of the evacuation system and / or when setting an increased power level for the evacuation system, the control circuit can send a drive signal to supply an increased current to the engine in order to to increase the engine speed to an explosion speed for a short period of time. The explosion speed can be a motor speed that is at least 20% higher than the constant motor speed necessary to obtain a desired flow, for example. In one aspect of the present description, the explosion speed is at least 50% or at least 100% greater than the constant motor speed required to obtain the desired flow.

[0337] Now with reference to a graphical representation 54300 in Figure 38, the velocity of the air flow and the particle count over time for a surgical evacuation system are represented. A control circuit for the 50800 and 50900 surgical evacuation systems (Figures 18 and 19) can adjust the air flow speed as graphically represented in Figure 38, for example. More specifically, the air flow velocity comprises explosion speeds 54302 and 54304 for an engine in the surgical evacuation system. For example, the explosion speed may be an engine speed that is required to obtain an airflow speed that is greater than the desired airflow speed over a short period of time. As shown in Figure 38, explosion speed 54302 can be an engine speed that is required to obtain an airflow speed that is at least 20% higher than the desired airflow speed V1 between the instant t1 and time t2 over a fraction (for example, 1/5) of the period between time t1 and time t2, for example. Similarly, the blast speed 54304 can be an engine speed that is required to achieve an airflow speed at least 20% higher than the desired airflow speed V2 between time t2 and time t3 over a fraction (for example, 1/4) of the period between time t2 and time t3. In several cases, the speed of the air flow may depend on the particle count within the evacuation system, as further described here.

[0338] According to various aspects of the present description, a transition from the evacuation system from a first air flow to a second air flow can be accompanied by an increase in air flow directly before or directly after the transition, and before adjustment to the second air flow. For example, the first air flow and the second air flow can correspond to a constant, or substantially constant, motor speed and a correspondingly constant, or substantially constant, air flow speed. Again with reference to the graphical display in Figure 38, the airflow velocity is substantially constant between time t1 and time t2 and, again, between time t2 and time t3, except for the explosion speeds 54302 and 54304 right after time t1 and time t2, respectively. The substantially constant airflow speeds shown in Figure 38 may correspond to the respective constant engine speeds in the respective evacuation system operating modes.

[0339] Still with reference to Figure 38, at time t0, the air flow speed can be a non-zero value between V 0 and V1, which can correspond to a motor speed in "silent" mode "54310. In" silent "54310 mode, the evacuation system can be configured to sample fluid from the surgical site. The sampled fluid can be used to determine an operational state of the smoke evacuation system, an energy device and / or another component of the surgical system, for example. At time t1, the evacuation system can enter an "active" mode

54312. In certain cases, the "active" mode 54312 can be triggered by one or more sensors in the evacuation system, as further described here. The increase in airflow speed to speed V1 at time t1 and / or to speed V 2 at time t2 can be accompanied by an additional increase in airflow speed directly after the transition or initiation to the new level of velocity. More specifically, the air flow velocity peaks shortly after time t 1 and before the subsequent adjustment at time t2 in Figure 38. Additionally, the air flow velocity peaks shortly after time t 2 when flow of air transitioning from speed v1 to speed v2 in a second "active" mode

54314.

[0340] Additionally or alternatively, a reduction in the power level of the evacuation system from a first airflow speed to a second airflow speed can be accompanied by an initial increase in airflow speed directly before the reduction. For example, by slowing the airflow speed from a constant first, or substantially constant, level to a constant, or substantially constant second level, the airflow speed may experience a peak airflow speed similar to those illustrated in Figure 38. In one case, the control circuit can directly affect a peak airflow speed before returning to a constant engine speed in "quiet mode" from an "active mode". In many cases, an explosion speed before a silent mode can, for example, purge the smoke from the surgical system and / or the evacuation system.

[0341] According to aspects of the present description, several particle sensors, such as particle sensors 50838 and 50848 in Figures 18 and 19, for example, can be positioned and configured to count particles flowing through and / or within the 50800 and 50900 evacuation systems. Similarly, a particle sensor for air quality, such as the particle sensor 50852 in Figures 18 and 19, for example, can be positioned and configured to count particles in the air am - environment around the 50800 and 50900 evacuation systems and / or inside the operating room. The various particle sensors (for example, particle sensors 50838, 50848, 50852 etc.) can be additionally configured to transmit signals indicating the concentration of particles to the control circuit in order to adjust the speed of the flow of particles. air, for example.

[0342] Again with reference to Figure 38, the motor for the evacuation system can run at a constant speed in "silent" mode 54310 between time t0 and time t1. Between time t0 and time t1, at least one particle sensor (for example, particle sensors 50838 and / or 50848) may be actively counting the particles that flow through the evacuation system. In certain cases, at least one particle sensor (for example, the 50852 particle sensor) may be actively counting particles in ambient air. In at least one case, the control circuit can compare the particles counted in the particle sensor 50838 and / or in the particle sensor

50848 to particles counted in the particle sensor 50852. The control circuit can determine whether the concentration of particulates detected by the particle sensor 50838 and / or the particle sensor 50848 exceeds a first limit, such as the C1 limit in Figure 38, for example. The limit C1 can correspond to a level of concentration of particulates and / or to a ratio between particles counted in several sensors along the flow path, for example. In response to the particle concentration exceeding the first limit C1, the control circuit can increase the engine speed, from speed in "silent" mode 54310, associated with a first air flow speed other than zero, for a second engine speed, or "active" mode 54312, associated with a second airflow speed (for example, V1) at time t1. As discussed above, the increase in airflow velocity may be accompanied by a peak or explosion in airflow velocity 54302, shortly after time t1.

[0343] Still with reference to Figure 38, the control circuit can continue detecting the concentration of particulates from at least one among the particle sensors 50838, 50848 and / or 50852 while maintaining the associated motor speed at the airflow velocity V1 from time t1 to time t2. At time t2, the control circuit can determine whether the particle concentration and / or the ratio detected by at least one of the 50838, 50848 and / or 50852 particle sensors exceeds a second limit, such as the C 2 limit in the Figure 38. The C 2 limit can correspond to a level of particulate concentration and / or a ratio between particles counted in several sensors along the flow path, which is greater than the first C 1 limit. In response at the second limit C2 being exceeded at time t 2, the control circuit is configured to increase the engine speed, the engine speed associated with the airflow speed V 1, or first "active" mode 54314,

for an engine speed associated with an increased airflow speed V2, or second "active" mode 54314. Again, the increase in airflow speed V 1 for airflow speed V2 can be accompanied by a peak or explosion of airflow velocity 54304, shortly after time t 2.

[0344] In several cases, the control circuit may continue to receive inputs indicating the concentration of particulates by the particle sensors 50838, 50848 and / or 50852, for example, while maintaining the speed of the motor associated with airflow velocity V2 between time t2 and time t3. At time t3, the control circuit can determine whether the particulate concentration and / or the ratio detected by at least one of the 50838, 50848 and / or 50852 particle sensors has decreased below the first limit C1. In response, the control circuit can decrease the engine speed, from the engine speed associated with the airflow speed V2 back to the speed of the "silent" mode associated with a first airflow speed other than zero . As discussed above, in certain cases the decrease in airflow velocity V2 back to an airflow velocity other than zero can be accompanied by a peak airflow velocity shortly after the t3 instant. The control circuit can continue to detect and / or compare the concentration of particulates detected by the particle sensors 50838, 50848 and / or 50852, for example, while maintaining the speed in "silent" mode after a t3 instant. .

[0345] In several aspects of the present description, the motor can be a variable speed motor. For example, the 50512 motor (Figure 4) can be a variable speed motor. In this case, a motor speed can be controlled based on an externally measured parameter. For example, a variable speed engine speed can be increased, decreased or maintained based on a parameter measured outside the evacuation system.

[0346] According to aspects of the present description, the 50512 motor (Figure 4) can be regulated by varying an electric current supply to the 50512 motor. For example, a first amount of current can be supplied to the 50512 motor to make the 50512 engine to operate at a first operational level. Alternatively, a second amount of current can be supplied to the 50512 motor to make the 50512 motor operate at a second operational level. More specifically, the desired current supply can be achieved by varying a pulse width modulation (PWM) duty cycle from an electrical input to the 50512 motor. In other aspects, the current can be varied by adjusting a frequency of the current supplied to the motor. In several aspects of the present description, the 50512 motor is coupled to a 50506 rotary pump or mechanism (for example a compressor, blower etc., as described here), so that the decrease in the duty cycle or the frequency of an input current for the 50512 motor decrease the pump rotation speed

50506. Similarly, increasing the duty cycle or frequency of the input current to the 50512 motor can increase the rotation speed of the 50506 pump.

[0347] In several aspects of this description, a lower level of operation of the 50512 engine may be more advantageous than turning the 50512 engine off completely when there is no need for evacuation and / or suction, and then restarting the engine 50512 when suction is required. For example, a doctor may need to use suction only intermittently during long periods of surgery. In these respects, starting the 50512 engine from a completely off state requires high starting torques in order to overcome the inertia of the stopped 50512 engine. Starting the 50512 engine repeatedly from a completely off mode in this way is inefficient and can shorten the life of the 50512 engine. Alternatively, using a lower operating level allows the 50512 engine to remain on during intermittent use. evacuation system during surgery, and adjusting to the highest operating level (for example, when additional suction is required) is possible without the higher torques needed to overcome the inertia of the stopped engine.

[0348] In several aspects of the present description, a range of variation can be established or predetermined for a motor parameter. In one example, a motor speed range can be predetermined for the variable speed motor. In several respects, a control circuit, as discussed above, can determine whether a specific flow rate is required, or an increase or decrease in flow at a surgical site, based on feedback from one or more sensors. For example, a 50308 and / or 50408 processor in a control circuit can be configured to receive input from one or more sensors and implement a flow adjustment based, at least in part, on the input of one or more sensors. Adjustments can be determined in real time or near real time.

[0349] In one aspect, the control circuit can determine the need for an adjustment to the motor, based on a measurement detected by a sensor in the surgical system, such as at least one sensor positioned and configured for detecting a fluid (for example, fluid detection sensor 50830 in Figures 18 and 19), and / or particles in the fluid (for example, particle sensors 50838 and / or 50848 in Figures 18 and 19), and / or a separate sensor on the electrosurgical instrument, which can be positioned at / near the surgical site (for example, the 50630 electrosurgical instrument in Figure 7). In response to a particular need

In fact, the control circuit can send a drive signal to supply a drive current to the 50512 motor (Figure 4) to adjust its speed to a set motor speed. This adjusted motor speed can correspond to the specific flow desired.

[0350] Alternatively, in response to a specific need, the control circuit can send a drive signal to supply a drive current to the 50512 motor, in order to increase or decrease the motor speed to a speed within of a predetermined range of engine speeds. In such cases, the control circuit limits an increase or decrease in speed of the variable speed motor to within the predetermined range of motor speeds. This adjusted motor speed may or may not correspond to the desired adjusted flow. For example, due to a predetermined range of motor speeds, the control circuit may be unable to adjust the motor speed to obtain the desired flow.

[0351] In another aspect of this description, an engine speed can be selected by a doctor in the operating room, such as when the engine is running in a manual mode. For example, the doctor can manually change a variable engine speed to a desired engine speed, using a user interface. The user interface can be in the evacuation system cabinet and / or in a central surgical controller interface, for example. In many ways, the user interface can display an externally measured parameter to the doctor (for example, the amount of smoke and / or particles measured through a sensor at, or near, the surgical site), and the doctor you can manually adjust the engine speed based on the externally measured parameter. In this regard, the user interface can send a drive signal to supply a drive current to the motor in order to set, increase or decrease the motor speed for the selected motor speed.

[0352] In one aspect of the present description, the control circuit can change a first trigger signal to a second trigger signal, based on the detected pressure conditions and / or measurements within the evacuation system. For example, again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, pressure sensors 50840, 50846, 50850 and 50854 can transmit their respective pressures to the control circuit, which can change the first trigger signal to the second trigger signal, with based on one or more of the detected pressures. Notably, in this respect, the actual engine speed may not be the same as the engine speed selected by the user via the user interface. For example, if a pressure measured within the evacuation system exceeds a limit pressure, allowing an increased engine speed associated with an engine speed selected by the user can damage the engine and / or other components of the evacuation system. . In this way, the control circuit can surpass a motor speed selected by the user, in order to avoid damage to the evacuation system and its components.

[0353] In another aspect of this description, a motor speed can be automatically selected by the control circuit, such as when the motor is running in an automatic mode. In this regard, the control circuit can send a drive signal to supply a drive current to the motor in order to adjust, increase or decrease the motor speed to an appropriate motor speed, based on one or plus externally measured parameters (for example, the amount of smoke and / or particles measured at or near the surgical site). In an alternative aspect, the control circuit can send a drive signal to supply a drive current to the motor in order to set, increase or decrease the motor speed based on the parameters measured within the evacuation system. , including at least one of the pressure and particulate concentration detected by the various sensors inside it. In one example, the 50840, 50846, 50850 and 50854 pressure sensors can transmit their respective detected and / or measured pressures to the control circuit. In addition or alternatively, particle sensors 50838, 50848 and 50852 can transmit their respective detected and / or measured particle counts to the control circuit.

[0354] Now with reference to Figure 35, an adjustment algorithm 54000 for a surgical evacuation system is shown. Several surgical evacuation systems disclosed here can use the adjustment algorithm 54000 in Figure 35. In addition, the reader will readily understand that, in certain cases, the adjustment algorithm 54000 can be combined with one or more adjustment algorithms additional information described here. Adjustments to the surgical evacuation system can be implemented by a processor, which is in signal communication with the evacuation pump motor (see, for example, the processors and pumps in Figures 5 and 6.). For example, the 50408 processor can implement the 54000 tuning algorithm. That processor can also be in signal communication with one or more sensors in the surgical evacuation system.

[0355] In one case, a control circuit 54008 may be communically coupled to a first particle sensor 54010, which may be similar to the particle sensor 50838 in Figures 18 and 19, and may transmit a first signal, comprising its particle count detected and / or measured, in block 54002. Additionally, the control circuit 54008 can be coupled to a second particle sensor 54012, which can be similar in many aspects to the particle sensor 50848 in Figures 18 and 19, and can transmit to the control circuit

control a second signal, comprising its particle count detected and / or measured, in block 54004. The control circuit 54008 can then transmit a drive signal in block 54006 to apply a given drive current to the system motor in block 54016. For example, control circuit 54008 may be similar in many respects to the control schemes in Figures 5 and 6, and may include a processor communicatively coupled to a memory. In yet another aspect, any combination of sensors 50840, 50846, 50850, 50854, 50838, 50848 and 50852 (Figures 18 and 19) can transmit the respective detected and / or measured parameters to the control circuit 54008. In this alternative aspect, the control circuit can determine an adequate motor speed based on the parameters measured internally. In either case, a user interface can show the current engine speed in multiple instances.

[0356] In several aspects of the present description, an adequate engine speed can be an ideal engine speed, determined based on historical data stored in a cloud, such as cloud 104 (Figure 39) and / or cloud 204 (Figure 46). The ideal motor speed can be the most efficient speed, given the one or more measured external and / or internal parameters, for example. In other respects, the proper engine speed can be an ideal engine speed, determined so that all measured pressures are below the limit pressures. In other words, to avoid damage to the components of the evacuation system and to minimize the concentration of particulates, such as the concentration measured in the particle sensor 50848, for example. In additional aspects, the engine speed automatically selected by the control circuit can be adjusted manually. In this manual override mode, a user can select a desired engine speed that is different from the automatically selected engine speed. In this respect, a user interface can display the selected engine speed. In additional aspects of this description, the user interface can display the ideal motor speed determined by the control circuit, so that the user is informed that a speed and / or flow less than (or greater than) the ideal has been defined and / or selected.

[0357] In yet another aspect of the present description, the externally measured parameter supplied to the control circuit may comprise a power level of an electrosurgical signal supplied to an electrosurgical instrument by a generator, such as the electrosurgical instrument 50630 by the 50640 generator in Figure 6. In this respect, the control circuit can increase the engine speed in proportion to an increase in the power level. For example, several increased power levels can be correlated to increased smoke levels in a cloud database. Similarly, the control circuit can decrease the engine speed in proportion to a decrease in the power level. Here, in an alternative aspect, an engine speed can be set (for example, automatically and / or manually, as discussed in this document) in the evacuation system. In addition, in such an aspect, a power level defined in the generator 50640 can influence the defined motor speed. In one aspect, a manually configured motor speed can be changed based on the power level defined in the 50640 generator. In another aspect, an automatically configured motor speed can be changed based on the power level defined in the 50640 generator. .

[0358] Figure 36 illustrates a 54100 graphical display of particle count, energy, voltage and engine speed for a surgical evacuation system, such as the 50800 and 50900 evacuation systems, for example. A control circuit for the evacuation system is configured to regulate the engine speed based on an externally measured parameter and an internally measured parameter. In one aspect of the present description, the control circuits in Figures 5 and 6 can implement the engine speed adjustments shown. In Figure 36, the externally measured parameter is the power level of an electrosurgical signal delivered to an electrosurgical instrument by a generator (for example, the 50630 electrosurgical instrument next to the 50640 generator in Figure 7) used in a procedure surgical. The internally measured parameter is the particle count detected by the evacuation system, such as the 50838 laser particle counter in Figures 18 and 19, for example. The reader will readily understand that, in certain cases, the motor speed can be adjusted based on one of the externally measured parameter or the internally measured parameter. In certain cases, additional internal or external parameters can be used to adjust the engine speed.

[0359] At time t0, the motor speed is zero, the power level supplied to the electrosurgical instrument is zero, and the particle count detected by the particle sensor 50838 is zero. At t1, a first level of power is supplied by the generator to an electrosurgical instrument. In one example, the first power level can correspond to a coagulation mode. In parallel with the increase in the power level at time t 1 or shortly thereafter, the control circuit sends a drive signal to supply a drive current to the motor. The starting current results in an explosion 54102 in the motor speed, before the motor settles to a motor speed in baseline (for example, idle) 54104 between t1 and t2. The baseline speed of the 54104 engine can correspond to the minimum torque required to spin the pump, for example. For example, as the time approaches t2, the engine speed may correspond to a standby or silent mode,

in which the smoke evacuator is fed in anticipation of the generation of smoke. At time t 1, the 50838 particle sensor does not affect the motor speed.

[0360] At time t2, particle sensor 50838 detects a first peak 54106 in the particulate concentration, which increases the particle count above a minimum limit 54110, which corresponds to an "active" mode for evacuation of smoke. In response to that first peak 54106, just after t2, the control circuit sends a second drive signal to supply the motor with an increased current to increase the flow through the evacuation system, in a "silent" way to "active" mode, for example. In response to the increase in flow, the particulate concentration counted by the particle sensor 50838 starts to decrease between time t2 and time t3. The control circuit actively monitors the output of the 50838 particle sensor and, as the particulate concentration declines, sends a third drive signal to supply the 50512 motor with a reduced current in proportion to the decrease in the particulate concentration detected by the particle sensor 50838. In other words, the motor speed between time t2 and time t3 is proportional to the particulate concentration detected by the particle sensor 50838.

[0361] At time t3, the first power level provided by generator 50640, which remained relatively constant between times t1 and t3, is increased from a first power level 54112 to a second power level 54114. In one example , the second power level 54114 can correspond to a cutting mode. In response to the increase in the generator's energy level, just after t3, the control circuit sends a third drive signal to supply an increased current to the engine in order to increase the flow through the evacuation system again. For example, the motor speed can be changed in response to the waveform change at time t3. Additionally, due to the increased power level, the 50838 particle sensor detects a second 54108 peak of counted particles. The third trigger signal can meet the increase in the concentration of particulates in the smoke. In response to the increase in engine speed, the particles counted by the 50838 particle sensor decrease between times t3 and t4. Again, the control circuit actively monitors the 50838 particle sensor, and sends a fourth trigger signal to supply a reduced current to the engine, in proportion to the decrease in particulate concentration detected by the 50838 particle sensor.

[0362] At time t4, the second power level 54114 provided by the generator, which remained relatively constant between t3 and t4, decreases at a constant rate between t 4 and t5. In response, after time t4, the particulate concentration detected by the particle sensor 50838 also decreases. In fact, the concentration of particulates drops to a level slightly below the minimum limit 54110 and above an interruption limit 54118, between time t4 and instant t5, and remains relatively constant near interruption device 54118 until time t5. In one case, this may correspond to the evacuation of residual smoke from the surgical site. The control circuit continues to monitor the particle sensor 50838 between times t 4 and t5, sending subsequent trigger signals to reduce the current supplied to the motor in proportion to the decrease in particulate concentration between time t4 and time t5.

[0363] At time t5, a third peak 54116 in the particulate concentration can be detected by the particle sensor 50838, which again increases the particle count above the lower limit

54110. In one case, the additional smoke generated during the surgical procedure and detected by the 50838 particle sensor can be a result of the condition of the tissue. For example, as the fabric dries during the procedure, additional smoke may be generated. In response to the increase in smoke at time t5, the waveform of the generator automatically adjusts to minimize smoke. For example, a third level of power can be provided by the generator. In addition, the voltage, which remained at a relatively constant first level between time t1 and time t5, falls to a second level relatively constant after time t5 and until time t6. The waveform adjustment 54122 at time t5, in which the power is increased and the voltage is decreased, can be configured to generate less smoke in certain cases.

[0364] In response to the power level adjustment for the generator at time t5, the particulate concentration detected by particle sensor 50838 decreases steadily between times t5 and t6. At time t6, the generator's power and voltage level is reduced to zero, corresponding to an off state, as in the conclusion of a surgical step, for example. In addition, the particulate concentration detected by the particle sensor 50838 falls below the interruption limit 54118 at time t6. In response, the control circuit sends a drive signal to supply a reduced current to the motor, in order to reduce the motor speed to standby or silent mode 54120.

[0365] In several cases, an evacuation system can automatically detect and compensate for laparoscopic use. For example, an evacuation system can automatically detect a laparoscopic mode of a surgical system. For laparoscopic surgical procedures, a patient's body cavity is inflated with a gas (for example, carbon dioxide) to inflate the body cavity and create a working space and / or vision for a medical professional during the procedure surgical. Insufflation of the body cavity creates a pressurized cavity. In such cases, an evacuation system, as shown in the present invention, can be configured to detect the pressurized cavity and adjust an evacuation system parameter, such as the engine speed, for example, in response to the cavity parameters pressurized.

[0366] For example, again with reference to Figures 18 and 19, the pressure sensor 50840 can detect a pressure above a certain limit pressure, which can correspond to pressures conventionally used for insufflation. In such cases, the control circuit can initially determine whether the surgical procedure being performed is a laparoscopic surgical procedure. In certain instances, a smoke evacuation system control circuit (for example, 50308 and / or 50408 processors in Figures 5 and 6) may consult a centrally operated surgical controller or communicatively coupled cloud to determine if a laparoscopic surgical procedure is being performed. For example, situational recognition, as further described here, can determine and / or confirm whether a laparoscopic procedure is being performed.

[0367] In certain instances, an external control circuit, such as the control circuit associated with a central surgical controller, for example, can consult a communicatively coupled cloud. In another aspect, an evacuation system user interface can receive action from a professional. The control circuit can receive a signal from the user interface indicating that the surgical procedure being performed is a laparoscopic surgical procedure. If it is not a laparoscopic surgical procedure, the control circuit can determine if the filter is blocked and / or partially blocked, as described here. If it is a laparoscopic surgical procedure, the control circuit can adjust the pressure detected in the 50840 pressure sensor by a predetermined amount, in order to obtain a laparoscopy-adjusted pressure in the 50840 sensor. This laparoscopic-adjusted pressure in the 50840 sensor can be used in accordance with the various aspects described here in lieu of the actual pressure detected on the 50840 sensor. In these aspects, this can prevent an inappropriate and / or premature indication that the filter is clogged and / or partially clogged. In addition, the aforementioned adjustment can avoid unnecessary adjustments to the motor speed.

[0368] According to various aspects, the evacuation system can additionally detect such a pressurized cavity and adjust an evacuation system parameter (for example, engine speed) in response to a determination that the surgical procedure is being performed it is a laparoscopic surgical procedure. In these respects, after a pressure sensor like the 50840 pressure sensor, for example, detects that the evacuation system is being used inside a pressurized environment, the control circuit can send a trigger signal to change one or more engine operating parameters until an effective evacuation rate is obtained for laparoscopic procedures. In one example, a baseline engine speed (for example, idle) and / or an engine speed at the upper limit can be adjusted downwards to compensate for the additional pressure provided by the pressurized cavity (for example, see Figure 7, through the distal opening of the conduit 50634, near the tip of the surgical instrument 50630 and the suction hose 50636). In such cases, after the pressure sensor, such as the 50840 pressure sensor, for example, detects that the evacuation system is being used inside a pressurized environment, the control circuit can define a secondary limit and / or monitor a secondary limit established in relation to pressure losses in the pressure sensor.

[0369] If the pressure detected by the 50840 pressure sensor falls below this secondary limit, the evacuation system can negatively impact the insufflation of the surgical site. For example, adjustments to the engine speed could lower the pressure on the 50840 pressure sensor below a secondary limit. In certain cases, a separate pressure sensor can be positioned on the electrosurgical instrument (that is, so that it is inside the body cavity during the laparoscopic procedure) to initially detect a pressurized cavity and / or monitor the pressures inside of the body cavity during the laparoscopic surgical procedure. In that regard, a pressure sensor would send signals to the control circuit in order to properly adjust an evacuation system parameter (for example, the engine speed) as described here.

[0370] The reader should readily consider that the various surgical evacuation systems and components described here can be incorporated into an interactive surgical system implemented by a computer, a central surgical controller and / or a robotic system. For example, a surgical evacuation system can communicate data to a central surgical controller, a robotic system and / or an interactive computer-implemented surgical system and / or it can receive data from a central surgical controller, a robotic system - optical and / or an interactive surgical system implemented by a computer. Several examples of computer-implemented interactive surgical systems, robotic systems and central surgical controllers are described in more detail below. Computer-implemented interactive surgical system

[0371] Referring to Figure 39, a computer-implemented interactive surgical system 100 includes one or more surgical systems 102 and a cloud-based system (for example, cloud 104 which may include a remote server 113 attached to a device storage 105). Each surgical system 102 includes at least one central surgical controller 106 in communication with the cloud 104 which can include a remote server 113. In one example, as shown in Figure 39, surgical system 102 includes a display system 108 , a robotic system 110, a smart handheld surgical instrument 112, which are configured to communicate with each other and / or the central controller 106. In some respects, a surgical system 102 may include an M number of central controllers 106 , an N number of display systems 108, an O number of robotic systems 110, and a P number of smart handheld surgical instruments 112, where M, N, O, and P are integers greater than or equal the one.

[0372] Figure 40 represents an example of a surgical system 102 being used to perform a surgical procedure on a patient who is lying on an operating table 114 in an operating room 116. A robotic system 110 is used in the procedure surgical as a part of surgical system 102. Robotic system 110 includes a surgeon console 118, a patient side carriage 120 (surgical robot), and a robotic central surgical controller 122. Patient carriage 120 can handle at least one surgical tool removably coupled 117 through a minimally invasive incision in the patient's body while the surgeon views the surgical site through the surgeon's console 118. An image of the surgical site can be obtained by a medical imaging device 124, that can be manipulated by the patient's car 120 to guide the imaging device 124. The robotic central controller 122 can be used to process the patient's images surgical site for subsequent display to the surgeon, through the surgeon's console 118.

[0373] Other types of robotic systems can be readily adapted for use with the surgical system 102. Various examples of robotic systems and surgical instruments that are suitable for use with the present description are described in the provisional patent application no. 62 / 611,339, entitled "ROBOT ASSISTED SURGICAL PLAT-FORM", filed on December 28, 2017, the description of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[0374] Several examples of cloud-based analysis that are performed by the cloud 104, and that are suitable for use with the present description, are described in US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 611.340, entitled "CLOUD- BASED MEDICAL ANALYTICS ", deposited on December 28, 2017, whose description is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety for reference.

[0375] In several respects, the imaging device 124 includes at least one Image sensor and one or more optical components. Suitable image sensors include, but are not limited to, load-coupled device (CCD) sensors and complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) sensors.

[0376] The optical components of the imaging device 124 may include one or more light sources and / or one or more lenses. One or more light sources can be directed to illuminate portions of the surgical field. The one or more image sensors can receive reflected or refracted light from the surgical field, including reflected or refracted light from the tissue and / or surgical instruments.

[0377] One or more light sources can be configured to radiate electromagnetic energy in the visible spectrum, as well as in the invisible spectrum. The visible spectrum, sometimes called the optical spectrum or light spectrum, is that portion of the electromagnetic spectrum that is visible to (that is, can be detected by) the human eye and can be called visible light or simply light. A typical human eye will respond to wavelengths in the air that are from about 380 nm to about 750 nm.

[0378] The invisible spectrum (that is, the non-luminous spectrum) is that portion of the electromagnetic spectrum located below and above the visible spectrum (that is, wavelengths below about 380 nm and above about 750 nm). The invisible spectrum is not detectable by the human eye. Wavelengths greater than about 750 nm are longer than the visible red spectrum, and they become invisible infrared (IR), microwaves, radio and electromagnetic radiation. Wavelengths shorter than about 380 nm are shorter than the ultraviolet spectrum, and they become invisible ultraviolet, x-ray, and gamma-ray electromagnetic radiation.

[0379] In several respects, the imaging device 124 is configured for use in a minimally invasive procedure. Examples of imaging devices suitable for use with the present description include, but are not limited to, an arthroscope, angioscope, bronchoscope, choledocoscope, colonoscope, cytoscope, duodenoscope, endo-roscope, esophagogastroduodenoscope (gastroscope), endoscope, laryngoscope, nasopharyngoscope, sigmoidoscope, thoracoscope and urethroscope.

[0380] In one aspect, the imaging device employs multiple spectrum monitoring to discriminate topography and underlying structures. A multi-spectral image is one that captures image data within wavelength bands along the electromagnetic spectrum. Wavelengths can be separated by filters or using instruments that are sensitive to specific wavelengths, including light from frequencies beyond the visible light range, for example, IR and ultraviolet light. Spectral images can allow the extraction of additional information that the human eye cannot capture with its receivers for the colors red, green, and blue. The use of multispectral imaging is described in more detail under the heading "Advanced Imaging Acquisition

dule "in US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 611,341, entitled" INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM ", filed on December 28, 2017, the description of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Monitoring multispectral can be a useful tool for relocating a surgical field after a surgical task is completed to perform one or more of the tests previously described on the treated tissue.

[0381] It is axiomatic that strict sterilization of the operating room and surgical equipment is necessary during any surgery. The strict hygiene and sterilization conditions required in an "operating room", that is, an operating or treatment room, justify the highest possible sterilization of all medical devices and equipment. Part of this sterilization process is the need to sterilize anything that comes into contact with the patient or enters the sterile field, including imaging device 124 and its connectors and components. It will be understood that the sterile field can be considered a specified area, such as inside a tray or on a sterile towel, which is considered free of microorganisms, or the sterile field can be considered an area, immediately around a patient, who was prepared to perform a surgical procedure. The sterile field may include members of the brushing team, who are properly dressed, and all furniture and accessories in the area.

[0382] In several aspects, the visualization system 108 includes one or more imaging sensors, one or more image processing units, one or more storage matrices and one or more screens that are strategically arranged in relation to the field sterile, as shown in Figure 40. In one aspect, the display system 108 includes an interface for HL7, PACS and EMR. Various components of the display system 108 are described under the heading

"Advanced Imaging Acquisition Module" in US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 611,341, entitled "INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed on December 28, 2017, the description of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

[0383] As shown in Figure 40, a primary screen 119 is positioned in the sterile field so that it is visible to an operator at the operating table 114. In addition, a viewing tower 111 is positioned outside the sterile field. The display tower 111 includes a first non-sterile screen 107 and a second non-sterile screen 109, which are opposite each other. The visualization system 108, guided by the central controller 106, is configured to use screens 107, 109 and 119 to coordinate the flow of information to operators inside and outside the sterile field. For example, the central controller 106 can have the visualization system 108 display a snapshot of a surgical site, as recorded by an imaging device 124, on a non-sterile screen 107 or 109, while maintaining a transmission over the live from the surgical site on the main screen 119. The snapshot on the non-sterile screen 107 or 109 can enable a non-sterile operator to perform a diagnostic step relevant to the surgical procedure, for example.

[0384] In one aspect, the central controller 106 is also configured to route an entry or diagnostic feedback by a non-sterile operator in the display tower 111 to the primary screen 119 within the sterile field, where it can be seen by a sterile operator on the operating table. In one example, the entry can be in the form of a modification of the snapshot displayed on the non-sterile screen 107 or 109, which can be routed to the main screen 119 by the central controller 106.

[0385] With reference to Figure 40, a surgical instrument 112 is being used in the surgical procedure as part of the surgical system 102. The central controller 106 is also configured to coordinate the flow of information to a screen of the surgical instrument.

112. For example, in US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 611,341, entitled "INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed on December 28, 2017, the description of which is incorporated herein by way of reference in its entirety . A diagnostic input or feedback inserted by a non-sterile operator in the display tower 111 can be routed by the central controller 106 to the surgical instrument screen 115 in the sterile field, where it can be seen by the operator of the surgical instrument 112. Instruments exemplary surgical instruments that are suitable for use with surgical system 102 are described under the title "Surgical Instrument Hardware" and in provisional patent application serial number 62 / 611,341, entitled "INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed on December 28 2017, the description of which is incorporated here for reference in its entirety, for example.

[0386] Now with reference to Figure 41, a central controller 106 is shown in communication with a visualization system 108, a robotic system 110 and a smart handheld surgical instrument 112. Central controller 106 includes a central controller screen 135, an imaging module 138, a generator module 140, a communication module 130, a processor module 132 and a storage matrix 134. In certain respects, as shown in Figure 41, the central controller 106 additionally includes a smoke evacuation module 126 and / or a suction / irrigation module 128.

[0387] During a surgical procedure, the application of energy to the tissue, for sealing and / or cutting, is generally associated with the evacuation of smoke, suction of excess fluid and / or irrigation of the tissue. The fluid,

the power, and / or data lines from different sources are often intertwined during the surgical procedure. Valuable time can be wasted in addressing this issue during a surgical procedure. To untangle the lines, it may be necessary to disconnect the lines from their respective modules, which may require a restart of the modules. The modular compartment of the central controller 136 offers a unified environment to manage power, data and fluid lines, which reduces the frequency of entanglement between such lines.

[0388] The aspects of this description present a central surgical controller for use in a surgical procedure that involves applying energy to the tissue at a surgical site. The central surgical controller includes a central controller compartment and a combined generator module received slidingly in a central controller compartment docking station. The docking station includes data and power contacts. The combined generator module includes two or more of an ultrasonic energy generating component, a bipolar RF energy generating component, and a monopolar RF energy generating component which are housed in a single unit. In one aspect, the combined generator module also includes a smoke evacuation component, at least one power application cable to connect the combined generator module to a surgical instrument, at least one smoke evacuation component configured for evacuate smoke, fluid, and / or particulate matter generated by applying therapeutic energy to the tissue, and a fluid line that extends from the remote surgical site to the smoke evacuation component.

[0389] In one aspect, the fluid line is a first fluid line and a second fluid line extends from the surgical site

motorcycle to a suction and irrigation module received slidingly into the central controller compartment. In one aspect, the central controller compartment comprises a fluid interface.

[0390] Certain surgical procedures may require the application of more than one type of energy to the tissue. One type of energy may be more beneficial for cutting the fabric, while another type of energy may be more beneficial for sealing the fabric. For example, a bi-polar generator can be used to seal the tissue while an ultrasonic generator can be used to cut the sealed tissue. Aspects of the present description present a solution in which a modular compartment of central controller 136 is configured to accommodate different generators and facilitate interactive communication between them. One of the advantages of the modular compartment of the central controller 136 is that it allows the quick removal and / or replacement of several modules.

[0391] Aspects of the present description present a modular surgical compartment for use in a surgical procedure that involves applying energy to the tissue. The modular surgical compartment includes a first energy generator module, configured to generate a first energy for application to the tissue, and a first docking station that comprises a first coupling port that includes first data and power contacts, the first power generator module is slidingly movable in an electric coupling with the power and data contacts, and the first power generator module is slidingly movable out of the electric coupling with the first contacts power and data.

[0392] In addition to the above, the modular surgical compartment also includes a second energy generator module configured to generate a second energy, different from the first energy, for application to the tissue, and a second docking station that comprises a second door coupling that includes second data and power contacts, the second power generator module is slidingly movable in an electrical coupling with the power and data contacts, and the second power generator module is sliding way out of the electrical coupling with the second power and data contacts.

[0393] In addition, the modular surgical cabinet also includes a communication bus between the first coupling port and the second coupling port, configured to facilitate communication between the first power generator module and the second power generator module .

[0394] With reference to Figures 41 to 45, aspects of the present description are presented for a modular compartment of the central controller 136 that allows the modular integration of a generator module 140, a smoke evacuation module 126, and a suction / irrigation 128. The modular compartment of central controller 136 further facilitates interactive communication between modules 140, 126, 128. As shown in Figure 43, generator module 140 can be a generator module with monopolar, bipolar and ultrasonic components integrated sonics, supported in a single cabinet unit 139 slidably insertable in the central compartment modular module 136. As shown in Figure 42, generator module 140 can be configured to connect to a monopolar device 146, a bipolar device 147 and an ultrasonic device 148. Alternatively, generator module 140 may comprise a series of monopolar, bipolar and / or u generator modules l sonicators that interact through the central compartment modular module 136. The central compartment modular module 136 can be configured to facilitate the insertion of multiple generators and interactive communication between generators anchored in the central compartment modular compartment 136 , so that the generators would act as a single generator.

[0395] In one aspect, the modular compartment of the central controller 136 comprises a modular back plate with modular power and a communication module 149 with external and wireless communication heads to allow the removable fixing of modules 140, 126, 128 and communicates - interactive interaction between them.

[0396] In one aspect, the modular compartment of the central controller 136 includes docking stations, or drawers, 151, here also called drawers, which are configured to receive modules 140, 126, 128 in a sliding way. Figure 43 illustrates a partial perspective view of a central surgical controller compartment 136, and a combined generator module 145 that can be slidably received at a docking station 151 of the central surgical controller compartment 136. A anchor 152 with data and power contacts on a rear side of the combined generator module 145 is configured to engage a corresponding anchor port 150 with data and power contacts of a corresponding docking station 151 modular compartment of central controller 136, as the combined generator module 145 is slid into position within the corresponding docking station 151 of the modular compartment of the c central controller 136. In one aspect, the combined generator module 145 includes a bipolar, ultrasonic and monopolar module and a smoke evacuation module integrated into a single cabinet unit 139, as shown in Figure 43.

[0397] In several respects, the smoke evacuation module 126 includes a fluid line 154 that carries smoke captured / collected from fluid away from a surgical site and to, for example, the smoke evacuation module 126. The vacuum suction that originates from the smoke evacuation module 126 can pull the smoke into an opening of a utility conduit at the surgical site. The utility conduit, coupled to the fluid line, can be in the form of a flexible tube that ends in the smoke evacuation module 126. The utility conduit and the fluid line define a fluid path that extends towards the smoke evacuation module 126 which is received in the central controller compartment

136.

[0398] In various aspects, the suction / irrigation module 128 is coupled to a surgical tool comprising a fluid suction line and a fluid suction line. In one example, the suction and suction fluid lines are in the form of flexible tubes that extend from the surgical site towards the suction / irrigation module 128. One or more drive systems can be configured to make irrigation and aspiration of fluids to and from the surgical site.

[0399] In one aspect, the surgical tool includes a drive shaft that has an end actuator at a distal end of it and at least an energy treatment associated with the end actuator, a suction tube, and a irrigation pipe. The suction tube can have an inlet port at a distal end and the suction tube extends through the drive shaft. Similarly, an irrigation pipe can extend through the drive shaft and may have an entrance port close to the power application implement. The power application implement is configured to supply ultrasonic and / or RF energy to the surgical site and is coupled to the generator module 140 by a cable that initially extends through the drive shaft.

[0400] The irrigation tube can be in fluid communication with a fluid source, and the suction tube can be in fluid communication with a vacuum source. The fluid source and / or the vacuum source can be housed in the suction / irrigation module 128. In one example, the fluid source and / or the vacuum source can be housed in the central controller compartment 136 , separately from the suction / irrigation module 128. In such an example, a fluid interface can be configured to connect the suction / irrigation module 128 to the fluid source and / or the vacuum source.

[0401] In one aspect, modules 140, 126, 128 and / or their corresponding docking stations in the modular housing of central controller 136 may include alignment features that are configured to align the docking ports of the modules in engage with their counterparts in the docking stations of the modular compartment of the central controller 136. For example, as shown in Figure 42, the combined generator module 145 includes side brackets 155 that are configured to slide the corresponding brackets in a sliding way 156 from the corresponding docking station 151 of the central controller 136 modular compartment. The brackets cooperate to guide the coupling port contacts of the combined generator module 145 in an electrical coupling with the contacts of the central controller modular compartment port 136 .

[0402] In some respects, the drawers 151 of the modular compartment of the central controller 136 have the same, or substantially the same, size, and the modules are adjusted in size to be received in the drawers 151. For example, the side brackets 155 and / or 156 can be larger or smaller depending on the size of the module. In other respects, drawers 151 are different in size and are each designed to accommodate a specific module.

[0403] In addition, the contacts of a specific module can be switched to engage with the contacts of a specific drawer to prevent the insertion of a module in a drawer with unpaired contacts.

[0404] As shown in Figure 43, the coupling port 150 of a drawer 151 can be coupled to the coupling port 150 of another drawer 151 via a communication link 157 to facilitate interactive communication between the modules housed in the modular compartment of the central controller 136. The coupling ports 150 of the modular compartment of the central controller 136 can, alternatively or additionally, facilitate interactive wireless communication between the modules housed in the modular compartment of the central controller 136. Any suitable wireless communication can be used, such as Air Titan Bluetooth.

[0405] Figure 44 illustrates individual power bus connectors for a plurality of side coupling ports of a lateral modular cabinet 160 configured to receive a plurality of modules from a central surgical controller 206. The modular compartment side 160 is configured to receive and later interconnect modules 161. The modules 161 are slidably inserted into the docking stations 162 of the side modular compartment 160, which includes a back plate for interconnecting the modules 161. As shown in Figure 44, modules 161 are arranged laterally in the side modular cabinet 160. Alternatively, modules 161 can be arranged vertically in a side modular cabinet.

[0406] Figure 45 illustrates a vertical modular cabinet 164 configured to receive a plurality of modules 165 from the central surgical controller 106. Modules 165 are slidably inserted into docking stations, or drawers, 167 of the modular cabinet vertical 164, which includes a rear panel for interconnecting the modules

165. Although the drawers 167 of the vertical modular cabinet 164 are arranged vertically, in certain cases, a vertical modular cabinet 164 may include drawers that are arranged laterally. In addition, modules 165 can interact with each other through the coupling ports of the vertical modular cabinet 164. In the example in Figure 45, a screen 177 is provided to show data relevant to the operation of modules 165. In addition, the vertical modular compartment 164 includes a master module 178 which houses a plurality of submodules which are received slidingly in the master module 178.

[0407] In several respects, imaging module 138 comprises an integrated video processor and a modular light source and is adapted for use with various imaging devices. In one aspect, the imaging device is comprised of a modular housing that can be mounted with a light source module and a camera module. The compartment can be a disposable compartment. In at least one example, the disposable compartment is removably coupled to a reusable controller, a light source module, and a camera module. The light source module and / or the camera module can be chosen selectively depending on the type of surgical procedure. In one aspect, the camera module comprises a CCD sensor. In another aspect, the camera module comprises a CMOS sensor. In another aspect, the camera module is configured for imaging the scanned beam. Similarly, the light source module can be configured to provide a white light or a different light, depending on the surgical procedure.

[0408] During a surgical procedure, removing a surgical device from the surgical field and replacing it with another surgical device that includes a different camera or other light source may be inefficient. Temporarily losing sight of the surgical field can lead to undesirable consequences. The imaging device module of this description is configured to allow the replacement of a light source module or a "midstream" camera module during a surgical procedure, without the need to remove the imaging device. the surgical field.

[0409] In one aspect, the imaging device comprises a tubular compartment that includes a plurality of channels. A first channel is configured to receive the Camera module in a sliding way, which can be configured for a snap-fit fit (pressure fit) with the first channel. A second channel is configured to slide the camera module, which can be configured for a snap-fit fit (pressure fit) with the first channel. In another example, the camera module and / or the light source module can be rotated to an end position within their respective channels. A threaded coupling can be used instead of a pressure fitting.

[0410] In several examples, multiple imaging devices are placed in different positions in the surgical field to provide multiple views. Imaging module 138 can be configured to switch between imaging devices to provide an ideal view. In several respects, imaging module 138 can be configured to integrate images from different imaging devices.

[0411] Various image processors and imaging devices suitable for use with the present description are described in US patent No. 7,995,045, entitled "COMBINED SBI AND CONVENTIO-NAL IMAGE PROCESSOR", which was granted on August 9 2011, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In addition, US patent No. 7,982,776, entitled "SBI MOTION ARTIFACT RE-MOVAL APPARATUS AND METHOD", which was granted on July 19, 2011, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, describes various systems for removing motion artifacts from image data. Such systems can be integrated with imaging module 138. In addition, US Patent Application Publication No. 2011/0306840, entitled "CONTROLLABLE MAGNETIC SOURCE TO FIXTURE INTRACORPOREAL APPARATUS", which was published on December 15, 2011, and US Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0243597, entitled "SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING A MINIMALLY INVASIVE SURGICAL PROCEDURE", which was published on August 28, 2014, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety .

[0412] Figure 46 illustrates a surgical data network 201 comprising a central modular communication controller 203 configured to connect modular devices located in one or more operating rooms of a healthcare facility, or any environment in a facility. from utilities specially equipped for surgical operations, to a cloud-based system (for example, cloud 204 which can include a remote server 213 coupled to a storage device 205). In one aspect, the modular central communication controller 203 comprises a central network controller 207 and / or a network switch 209 in communication with a network router. The central modular communication controller 203 can also be coupled to a local computer system 210 to provide local computer processing and data manipulation. The surgical data network 201 can be configured as a passive, intelligent, or switching network. A passive surgical data network serves as a conduit for the data, allowing the data to be transmitted from one device (or segment) to another and to cloud computing resources. An intelligent surgical data network includes additional features to make it possible to monitor traffic passing through the surgical data network, and to configure each port on the central network controller 207 or on the network switch 209. A network of Intelligent surgical data can be called a central controller or manageable switch. A central switching controller reads the destination address of each packet and then forwards the packet to the correct port.

[0413] Modular devices 1a to 1n located in the operating room can be coupled to the modular central communication controller 203. The central network controller 207 and / or the network switch 209 can be coupled to a network router 211 to connect devices 1a to 1n to cloud 204 or local computer system 210. Data associated with devices 1a to 1n can be transferred to cloud-based computers via the router for remote data processing and manipulation. The data associated with devices 1a to 1n can also be transferred to the local computer system 210 for processing and manipulating the local data. Modular devices 2a to 2 m located in the same operating room can also be coupled to a network switch 209. The network switch 209 can be attached to the central network controller 207 and / or to the network router 211 to connect - connect devices 2a to 2 m to cloud 204. The data associated with devices 2a to 2n can be transferred to cloud 204 through network router 211 for data processing and manipulation. The data associated with devices 2a to 2 m can also be transferred to the local computer system 210 for processing and manipulation of the local data.

[0414] It will be understood that the surgical data network 201 can be expanded by interconnecting multiple central network controllers 207 and / or multiple network switches 209 with multiple network routers 211. The central controller of modular communication

203 can be contained in a modular control tower configured to receive multiple devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m. The local computer system 210 can also be contained in a modular control tower. The central modular communication controller 203 is connected to a screen 212 to display the images obtained by some of the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m, for example, during surgical procedures. In several respects, devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m may include, for example, several modules, such as an imaging module 138 coupled to an endoscope, a generator module 140 coupled to an energy-based surgical device, a module smoke evacuation system 126, a suction / irrigation module 128, a communication module 130, a processor module 132, a storage matrix 134, a surgical device attached to a screen, and / or a non-contact sensor module, among other modular devices that can be connected to the modular communication central controller 203 of the surgical data network 201.

[0415] In one aspect, the surgical data network 201 may comprise a combination of one or more central network controllers, network switches and network routers that connect devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m to the cloud. Any or all of the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m coupled to the central network controller or network switch can collect data in real time and transfer the data to cloud computers for data processing and manipulation . It will be understood that cloud computing depends on sharing computing resources instead of having local servers or personal devices to handle software applications. The word "cloud" can be used as a metaphor for "the Internet", although the term is not limited as such. Consequently, the term "cloud computing" can be used here to refer to "a type of Internet-based computing", in which different services - such as servers, storage, and applications - are applied to the communication hub. modular 203 and / or computer system 210 located in the operating room (for example, a fixed, mobile, temporary, or operating room or operating space) and devices connected to the 203 and / or modular communication hub to computer system 210 over the Internet. The cloud infrastructure can be maintained by a cloud service provider. In this context, the cloud service provider may be the entity that coordinates the use and control of devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m located in one or more operating rooms. Cloud computing services can perform a large number of calculations based on data collected by smart surgical instruments, robots, and other computerized devices located in the operating room. The hub's hardware allows multiple devices or connections to be connected to a computer that communicates with cloud computing and storage resources.

[0416] The application of cloud computer data processing techniques to data collected by devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m, the surgical data network provides better surgical results, reduced costs, and better patient satisfaction. At least some of the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m can be used to view tissue conditions to assess the occurrence of leaks or perfusion of sealed tissue after a tissue sealing and cutting procedure. At least some of the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m can be used to identify the pathology, such as the effects of disease, with the use of cloud-based computing to examine data including images of body tissue samples for diagnostic purposes. diagnosis. This includes confirmation of the location and margin of the tissue and phenotypes. At least some of the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m can be used to identify anatomical structures of the body using a variety of sensors integrated with imaging devices and techniques such as overlaying images captured by multiple imaging devices . Data collected by devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m, including image data, can be transferred to the cloud 204 or the local computer system 210 or both for data processing and manipulation including data processing and manipulation. Image. The data can be analyzed to improve the results of the surgical procedure by determining whether additional treatment, such as the application of endoscopic intervention, emerging technologies, targeted radiation, targeted intervention, precise robotics at specific sites and conditions of fabric, can be followed. This data analysis can additionally use analytical processing of the results, and with the use of standardized approaches they can provide beneficial standardized feedback both to confirm surgical treatments and the surgeon's behavior or to suggest modifications to surgical treatments and the behavior of the surgeon. surgeon.

[0417] In an implementation, operating room devices 1a to 1n can be connected to the modular communication hub 203 via a wired channel or a wireless channel depending on the configuration of devices 1a to 1n on a network hub. network. The network hub 207 can be implemented, in one aspect, as a local network transmission device that acts on the physical layer of the OSI model ("open system interconnection"). The network hub provides connectivity to devices 1a to 1n located on the same network as the operating room. Network hub 207 collects data in the form of packets and sends it to the router in half - duplex mode. The central network controller 207 does not store any media access control / Internet protocol (MAC / IP) to transfer data from the device. Only one of the devices 1a to 1n at a time can send data through the network hub 207. The central network controller 207 has no routing tables or intelligence as to where to send information and transmits all network data through each connection and to a remote server 213 (Figure 47) in the cloud 204. Network hub 207 can detect basic network errors, such as collisions, but having all (admit that) information transmitted to multiple input ports can be a security risk and cause strangulations.

[0418] In another implementation, operating room devices 2a to 2 m can be connected to a network switch 209 via a wired or wireless channel. The network switch 209 works on the data connection layer of the OSI model. The network switch 209 is a multicast device for connecting devices 2a to 2 m in the same operating center to the network. The network switch 209 sends data in frame form to the network router 211 and works in full bidirectional mode. Multiple devices 2a to 2 m can send data at the same time via the network switch 209. The network switch 209 stores and uses MAC addresses of devices 2a to 2 m to transfer data.

[0419] The central network controller 207 and / or the network switch 209 are coupled to network router 211 to obtain connection to cloud 204. Network router 211 works at the network layer of the OSI model. The network router 211 creates a route to transmit data packets received from the central network controller 207 and / or from the network switch 211 to a computer with cloud resources for future processing and manipulation of the data collected by anyone among, or all devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m. Network router 211 can be used to connect two or more different networks located in different locations

different operators, such as different operating rooms in the same health care facility or different networks located in different operating rooms in different health care facilities. The network router 211 sends data in the form of packets to the cloud 204 and works in full duplex mode. Multiple devices can send data at the same time. The network router 211 uses IP addresses to transfer data.

[0420] In one example, the network hub 207 can be implemented as a USB hub, which allows multiple USB devices to be connected to a host computer. The USB hub can expand a single USB port on multiple levels so that more ports are available to connect the devices to the system's host computer. The 207 network hub can include wired or wireless capabilities to receive information about a wired channel or a wireless channel. In one aspect, a wireless wireless, broadband and short-range wireless USB communication protocol can be used for communication between devices 1a to 1n and devices 2a to 2 m located in the operating room .

[0421] In other examples, devices in the operating room 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m can communicate with the modular communication hub 203 via standard Bluetooth wireless technology for exchanging data over short distances (with the use of short-wavelength UHF radio waves in the ISM band of 2.4 to 2.485 GHz) from fixed and mobile devices and build personal area networks (PANs, "personal area networks"). In other respects, operating room devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m can communicate with the modular communication hub 203 through a number of wireless and wired communication standards or protocols, including, but not limited to, limited to, Wi-Fi (IEEE 802.11 family), WiMAX (IEEE 802.16 family), IEEE 802.20, long-term evolution (LTE, "long-term evolution"), and Ev-DO, HSPA +,

HSDPA +, HSUPA +, EDGE, GSM, GPRS, CDMA, TDMA, DECT, and Ethernet derivatives thereof, as well as any other wireless and wired protocols that are designated as 3G, 4G, 5G, and beyond. The computing module can include a plurality of communication modules. For example, a first communication module can be dedicated to short-range wireless communications like Wi-Fi and Bluetooth, and a second communication module can be dedicated to longer-range wireless communications like GPS, EDGE , GPRS, CDMA, WiMAX, LTE, Ev-DO, and others.

[0422] The modular communication hub 203 can serve as a central connection for one or all of the operating room devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m and handles a data type known as frames. The tables carry the data generated by the devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2m. When a frame is received by the modular communication hub 203, it is amplified and transmitted to network router 211, which transfers data to cloud computing resources using a series of wireless communication standards or protocols or with wire, as described in the present invention.

[0423] The modular communication central controller 203 can be used as a standalone device or be connected to compatible central network controllers and network switches to form a larger network. The modular communication hub 203 is, in general, easy to install, configure and maintain, making it a good option for the network of devices 1a to 1n / 2a to 2 m from the operating room.

[0424] Figure 47 illustrates an interactive surgical system implemented by computer 200. The interactive surgical system implemented by computer 200 is similar in many ways to the interactive surgical system, implemented by computer 100. For example, the interactive surgical system, computer implemented 200 includes one or more surgical systems 202, which are similar in many respects to surgical systems 102. Each surgical system 202 includes at least one central surgical controller 206 communicating with a cloud 204 which may include a remote server 213. In In one aspect, the computer-implemented interactive surgical system 200 comprises a modular control tower 236 connected to multiple operating room devices such as, for example, smart surgical instruments, robots and other computerized devices located in the operating room.

As shown in Figure 48, modular control tower 236 comprises a central modular communication controller 203 coupled to a computer system 210. As shown in the example in Figure 47, modular control tower 236 is coupled to a control module. imaging 238 that is coupled to an endoscope 239, a generator module 240 that is coupled to a power device 241, a smoke evacuation module 226, a suction / irrigation module 228, a communication module 230, a module processor 232, storage array 234, smart device / instrument 235 optionally attached to screen 237, and non-contact sensor module 242. Operating room devices are coupled with cloud computing resources and data storage via the modular control tower 236. A robotic central controller 222 can also be connected to the modular control tower 236 and cloud computing resources.

Devices / Instruments 235, display systems 208, among others, can be coupled to the modular control tower 236 by means of wired or wireless communication standards or protocols, as described in the present invention.

The modular control tower 236 can be coupled to a central controller screen 215 (for example, monitor, screen) to display and overlay images received from the imaging module, device / instrument screen and / or other display systems 208. A The hub screen can also display data received from devices connected to the modular control tower in conjunction with images and overlapping images.

[0425] Figure 48 illustrates a central surgical controller 206 which comprises a plurality of modules coupled to the modular control tower 236. The modular control tower 236 comprises a central modular communication controller 203, for example a connectivity device of network, and a computer system 210 to provide local processing, visualization, and imaging, for example. As shown in Figure 48, the modular communication central controller 203 can be connected in a layered configuration to expand the number of modules (for example, devices) that can be connected to the modular communication central controller 203 and transfer data associated with modules for computer system 210, cloud computing resources, or both. As shown in Figure 48, each of the central controllers / network switches in the modular central communication controller 203 includes three downstream ports and one upstream port. The upstream central controller / network switch is connected to a processor to provide a communication connection with the cloud computing resources and a local display 217. Communication with the cloud 204 can be done via a communication channel wired or wireless.

[0426] The central surgical controller 206 employs a non-contact sensor module 242 to measure the dimensions of the operating room and generate a map of the operating room using non-contact measuring devices such as laser or ultrasonic. An ultrasound-based non-contact sensor module scans the operating room through the transmission of an ultrasound burst and echo reception when it bounces off the perimeter of the walls of an operating room, as described under the heading " Surgical Hub Spatial Awareness

Within an Operating Room "in US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 611,341, entitled" INTERACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM ", filed on December 28, 2017, whose description is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, in which the sensor module is configured to determine the size of the operating room and adjust the distance limits for Bluetooth pairing.A laser-based non-contact sensor module scans the operating room by transmitting pulses of laser light, receiving pulses of laser light that jump from the perimeter walls of the operating room, and comparing the phase of the transmitted pulse to the received pulse to determine the size of the operating room and to adjust the pairing distance limits with Bluetooth, for example.

[0427] Computer system 210 comprises a processor 244 and a network interface 245. Processor 244 is coupled to a communication module 247, storage 248, memory 249, non-volatile memory 250, and an input / output interface 251 via a system bus. The system bus can be any of several types of bus structures, including the memory bus or memory controller, a peripheral bus or external bus, and / or a local bus that uses any variety of available bus architectures including , but not limited to, 9-bit bus, industry standard architecture (ISA), Micro-Charmel Architecture (MSA), Extended ISA (EISA), Smart Drive Electronics (IDE), VESA Local Bus (VLB) , Interconnection of peripheral components (PCI), USB, accelerated graphics port (AGP), PCMCIA bus (International association of memory cards for personal computers, "Personal Computer Memory Card International Association"), Interface of small computer systems (SCSI), or any other proprietary bus.

[0428] Processor 244 can be any single-core or multi-core processor, such as those known under the trade name ARM Cortex available from Texas Instruments. In one aspect, the processor can be a Core Cortex-M4F LM4F230H5QR ARM processor, available from Texas Instruments, for example, which comprises a 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a seek-ahead buffer to optimize performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), an internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with the StellarisWare® program, memory 2 KB electrically erasable programmable read-only (EEPROM), one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more analog quadrature encoder (QEI) inputs, one or more analog to digital converters ( 12-bit ADC) with 12 analog input channels, details of which are available for the product data sheet.

[0429] In one aspect, processor 244 may comprise a safety controller that comprises two controller-based families, such as TMS570 and RM4x, known under the tradename Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also available from Texas Instruments. The safety controller can be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while providing scalable performance, connectivity and memory options.

[0430] System memory includes volatile and non-volatile memory. The basic input / output system (BIOS), containing the basic routines for transferring information between elements within the computer system, such as during startup, is stored in non-volatile memory. For example, non-volatile memory can include ROM, programmable ROM (PROM), electrically programmable ROM (EPROM), EE-PROM or flash memory. Volatile memory includes random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache memory. In addition, RAM is available in many forms such as SRAM, dynamic RAM (DRAM), synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), double data rate SDRAM (DDR SDRAM), enhanced SDRAM (ESDRAM), Synchlink DRAM (SLDRAM), and direct RAM Rambus RAM (DRRAM).

[0431] Computer system 210 also includes removable / non-removable, volatile / non-volatile computer storage media, such as disk storage. Disk storage includes, but is not limited to, devices such as a magnetic disk drive, floppy disk drive, tape drive, Jaz drive, Zip drive, LS-60 drive, flash memory card or memory stick ( pen drive). In addition, the storage disc may include storage media separately or in combination with other storage media including, but not limited to, an optical disc drive such as a compact disc ROM (CD-ROM) drive. recordable compact disc (CD-R Drive), rewritable compact disc drive (CD-RW drive), or a versatile digital disk ROM drive (DVD-ROM). To facilitate the connection of disk storage devices to the system bus, a removable or non-removable interface can be used.

[0432] It is to be understood that computer system 210 includes software that acts as an intermediary between users and the basic computer resources described in an adequate operating environment. Such software includes an operating system. The operating system, which can be stored on disk storage, acts to control and allocate computer system resources. System applications benefit from the management capabilities of the operating system through program modules and program data stored in the system's memory or storage disk. It is to be understood that the various components described in the present invention can be implemented with various operating systems or combinations of operating systems.

[0433] A user enters commands or information into the computer system 210 through the input device (s) coupled to the I / O interface 251. Input devices include, but are not limited to, a pointing device such as a mouse, trackball, stylus, keyboard, keyboard, microphone, joystick, game pad, satellite card, scanner, TV tuner card, digital camera, digital video camera, web camera, and the like . These and other input devices connect to the processor via the system bus via the interface port (s). The interface ports include, for example, a serial port, a parallel port, a game port and a USB. Output devices use some of the same types of ports as input devices. In this way, for example, a USB port can be used to provide input to the computer system and to provide computer system information to an output device. An output adapter is provided to illustrate that there are some output devices such as monitors, screens, speakers, and printers, among other output devices, that need special adapters. Output adapters include, by way of illustration and not limitation, video and sound cards that provide a means of connection between the output device and the system bus. It should be noted that other devices and / or device systems, such as remote computers, provide input and output capabilities.

[0434] Computer system 210 can operate in a networked environment using logical connections to one or more remote computers, such as cloud computers, or local computers.

Remote cloud computers can be a personal computer, server, router, personal network computer, workstation, microprocessor-based device, peer device, or other common network node, and the like, and typically include many or all elements described in relation to the computer system. For the sake of brevity, only one memory storage device is illustrated with the remote computer. Remote computers are logically connected to the computer system via a network interface and then physically connected via a communication connection. The network interface covers communication networks such as local area networks (LANs) and wide area networks (WANs). LAN technologies include fiber distributed data interface (FDDI), copper distributed data interface (CDDI), Ethernet / IEEE 802.3, Token ring / IEEE 802.5 and the like. WAN technologies include, but are not limited to, point-to-point links, circuit switched networks such as integrated services digital networks (ISDN - "Integrated Services Digital Networks") and variations in them, packet switched networks and digital subscriber lines (DSL - "Digital Subscriber Lines").

[0435] In several respects, the computer system 210 of Figure 48, the imaging module 238 and / or the visualization system 208 of Figure 48, and / or the processor module 232 of Figures 47 and 48, can comprise an image processor, an image processing engine, a media processor or any specialized digital signal processor (DSP) used for the processing of digital images. The image processor can employ parallel computing with single multi-data instruction (SIMD) or multiple multi-data instruction (MIMD) technologies to increase speed and efficiency. The digital image processing engine can perform a number of tasks. The image processor can be an integrated circuit system with a multi-core processor architecture.

[0436] Communication connections refer to the hardware / software used to connect the network interface to the bus. Although the communication connection is shown for illustrative clarity within the computer system, it can also be external to the computer system 210. The hardware / software required for connection to the network interface includes, for purposes only illustrative, internal and external technologies such as modems, including regular telephone series modems, cable modems and DSL modems, ISDN adapters and Ethernet cards.

[0437] Figure 49 illustrates a functional block diagram of an aspect of a USB 300 central network controller device, in accordance with an aspect of the present description. In the illustrated aspect, the USB 300 network central controller device uses a TUSB2036 integrated circuit central controller available from Texas Instruments. The central USB network controller 300 is a CMOS device that provides one USB transceiver port 302 and up to three USB transceiver ports downstream 304, 306, 308, in accordance with the USB 2.0 specification. Upstream USB transceiver port 302 is a differential data root port comprising a "minus" (DM0) differential data input paired with a "plus" (DP0) differential data input. The three ports of the downstream USB transceiver 304, 306, 308 are differential data ports, with each port including "more" different data outputs (DP1-DP3) paired with "less" different data outputs (DM1- DM3).

[0438] The USB 300 central network controller device is implemented with a digital state machine instead of a microcontroller, and no firmware programming is required. Fully compatible USB transceivers are integrated into the circuit for the upstream USB transceiver port 302 and all the downstream USB transceiver ports 304, 306, 308. The downstream USB transceiver ports 304, 306, 308 support both full speed and low speed devices automatically configuring the scan rate according to the speed of the device attached to the doors. The USB 300 network central controller device can be configured in bus powered or self powered mode, and includes 312 central controller power logic to manage power.

[0439] The USB 300 central network controller device includes a 310 serial interface engine (SIE). The SIE 310 is the hardware front end of the USB 300 central network controller and handles most of the protocol described in chapter 8 of the USB specification. SIE 310 typically comprises signaling down to the transaction level. The functions it handles could include: package recognition, transaction sequencing, SOP, EOP, RESET, and RESUME signal detection / generation, clock / data separation, non-zero data encoding / decoding inverted (NRZI), generation and verification of CRC (token and data), generation and verification / decoding of packet ID (PID), and / or series-parallel / parallel-series conversion. The 310 receives a clock input 314 and is coupled with a suspend / resume logic, a frame timer circuit 316 and a repeat circuit of the central controller 318 to control communication between the upstream USB transceiver port 302 and the USB transceiver ports downstream 304, 306, 308 through the logic circuits of ports 320, 322, 324. The SIE 310 is coupled to a command decoder 326 through the logic interface to control the commands of an EEPROM in series via a 330 series EEPROM interface.

[0440] In several aspects, the USB 300 central network controller can connect 127 functions configured in up to six layers (levels)

logic to a single computer. In addition, the USB 300 central network controller can connect all peripherals using a standardized four-wire cable that provides both communication and power distribution. The power settings are bus-powered and self-powered modes. The USB 300 central network controller can be configured to support four power management modes: a central bus-powered controller, or with individual port power management or with grouped port power management, and the controller self-powered central, either with individual door power management or with grouped door power management. In one aspect, using a USB cable, the USB network hub 300, the USB transceiver port 302 is plugged into a USB host controller, and the USB transceiver ports downstream 304, 306, 308 are exposed to connect compatible USB devices, and so on. Surgical instrument hardware

[0441] Figure 50 illustrates a logic diagram of a module of a 470 control system of a surgical instrument or tool, according to one or more aspects of the present description. The 470 system comprises a control circuit. The control circuit includes a microcontroller 461 comprising a processor 462 and memory 468. One or more of the sensors 472, 474, 476, for example, provide real-time feedback to the processor 462. A 482 engine, driven by a motor drive 492, it operationally couples a longitudinally movable displacement member to drive the beam element with an I-profile beam. A tracking system 480 is configured to determine the position of the longitudinally movable displacement member. Position information is provided to the 462 processor, which can be programmed or configured to determine the position of the longitudinally movable drive member, as well as the position of a firing member, firing bar and beam beam element with I-shaped profile. Additional motors can be supplied at the instrument driver interface to control the firing of the I-beam, the displacement of the closing tube, the rotation of the drive shaft and the articulation. A 473 screen displays a variety of instrument operating conditions and can include touchscreen functionality for data entry. The information displayed on screen 473 can be overlaid with images captured using endoscopic imaging modules.

[0442] In one aspect, the 461 microcontroller can be any single-core or multi-core processor, such as those known under the ARM Cortex trade name available from Texas Instruments. In one aspect, the 461 main microcontroller may be an LM4F230H5QR ARM Cortex-M4F processor, available from Texas Instruments, for example, which comprises a 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a seek-ahead buffer to optimize performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single cycle random access memory (SRAM), an internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with the StellarisWare® program, 2 KB electronically programmable and erasable read-only memory (EEPROM), one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more quadrature encoder (QEI) input analogues, and / or one or more 12-bit analog to digital converters (ADC) with 12 analog input channels, details of which are available for the product data sheet.

[0443] In one aspect, the 461 microcontroller can comprise a safety controller that comprises two families based on controllers, such as TMS570 and RM4x known under the trade name of Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also available from Texas Instruments. The safety controller can be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while providing scalable performance, connectivity and memory options.

[0444] The 461 microcontroller can be programmed to perform various functions, such as precise control of the speed and position of the joint and knife systems. In one aspect, the microcontroller 461 includes a processor 462 and a memory 468. The electric motor 482 can be a brushed direct current (DC) motor with a gearbox and mechanical connections with an articulation or scalpel system. In one aspect, a motor drive 492 can be an A3941 available from Allegro Microsystems, Inc. Other motor drives can be readily replaced for use in tracking system 480 which comprises an absolute positioning system. A detailed description of an absolute positioning system is made in US Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0296213, entitled "SYS-

TEMS AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A SURGICAL STAPLING AND CUTTING INSTRUMENT ", which was published on October 19, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0445] The 461 microcontroller can be programmed to provide precise control of the speed and position of the displacement members and articulation systems. The 461 microcontroller can be configured to compute a response in the 461 microcontroller software. The computed response is compared to a measured response from the real system to obtain an "observed" response, which is used for actual feedback-based decisions. The observed response is a favorable and adjusted value, which balances the uniform and continuous nature of the simulated response with the measured response, which can detect external influences in the system.

[0446] In one aspect, the 482 motor can be controlled by the 492 motor starter and can be used by the instrument's trigger system or surgical tool. In many ways, the 482 motor can be a brushed direct current (DC) drive motor, with a maximum speed of approximately 25,000 RPM, for example. In other arrangements, the 482 motor may include a brushless motor, a wireless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor or any other suitable type of electric motor. The motor drive 492 can comprise an H bridge drive that comprises field effect transistors (FETs), for example. The 482 motor can be powered by a feed set releasably mounted on the handle set or tool compartment to provide control power for the instrument or surgical tool. The power pack may comprise a battery that may include several battery cells connected in series, which can be used as the power source to energize the instrument or surgical tool. In certain circumstances, the battery cells in the power pack may be replaceable and / or rechargeable. In at least one example, the battery cells can be lithium ion batteries that can be coupled and separable from the power supply.

[0447] The 492 motor drive can be an A3941, available from Allegro Microsystems, Inc. The 492 A3941 drive is an entire bridge controller for use with semiconductor metal oxide field effect transistors (MOSFET). external power, N channel, specifically designed for inductive loads, such as brushed DC motors. The 492 actuator comprises a single charge pump regulator that provides full door drive (> 10 V) for batteries with voltage up to 7 V and allows the A3941 to operate with a reduced door drive, up to 5.5 V. A capacitor input control can be used to supply the voltage surpassing that supplied by the battery required for N channel MOSFETs. An internal charge pump for the drive on the upper side allows operation in direct current (100% duty cycle ). The entire bridge can be triggered in fast or slow drop modes using diodes or synchronized rectification. In the slow drop mode, the current can be recirculated by means of FET from the top or from the bottom. The energy FETs are protected from the shoot-through effect through programmable dead-time resistors. Integrated diagnostics provide indication of undervoltage, overtemperature and faults in the power bridge and can be configured to protect power MOSFETs in most short-circuit conditions. Other motor drives can be readily replaced for use in the 480 tracking system comprising an absolute positioning system.

[0448] Tracking system 480 comprises a controlled motor drive circuit arrangement comprising a position sensor 472 in accordance with an aspect of the present description. The position sensor 472 for an absolute positioning system provides a unique position signal that corresponds to the location of a displacement member. In one aspect, the displacement member represents a longitudinally movable drive member comprising a rack of drive teeth for engaging with a corresponding drive gear of a gear reduction assembly. In other respects, the displacement member represents the firing member, which can be adapted and configured to include a rack of drive teeth. In yet another aspect, the displacement member represents the firing bar or I-shaped beam, each of which can be adapted and configured to include a rack of drive teeth.

Consequently, as used in the present invention, the term "displacement member" is generally used to refer to any movable member of the instrument or surgical tool, such as the drive member, the firing member, the bar firing beam, the I-profile beam, or any element that can be moved.

In one aspect, the longitudinally movable drive member is coupled to the firing member, the firing bar and the I-beam.

Consequently, the absolute positioning system can, in effect, track the linear displacement of the I-profile beam by tracking the linear displacement of the longitudinally movable drive member.

In several other respects, the displacement member can be coupled with any 472 position sensor suitable for measuring linear displacement.

In this way, the longitudinally movable drive member, the firing member, the firing bar or the I-beam, or combinations thereof, can be coupled to any suitable linear displacement sensor.

Linear displacement sensors can include contact or non-contact displacement sensors.

Linear displacement sensors can comprise Variable Differential Linear Transformers (LVDT), Variable Reluctance Differential Transducers (DVRT), a potentiometer, a magnetic detection system comprising a moving magnet and a series linearly arranged in Hall Effect Sensors , a magnetic detection system that includes a fixed magnet and a series of furniture, linearly arranged in Hall Effect Sensors, a mobile optical detection system that comprises a mobile light source and a series of photodiodes or photodetectors. linearly arranged sensors, an optical detection system comprising

it has a fixed light source and a mobile series of linearly arranged photodiodes or photodetectors, or any combination thereof.

[0449] The 482 electric motor may include a rotary drive shaft, which interfaces operationally with a gear set, which is mounted on a coupling hitch with a set or rack of driving teeth on the drive member. A sensor element can be operationally coupled to a gear assembly so that a single revolution of the position sensor element 472 corresponds to some linear longitudinal translation of the displacement member. An array of gears and sensors can be connected to the linear actuator by means of a rack and pinion arrangement, or by a rotary actuator, by means of a gear wheel or other connection. A power supply provides power to the absolute positioning system and an output indicator can display the output from the absolute positioning system. The drive member represents the longitudinally movable drive member which comprises a drive tooth rack formed thereon for engagement with a corresponding drive gear of the gear reducer assembly. The displacement member represents the longitudinally movable firing member, the firing bar, the I-beam or combinations thereof.

[0450] A single revolution of the sensor element associated with the position sensor 472 is equivalent to a longitudinal linear displacement d1 of the displacement member, where d1 represents the longitudinal linear distance that the displacement member moves from point "a" to point "b" after a single revolution of the sensor element coupled to the displacement member. The sensor arrangement can be connected by means of a gear reduction which results in the position sensor 472 completing one or more revolutions for the complete travel of the displacement member. The 472 position sensor can complete multiple revolutions for the full travel of the displacement member.

[0451] A series of keys, where n is an integer greater than one, can be used alone or in combination with a gear reduction to provide a single position signal for more than one revolution of the 472 position sensor. of the switches is transmitted back to microcontroller 461 which applies logic to determine a single position signal corresponding to the longitudinal linear displacement d1 + d2 +… dn of the displacement member. The output of the position sensor 472 is supplied to the microcontroller 461. In several embodiments, the position sensor 472 of the sensor arrangement may comprise a magnetic sensor, an analog rotary sensor, such as a potentiometer, or a series of analog Hall effect elements. , which emit a unique combination of position of signs or values.

[0452] The position sensor 472 can comprise any number of magnetic detection elements, such as, for example, magnetic sensors classified according to whether they measure the total magnetic field or the vector components of the magnetic field. The techniques used to produce both types of magnetic sensors cover many aspects of physics and electronics. Technologies used for magnetic field detection include flow meter, saturated flow, optical pumping, nuclear precession, SQUID, Hall effect, anisotropic magnetoresistance, giant magnetoresistance, magnetic tunnel junctions, giant magnetoimpedance, magnetostrictive / piesoelectric compounds, magnetodiode, magnetic transistors, fiber optics, magneto-optics and magnetic sensors based on microelectromechanical systems, among others.

[0453] In one aspect, the position sensor 472 for the tracking system 480 which comprises an absolute positioning system

mourning comprises an absolute rotating magnetic positioning system. The 472 position sensor can be implemented as an AS5055EQFT single-circuit magnetic rotary position sensor, available from Austria Microsystems, AG. The position sensor 472 interfaces with the 461 microcontroller to provide an absolute positioning system. The 472 position sensor is a low voltage, low power component and includes four effect elements in an area of the 472 position sensor located above a magnet. A high-resolution ADC and an intelligent power management controller are also provided on the integrated circuit. A CORDIC processor (digital computer for coordinate rotation), also known as the digit by digit method and Volder algorithm, is provided to implement a simple and efficient algorithm for calculating hyperbolic and trigonometric functions that require only addition, sub operations - traction, bit shift and lookup table. The angle position, alarm bits and magnetic field information are transmitted via a standard serial communication interface, such as a serial peripheral interface (SPI), to the 461 microcontroller. The 472 position sensor provides 12 or 14 bits of resolution. The position sensor 472 can be an AS5055 integrated circuit supplied in a small 16-pin QFN package of 4x4x0.85 mm.

[0454] Tracking system 480 comprising an absolute positioning system can comprise and / or be programmed to implement a feedback controller, such as a PID, state feedback, and adaptive controller. A power supply converts the signal from the feedback controller to a physical input to the system, in this case the voltage. Other examples include a voltage, current and force PWM. Other sensors can be provided in order to measure the parameters of the physical system in addition to the position measured by the position sensor 472. In some respects, the other one or more sensors may include sensor arrangements as described in US patent n ° 9,345,481, entitled "STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THI-CKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM", granted on May 24, 2016, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety; US Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263552, entitled "STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM", which was published on September 18, 2014, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety; and US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 628,175, entitled "TECHNIQUES FOR ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF MOTOR VE- LOCITY OF A SURGICAL STAPLING AND CUTTING INSTRUMENT", filed on June 20, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In a digital signal processing system, an absolute positioning system is coupled with a digital data capture system where the output of the absolute positioning system will have a finite resolution and sampling frequency. The absolute positioning system can comprise a comparison and combination circuit to combine a combined response with a measured response using algorithms, such as a weighted average and a theoretical control loop, that trigger the calculated response in the direction to the measured response. The computed response of the physical system considers properties, such as mass, inertia, viscous friction, resistance to inductance, etc., to predict what the states and exits of the physical system will be, knowing the input.

[0455] The absolute positioning system provides an absolute positioning of the displaced member on the activation of the instrument without having to retract or advance the longitudinally movable driving member to the restart position (zero or initial ), as may be required by conventional rotary encoders that merely count the number of progressive or re-

the 482 engine has traveled to infer the position of a device actuator, actuation bar, scalpel, and the like.

[0456] A 474 sensor, such as a strain gauge or a micro strain gauge, is configured to measure one or more parameters of the end actuator, such as the extent of the strain on the anvil during a gripping operation, which can be indicative of tissue compression. The measured effort is converted into a digital signal and supplied to the 462 processor. Alternatively, or in addition to the 474 sensor, a 476 sensor, such as a load sensor, can measure the closing force applied by the closure system by the anvil. The 476 sensor, such as a load sensor, can measure the firing force applied to a beam with an I-profile in a firing stroke of the tool or surgical instrument. The i-profile beam is configured to engage a wedge slider, which is configured to move the clamp drivers upward to force the clamps to deform in contact with an anvil. The i-profile beam includes a sharp cutting edge that can be used to separate fabric, as the i-profile beam is advanced distally by the firing bar. Alternatively, a 478 current sensor can be used to measure the current drained by the motor

482. The force required to fire the displacement member can correspond to the current drained by the 482 motor, for example. The measured force is converted into a digital signal and supplied to the 462 processor.

[0457] In one form, a 474 strain gauge sensor can be used to measure the force applied to the tissue by the end actuator. A strain gauge can be attached to the end actuator to measure the force applied to the tissue being treated by the end actuator. A system for measuring forces applied to the tissue attached by the end actuator comprises a 474 strain gauge sensor, such as, for example, a microstrain gauge, which is configured to measure one or more parameters of the end actuator, for example. In one aspect, the 474 strain gauge sensor can measure the amplitude or magnitude of the mechanical stress exerted on a claw member of an end actuator during a gripping operation, which may be indicative of tissue compression . The measured effort is converted into a digital signal and supplied to the 462 processor of a 461 microcontroller. A load sensor 476 can measure the force used to operate the knife element, for example, to cut the captured tissue between the anvil and the staple cartridge. A magnetic field sensor can be used to measure the thickness of the captured tissue. The measurement of the magnetic field sensor can also be converted into a digital signal and supplied to the 462 processor.

[0458] Measurements of tissue compression, tissue thickness and / or the force required to close the end actuator on the tissue, as measured by sensors 474, 476 respectively, can be used by microcontroller 461 to characterize the selected position of the trigger member and / or the corresponding trigger member speed value. In one case, a memory 468 can store a technique, an equation and / or a look-up table that can be used by the 461 microcontroller in the evaluation.

[0459] The control system 470 of the instrument or surgical tool can also comprise wired or wireless communication circuits for communication with the central modular communication controller shown in Figure 50.

[0460] Figure 51 illustrates a control circuit 500 configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool according to an aspect of the present description. The control circuit 500 can be configured to implement various processes described herein. The control circuit 500 may comprise a microcontroller that comprises one or more processors 502 (for example, microprocessor, microcontroller) coupled to at least one memory circuit 504. The memory circuit 504 stores instructions executable on the machine which, when executed by processor 502, cause processor 502 to execute machine instructions to implement several of the processes described here. The 502 processor can be any one of a number of single-core or multi-core processors known in the art. The memory circuit 504 may comprise volatile and non-volatile storage media. The processor 502 can include an instruction processing unit 506 and an arithmetic unit 508. The instruction processing unit can be configured to receive instructions from the memory circuit 504 of the present description.

[0461] Figure 52 illustrates a combinational logic circuit 510 configured to control aspects of the instrument or surgical tool according to an aspect of the present description. The combinational logic circuit 510 can be configured to implement the various processes described here. The combinational logic circuit 510 may comprise a finite state machine comprising a combinational logic 512 configured to receive data associated with the instrument or surgical tool at an input 514, process the data by combinational logic 512 and provide an output 516.

[0462] Figure 53 illustrates a sequential logic circuit 520 configured to control aspects of the surgical instrument or tool according to an aspect of the present description. Sequential logic circuit 520 or combinational logic 522 can be configured to implement the process described here. Sequential logic circuit 520 may comprise a finite state machine. Sequential logic circuit 520 may comprise combinational logic 522, at least one memory circuit 524, a clock 529 and, for example. The at least one memory circuit 524 can store a current state of the finite state machine. In certain cases, the sequential logic circuit 520 may be synchronous or asynchronous. Combinational logic 522 is configured to receive data associated with the instrument or surgical tool from an input 526, process the data using combinational logic 522, and provide an output 528. In other respects, the circuit may comprise a combination of a processor ( for example, processor 502, Figure 51) and a finite state machine to implement various processes of the present invention. In other respects, the finite state machine may comprise a combination of a combinational logic circuit (for example, a combinational logic circuit 510, Figure 52) and the sequential logic circuit 520.

[0463] Figure 54 illustrates an instrument or surgical tool that comprises a plurality of motors, which can be activated to perform various functions. In certain cases, a first engine can be activated to perform a first function, a second engine can be activated to perform a second function, a third engine can be activated to perform a third function, a fourth engine can be activated to perform a fourth function, and so on. In certain cases, the plurality of motors of the robotic surgical instrument 600 can be individually activated to cause triggering, closing, and / or articulation movements on the end actuator. The firing, closing and / or articulation movements can be transmitted to the end actuator through a set of drive axes, for example.

[0464] In certain cases, the instrument or surgical tool system may include a 602 firing motor. The 602 firing motor can be operationally coupled to a 604 firing motor drive assembly, which can be configured to transmitting firing movements generated by the 602 motor to the end actuator, particularly to move the beam element with an I-profile. In certain cases, the firing movements generated by the firing motor 602 can cause the clamps to be positioned from the staple cartridge in the fabric captured by the end actuator and / or the cutting edge of the I-beam beam element to be advanced in order to cut the captured fabric, for example. The beam element with an I-profile can be retracted by reversing the direction of the motor

602.

[0465] In certain cases, the surgical instrument or tool may include a closing motor 603. The closing motor 603 can be operationally coupled to a drive assembly of the closing motor 605 that can be configured to transmit closing movements generated by the 603 motor to the end actuator, particularly to move a closing tube to close the anvil and compress the fabric between the anvil and the staple cartridge. Closing movements can cause the end actuator to transition from an open configuration to an approximate configuration to capture tissue, for example. The end actuator can be moved to an open position by reversing the motor direction

603.

[0466] In certain cases, the surgical instrument or tool may include one or more articulation motors 606a, 606b, for example. The motors 606a, 606b can be operationally coupled to the drive assemblies of the articulation motor 608a, 608b, which can be configured to transmit articulation movements generated by the motors 606a, 606b to the end actuator. In certain cases, articulation movements can cause the end actuator to be articulated in relation to the drive shaft assembly, for example.

[0467] As described above, the surgical instrument or tool can include a plurality of motors that can be configured to perform various independent functions. In certain cases, the plurality of motors of the instrument or surgical tool can be activated individually or separately to perform one or more functions, while other motors remain inactive. For example, the articulation motors 606a, 606b can be activated to cause the end actuator to be articulated, while the firing motor 602 remains inactive. Alternatively, the firing motor 602 can be activated to fire the plurality of clamps, and / or advance the cutting edge, while the articulation motor 606 remains inactive. In addition, the closing motor 603 can be activated simultaneously with the firing motor 602 to cause the closing tube and the I-beam beam element to move distally, as described in more detail later in this document.

[0468] In certain cases, the surgical instrument or tool may include a common control module 610 that can be used with a plurality of the instrument's instruments or surgical tool. In some cases, the common control module 610 can accommodate one of the plurality of motors at a time. For example, the common control module 610 can be coupled to and separable from the plurality of motors of the robotic surgical instrument individually. In certain cases, a plurality of surgical instrument or tool motors may share one or more common control modules, such as the common control module 610. In certain cases, a plurality of surgical instrument or tool motors may be individually and selectively coupled to the common control module 610. In certain cases, the common control module 610 can be selectively switched between interfacing with one of a plurality of instrument motors or surgical tool to interface with another among the plurality of instrument motors or surgical tool.

[0469] In at least one example, the common control module 610 can be selectively switched between the operating coupling with the hinge motors 606a, 606B, and the operating coupling with the firing motor 602 or the closing motor 603 In at least one example, as shown in Figure 54, a key 614 can be moved or moved between a plurality of positions and / or states. In the first position 616, the switch 614 can electrically couple the common control module 610 to the trip motor 602; in a second position 617, the switch 614 can electrically couple the control module 610 to the closing motor 603; in a third position 618a, the switch 614 can electrically couple the common control module 610 to the first articulation motor 606a; and in a fourth position 618b, the switch 614 can electrically couple the common control module 610 to the second articulation motor 606b, for example. In certain cases, separate common control modules 610 can be electrically coupled to the firing motor 602, closing motor 603, and hinge motors 606a, 606b at the same time. In certain cases, key 614 can be a mechanical key, an electromechanical key, a solid state key, or any suitable switching mechanism.

[0470] Each of the 602, 603, 606a, 606b motors can comprise a torque sensor to measure the output torque on the motor drive shaft. The force on an end actuator can be detected in any conventional manner, such as by means of force sensors on the outer sides of the jaws or by a motor torque sensor that drives the jaws.

[0471] In several cases, as shown in Figure 54, the common control module 610 can comprise a motor driver 626 that can comprise one or more H bridge FETs. The motor driver 626 can modulate the energy transmitted from a power supply 628 to a motor coupled to the common control module 610, based on an input from a microcontroller 620 (the "controller"), for example. In certain cases, microcontroller 620 can be used to determine the current drained by the motor, for example, while the motor is coupled to the common control module 610, as described above.

[0472] In certain examples, the microcontroller 620 may include a 622 microprocessor (the "processor") and one or more non-transitory computer-readable media or 624 memory units (the "memory"). In certain cases, memory 624 can store various program instructions which, when executed, can cause processor 622 to perform a plurality of functions and / or calculations described herein. In certain cases, one or more of the memory units 624 can be coupled to the processor 622, for example.

[0473] In certain cases, the power supply 628 can be used to supply power to the microcontroller 620, for example. In certain cases, the power source 628 may comprise a battery (or "battery pack" or "power source"), such as a Li ion battery, for example. In certain cases, the battery pack can be configured to be releasably mounted to the handle to supply power to the surgical instrument 600. Several battery cells connected in series can be used as the 628 power source. In certain cases, the power source 628 can be replaceable and / or rechargeable, for example.

[0474] In several cases, the 622 processor can control the motor drive 626 to control the position, direction of rotation and / or speed of a motor that is coupled to the common control module

610. In certain cases, processor 622 may signal the motor driver 626 to stop and / or disable a motor that is coupled to the common control module 610. It should be understood that the term "processor", as used here, includes any microprocessor, microcontroller or other suitable basic computing device that incorporates the functions of a central computer processing unit (CPU) into an integrated circuit or, at most, some integrated circuits. The processor is a programmable multipurpose device that accepts digital data as input, processes it according to instructions stored in its memory, and provides results as output. This is an example of sequential digital logic, as it has internal memory. Processors operate on numbers and symbols represented in the binary system of numerals.

[0475] In one example, the 622 processor can be any single-core or multi-core processor, such as those known by the Texas Instruments ARM Cortex trade name. In certain cases, the 620 microcontroller may be an LM 4F230H5QR, available from Texas Instruments, for example. In at least one example, the Texas Instruments LM4F230H5QR is an ARM Core-Tex-M4F processor core that comprises a 256 KB single cycle flash integrated memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a search buffer anticipated to optimize performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single cycle SRAM, an internal ROM loaded with the StellarisWare® software, 2 KB EEPROM, one or more PWM modules, one or more QEI analogs, one or more 12-bit ADCs with 12 channels of analog input, among other features that are readily available for the product data sheet. Other microcontrollers can be readily replaced for use with the 4410 module. Consequently, the present description should not be limited in this context.

[0476] In certain cases, memory 624 may include program instructions for controlling each of the motors of the surgical instrument 600 that are attachable to the common control module 610. For example, memory 624 may include program instructions for controlling the firing motor 602, the closing motor 603 and the hinge motors 606a, 606b. Such program instructions can cause the 622 processor to control the trigger, close, and link functions according to inputs from the instrument or surgical tool control algorithms or programs.

[0477] In certain cases, one or more mechanisms and / or sensors, such as 630 sensors, can be used to alert the 622 processor to program instructions that need to be used in a specific configuration. For example, sensors 630 can alert the 622 processor to use the program instructions associated with triggering, closing, and pivoting the end actuator. In certain cases, sensors 630 may comprise position sensors that can be used, for example, to detect the position of switch 614. Consequently, processor 622 can use the program instructions associated with firing the I-beam beam. the end actuator by detecting, through sensors 630, for example, that key 614 is in the first position 616; the processor 622 can use the program instructions associated with closing the anvil by detecting, through sensors 630, for example, that switch 614 is in second position 617; and the processor 622 can use the program instructions associated with the articulation of the end actuator upon detection through sensors 630, for example, that switch 614 is in the third or fourth position 618a, 618b.

[0478] Figure 55 is a schematic diagram of a robotic surgical instrument 700 configured to operate a surgical tool described herein, in accordance with an aspect of the present description. The robotic surgical instrument 700 can be programmed or configured to control the distal / proximal translation of a displacement member, the distal / proximal displacement of a closing tube, the rotation of the drive shaft, and articulation, either with a single type or multiple articulation drive links. In one aspect, the surgical instrument 700 can be programmed or configured to individually control a firing member, a closing member, a driving shaft member and / or one or more articulation members. Surgical instrument 700 comprises a control circuit 710 configured to control motor-driven firing members, locking members, drive shaft members and / or one or more hinge members.

[0479] In one aspect, the robotic surgical instrument 700 comprises a control circuit 710 configured to control an anvil 716 and an i-profile beam portion 714 (including a sharp cutting edge) of an end actuator 702, a removable staple cartridge 718, a drive shaft 740 and one or more hinge members 742a, 742b via a plurality of motors 704a to 704e. A position sensor 734 can be configured to provide feedback on the i-profile beam 714 to control circuit 710. Other sensors 738 can be configured to provide feedback to control circuit 710. A timer / counter 731 provides timing and counting to control circuit 710. A power source 712 can be provided to operate motors 704a to 704e and a current sensor 736 provides motor current feedback to control circuit 710. Motors 704a to 704e can be operated individually by the control circuit 710 in an open loop or closed loop feedback control.

[0480] In one aspect, the control circuit 710 may comprise one or more microcontrollers, microprocessors or other processors suitable for executing instructions that cause the processor or processors to perform one or more tasks. In one aspect, a timer / counter 731 provides an output signal, such as elapsed time or a digital count, to control circuit 710 to correlate beam position with I-shaped profile 714, as determined by position sensor 734, with the output of timer / counter 731 so that control circuit 710 can determine the position of the beam with I-shaped profile 714 at a specific time (t) in relation to an initial position or time (t) when the beam with I-profile 714 is in a specific position in relation to an initial position. Timer / counter 731 can be configured to measure elapsed time, count external events, or time timed events.

[0481] In one aspect, control circuit 710 can be programmed to control functions of end actuator 702 based on one or more tissue conditions. The control circuit 710 can be programmed to directly or indirectly detect tissue conditions, such as thickness, as described here. Control circuit 710 can be programmed to select a trigger control program or closing control program based on tissue conditions. A trigger control program can describe the distal movement of the displacement member. Different shooting control programs can be selected to better treat different tissue conditions. For example, when thicker tissue is present, control circuit 710 can be programmed to translate the displacement member at a lower speed and / or with a lower power. When a thinner fabric is present, the control circuit 710 can be programmed to transfer the displacement member to a higher speed and / or with greater power. A closing control program can control the closing force applied to the tissue by the anvil 716. Other control programs control the rotation of the drive shaft 740 and the hinge members 742a, 742b.

[0482] In one aspect, the 710 motor control circuit can generate motor setpoint signals. Motor setpoint signals can be provided for various motor controllers 708a through 708e. Motor controllers 708a to 708e can comprise one or more circuits configured to provide motor drive signals for motors 704a to 704e in order to drive motors 704a to 704e, as described here. In some instances, motors 704a to 704e may be brushed DC motors. For example, the speed of motors 704a to 704e can be proportional to the respective motor start signals. In some instances, motors 704a to 704e may be brushless DC electric motors, and the respective motor drive signals may comprise a PWM signal provided for one or more stator windings of motors 704a to 704e. In addition, in some examples, motor controllers 708a to 708e can be omitted and control circuit 710 can directly generate motor drive signals.

[0483] In one aspect, the control circuit 710 can initially operate each of the motors 704a to 704e in an open circuit configuration for a first open circuit portion of the travel of the travel member. Based on the response of the robotic surgical instrument 700 during the open circuit portion of the stroke, control circuit 710 can select a trigger control program in a closed circuit configuration. The instrument's response may include a translation of the distance from the displacement member during the open circuit portion, a time elapsed during the open circuit portion,

the energy supplied to one of the motors 704a to 704e during the open circuit portion, a sum of pulse widths of a motor start signal, etc. After the open circuit portion, control circuit 710 can implement the selected trigger control program for a second portion of the travel member travel. For example, during a portion of the closed circuit course, control circuit 710 can modulate one of the motors 704a to 704e based on the translation of data describing a position of the displacement member in closed circuit to translate the displacement member at a constant speed.

[0484] In one aspect, motors 704a to 704e can receive power from a 712 power source. Power source 712 can be a DC power source powered by an alternating main power source, a battery, a super capacitor, or any other suitable power source. Motors 704a to 704e can be mechanically coupled to individual moving mechanical elements such as the I-profile beam 714, the anvil 716, the drive shaft 740, the joint 742a and the joint 742b, through the respective transmissions 706a to 706e. Transmissions 706a through 706e may include one or more gears or other connecting components to couple motors 704a to 704e to moving mechanical elements. A 734 position sensor can detect an I-beam beam position

714. The 734 position sensor can be or can include any type of sensor that is capable of generating position data that indicates a beam position with I-shaped profile 714. In some examples, the 734 position sensor can include an encoder configured to supply a series of pulses to the control circuit 710 according to the beam with I-profile 714 transferred distally and proximally. Control circuit 710 can track pulses to determine the position of the I-profile beam 714. Other suitable position sensors can be used, including, for example, a proximity sensor. Other types of position sensors can provide other signals that indicate the movement of the I-profile beam 714. In addition, in some examples, the position sensor 734 can be omitted. When any of the motors 704a to 704e is a stepper motor, control circuit 710 can track the position of the beam with i-profile 714 by aggregating the number and direction of the steps that the 704 motor has been instructed to perform. Position sensor 734 can be located on end actuator 702 or any other portion of the instrument. The outputs of each of the engines 704a to 704e include a torque sensor 744a to 744e to detect force and have an encoder to detect the rotation of the drive shaft.

[0485] In one aspect, control circuit 710 is configured to drive a firing member as the portion of the I-profile beam 714 of end actuator 702. Control circuit 710 provides a motor set point for a motor control 708a, which provides a drive signal for motor 704a. The output shaft of the motor 704a is coupled to a torque sensor 744a. The torque sensor 744a is coupled to a transmission 706a which is coupled to the beam with I-profile 714. The transmission 706a comprises moving mechanical elements, such as rotating elements, and a firing member to control the movement distally and proximally. of the I-beam beam 714 along a longitudinal geometric axis of the end actuator 702. In one aspect, the motor 704a can be coupled to the knife gear assembly, which includes a knife gear reduction assembly that includes a first knife drive gear and a second knife drive gear. A torque sensor 744a provides a trigger force feedback signal to control circuit 710. The trigger force signal represents the force required to fire or move the I-profile beam 714. A 734 position sensor can be configured to provide the I-beam beam position

714 along the firing stroke or firing member position as a feedback signal to control circuit 710. End actuator 702 may include additional sensors 738 configured to provide feedback signals to control circuit 710. When ready for use, the control circuit 710 can provide a trip signal to the 708a motor control. In response to the trigger signal, motor 704a can drive the trigger member distally along the longitudinal geometry axis of end actuator 702 from an initial proximal position of the stroke to an end distal position of the stroke relative to the initial position of course. As the displacement member moves distally, an I-profile beam 714 with a cutting element positioned at a distal end, advances distally to cut the fabric located between the staple cartridge 718 and the anvil 716.

[0486] In one aspect, control circuit 710 is configured to drive a closing member, such as anvil portion 716 of end actuator 702. Control circuit 710 provides a motor setpoint for motor control 708b, which provides a drive signal for motor 704b. The output shaft of the 704b motor is coupled to a 744b torque sensor. The torque sensor 744b is coupled to a transmission 706b which is coupled to the anvil 716. The transmission 706b comprises moving mechanical elements, such as rotating elements and a closing member, to control the movement of the anvil 716 between the open and closed positions. In one aspect, the 704b motor is coupled to a closing gear assembly, which includes a closing reduction gear assembly that is supported in gear engaged with the closing sprocket. The 744b torque sensor provides a closing force feedback signal to the control circuit

trolley 710. The closing force feedback signal represents the closing force applied to the anvil 716. Position sensor 734 can be configured to provide the position of the closing member as a feedback signal to the feedback circuit. control 710. Additional sensors 738 on end actuator 702 can provide the closing force feedback signal to control circuit 710. A pivoting slide 716 is positioned opposite the staple cartridge 718. When ready to In use, the control circuit 710 can provide a closing signal to the motor control 708b. In response to the closing signal, motor 704b advances a closing member to secure the fabric between the anvil 716 and the staple cartridge 718.

[0487] In one aspect, control circuit 710 is configured to rotate a drive shaft member, such as drive shaft 740, to rotate end actuator 702. Control circuit 710 provides a set point motor to a 708c motor control, which provides a drive signal to the 704c motor. The output shaft of the motor 704c is coupled to a torque sensor 744c. The torque sensor 744c is coupled to a transmission 706c which is coupled to the axis 740. The transmission 706c comprises moving mechanical elements, such as rotary elements, to control the rotation of the drive shaft 740 clockwise or counterclockwise. -time up to and over 360 °. In one aspect, the 704c motor is coupled to the rotary drive assembly, which includes a pipe gear segment that is formed over (or attached to) the proximal end of the proximal closing tube for operable engagement by a gear assembly rotational that is operationally supported on the tool mounting plate. The torque sensor 744c provides a rotation force feedback signal to control circuit 710. The rotation force feedback signal represents the rotation force applied to the drive shaft

740. The position sensor 734 can be configured to provide the position of the closing member as a feedback signal to the control circuit 710. Additional sensors 738, such as a drive shaft co-complicator, can provide the rotational position of the drive shaft 740 for control circuit 710.

[0488] In one aspect, control circuit 710 is configured to link end actuator 702. Control circuit 710 provides a motor setpoint to a 708d motor control, which provides a trigger signal to the 704d engine. The output shaft of the 704d motor is coupled to a 744d torque sensor. The torque sensor 744d is coupled to a transmission 706d which is coupled to a pivot member 742a. The 706d transmission comprises moving mechanical elements, such as articulation elements, to control the articulation of the 702 ± 65 ° end actuator. In one aspect, the 704d motor is coupled to a pivot nut, which is rotatably seated on the proximal end portion of the distal column portion and is pivotally driven thereon by a pivot gear assembly. The torque sensor 744d provides a hinge force feedback signal to control circuit 710. The hinge force feedback signal represents the hinge force applied to the end actuator 702. The 738 sensors, as an articulation encoder, can supply the articulation position of end actuator 702 to control circuit 710.

[0489] In another aspect, the articulation function of the robotic surgical system 700 may comprise two articulation members, or connections, 742a, 742b. These hinge members 742a, 742b are driven by separate disks at the robot interface (the rack), which are driven by the two motors 708d, 708e. When the separate firing motor 704a is provided, each hinge link 742a, 742b can be antagonistically driven relative to the other link to provide a resistive holding movement and a head load when it is not moving and to provide a articulation movement when the head is articulated. The hinge members 742a, 742b attach to the head in a fixed radius when the head is rotated. Consequently, the mechanical advantage of the push and pull link changes when the head is rotated. This change in mechanical advantage can be more pronounced with other drive systems for the articulation connection.

[0490] In one aspect, the one or more motors 704a to 704e may comprise a brushed DC motor with a gearbox and mechanical connections to a firing member, closing member or articulation member. Another example includes electric motors 704a to 704e that operate the moving mechanical elements such as the displacement member, the articulation connections, the closing tube and the drive shaft. An external influence is a negligible and unpredictable influence on things like tissue, surrounding bodies, and friction in the physical system. This external influence can be called drag, which acts in opposition to one of the electric motors 704a to 704e. External influence, such as drag, can cause the functioning of the physical system to deviate from a desired operation of the physical system.

[0491] In one aspect, the position sensor 734 can be implemented as an absolute positioning system. In one aspect, the 734 position sensor can comprise an absolute rotary magnetic positioning system implemented as a single integrated circuit rotary magnetic position sensor, AS5055EQFT, available from Austria Microsystems, AG. The position sensor 734 can interface with the control circuit 710 to provide a position system

absolute operation. The position can include multiple Hall effect elements located above a magnet and coupled to a CORDIC processor, also known as the digit-by-digit method and Volder algorithm, which is provided to implement a simple and efficient algorithm for calculating hyperbolic and trigonometric functions that require only addition, subtraction, bit shift and lookup table operations.

[0492] In one aspect, control circuit 710 can be in communication with one or more sensors 738. Sensors 738 can be positioned on end actuator 702 and adapted to work with the robotic surgical instrument 700 to measure various derived parameters such as span distance in relation to time, compression of the tissue in relation to time, and deformation of the anvil in relation to time. The 738 sensors can comprise a magnetic sensor, a magnetic field sensor, a stress meter, a load cell, a pressure sensor, a force sensor, a torque sensor, an inductive sensor as a current sensor parasite, a resistive sensor, a capacitive sensor, an optical sensor and / or any other sensor suitable for measuring one or more parameters of the end actuator 702. Sensors 738 may include one or more sensors. The sensors 738 may be located on the platform of the staple cartridge 718 to determine the location of the tissue using segmented electrodes. The torque sensors 744a to 744e can be configured to detect force such as firing force, closing force, and / or articulation force, among others. Consequently, the control circuit 710 can detect (1) the closing load experienced by the distal closing tube and its position, (2) the trigger member on the rack and its position, (3) which portion of the cartridge of staples 718 have tissue in it, and (4) the load and position on both pivot rods.

[0493] In one aspect, the one or more sensors 738 may comprise a strain gauge such as, for example, a micro strain gauge, configured to measure the magnitude of the strain on the anvil 716 during a grip condition. The effort meter provides an electrical signal whose amplitude varies with the magnitude of the effort. The 738 sensors can comprise a pressure sensor configured to detect a pressure generated by the presence of compressed tissue between the anvil 716 and the staple cartridge 718. The sensors 738 can be configured to detect the impedance of a section of tissue located between the anvil 716 and the staple cartridge 718 which is indicative of the thickness and / or completeness of the fabric located between them.

[0494] In one aspect, the 738 sensors can be implemented as one or more limit switches, electromechanical devices, solid state switches, Hall effect devices, magneto-resistive devices (MR) giant magneto-resistive devices (GMR ), magnetometers, among others. In other implementations, the 738 sensors can be implemented as solid state switches that operate under the influence of light, such as optical sensors, infrared sensors, ultraviolet sensors, among others. In addition, the switches can be solid state devices such as transistors (for example, FET, junction FET, MOSFET, bipolar, and the like). In other implementations, the 738 sensors can include driverless electric switches, ultrasonic switches, accelerometers, inertia sensors and, among others.

[0495] In one aspect, sensors 738 can be configured to measure the forces exerted on the anvil 716 by the closing actuation system. For example, one or more sensors 738 may be at a point of interaction between the closing tube and the anvil 716 to detect the closing forces applied by the closing tube on the anvil 716. The forces exerted on the anvil 716 can be representative of the tissue compression experienced by the tissue section captured between the anvil 716 and the staple cartridge

718. The one or more sensors 738 can be positioned at various points of interaction throughout the closing drive system to detect the closing forces applied to the anvil 716 by the closing drive system. The one or more sensors 738 can be sampled in real time during a gripping operation by the processor of the control circuit 710. The control circuit 710 receives sample measurements in real time to provide and analyze information based on time and evaluate, in real time, the closing forces applied to the anvil 716.

[0496] In one aspect, a current sensor 736 can be used to measure the current drawn by each of the 704a to 704e motors. The force required to advance any of the moving mechanical elements, such as the beam with I-shaped profile 714, corresponds to the current drained by one of the motors 704a to 704e. The force is converted into a digital signal and supplied to control circuit 710. Control circuit 710 can be configured to simulate the response of the instrument's actual system in the controller software. A displacement member can be actuated to move a beam with I-profile 714 on end actuator 702 at or near a target speed. The robotic surgical instrument 700 may include a feedback controller, which can be one or any of the feedback controllers, including, but not limited to, a PID controller, state feedback, linear quadratic (LQR) and / or an adaptable controller, for example. The robotic surgical instrument 700 can include a power source to convert the signal from the feedback controller to a physical input such as case voltage, PWM voltage, frequency-modulated voltage, current, torque and / or force, for example. Additional details are disclosed in US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 636,829, entitled "CLOSED LOOP

VELOCITY CONTROL TECHNIQUES FOR ROBOTIC SURGICAL INSTRUMENT ", deposited on June 29, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0497] Figure 56 illustrates a block diagram of a surgical instrument 750 programmed to control the distal translation of a displacement member according to an aspect of the present description. In one aspect, the surgical instrument 750 is programmed to control the distal translation of a displacement member, such as the beam with I-shaped profile 764. The surgical instrument 750 comprises an end actuator 752 which may comprise a 766 anvil. , a beam with an I-shaped profile 764 (including a sharp cutting edge) and a removable staple cartridge 768.

[0498] The position, movement, displacement, and / or translation of a linear displacement member, such as the beam with I-764 profile, can be measured by an absolute positioning system, sensor arrangement, and a position sensor 784. As the I-beam beam 764 is coupled to a longitudinally movable drive member, the position of the I-beam beam 764 can be determined by measuring the position of the longitudinally mobile drive member that employs the position sensor 784. Consequently, in the description below, the position, displacement and / or translation of the beam with I-shaped profile 764 can be obtained by the position sensor 784, as described in the present invention. A control circuit 760 can be programmed to control the translation of the displacement member, such as the I-profile beam 764. The control circuit 760, in some examples, may comprise one or more microcontrollers, microprocessors or other products. suitable terminators to carry out the instructions that cause the processor or processors to control the displacement member, for example, the I 764 profile beam, in the manner described. In one aspect, a timer / counter 781 provides an output signal, such as elapsed time or a digital count, to control circuit 760 to correlate the beam position with I-shaped profile 764 as determined by position sensor 784 with the timer / counter output 781 so that the control circuit 760 can determine the position of the I-profile beam 764 at a specific moment (t) in relation to an initial position. The 781 timer / counter can be configured to measure elapsed time, count external events, or measure eternal events.

[0499] Control circuit 760 can generate a 772 engine setpoint signal. The 772 engine setpoint signal can be supplied to a 758 motor controller. The 758 motor controller can comprise one or more circuits configured to provide a motor 774 drive signal to motor 754 to drive motor 754, as described in the present invention. In some instances, the 754 motor may be a DC motor with a brushed DC electric motor. For example, the speed of motor 754 can be proportional to the drive signal of motor 774. In some instances, motor 754 can be a brushless DC electric motor and the motor drive signal 774 can comprise a PWM signal provided for a or more motor stator windings 754. In addition, in some examples, motor controller 758 may be omitted, and control circuit 760 can generate motor drive signal 774 directly.

[0500] The 754 motor can receive power from a power source

762. The 762 power source can be or include a battery, a super capacitor, or any other suitable power source. The 754 motor can be mechanically coupled to the I-profile beam 764 by means of a 756 transmission. The 756 transmission can include one or more gears or other connecting components to couple the 754 motor to the I-profile beam 764. A sensor of position 784 can detect a position of the beam with an I-profile 764. The position sensor 784 can be or can include any type of sensor that is capable of generating position data that indicate a position of the beam with an I-profile 764 In some examples, the position sensor 784 may include an encoder configured to supply a series of pulses to the control circuit 760 according to the beam with I-shaped profile 764 translated distally and proximally. The control circuit 760 can track the pulses to determine the position of the I-profile beam 764. Other suitable position sensors can be used, including, for example, a proximity sensor. Other types of position sensors can provide other signals that indicate the movement of the beam with I-764 profile. In addition, in some examples, the position sensor 784 may be omitted. When the motor 754 is a stepper motor, the control circuit 760 can track the position of the I-profile beam 764 by adding the number and orientation of the steps that the motor 754 has been instructed to perform. The position sensor 784 can be located on end actuator 752 or any other portion of the instrument.

[0501] The control circuit 760 can be in communication with one or more sensors 788. The sensors 788 can be positioned on the end actuator 752 and adapted to work with the surgical instrument 750 to measure the various derived parameters, such as distance span in relation to time, compression of the tissue in relation to time and anvil effort in relation to time. The 788 sensors can comprise a magnetic sensor, a magnetic field sensor, a stress meter, a pressure sensor, a force sensor, an inductive sensor such as a eddy current sensor, a resistive sensor, a capacitive sensor, a sensor optical and / or any other sensors suitable for measuring one or more parameters of the 752 end actuator. The 788 sensors may include one or more sensors.

[0502] The one or more 788 sensors may comprise a stress meter, such as a microstrain meter, configured to measure the magnitude of the stress on the anvil 766 during a stuck condition. The effort meter provides an electrical signal whose amplitude varies with the magnitude of the effort. The 788 sensors can comprise a pressure sensor configured to detect a pressure generated by the presence of compressed tissue between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768. The 788 sensors can be configured to detect the impedance of a section of fabric located between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768 which is indicative of the thickness and / or completeness of the fabric located between them.

[0503] The 788 sensors can be configured to measure the forces exerted on the anvil 766 by a closing drive system. For example, one or more sensors 788 can be at a point of interaction between a closing tube and anvil 766 to detect the closing forces applied by a closing tube to the anvil

766. The forces exerted on the anvil 766 may be representative of the tissue compression experienced by the section of tissue captured between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768. The one or more sensors 788 can be positioned at various points of interaction along the closing drive system to detect the closing forces applied to the 766 anvil by the closing drive system. The one or more 788 sensors can be sampled in real time during a gripping operation by a processor of the control circuit 760. The control circuit 760 receives sample measurements in real time to provide and analyze information based on time and evaluate, in real time, the closing forces applied to the anvil 766.

[0504] A current sensor 786 can be used to measure the current drained by the 754 motor. The force required to advance the beam with I-shaped profile 764 corresponds to the current drained by the motor

754. The force is converted into a digital signal and supplied to the control circuit 760.

[0505] Control circuit 760 can be configured to simulate the actual system response of the instrument in the controller software. A displacement member can be actuated to move a beam with I-profile 764 on end actuator 752 at or near a target speed. The surgical instrument 750 may include a feedback controller, which can be any or any feedback controller, including, but not limited to, a PID controller, status feedback, LQR, and / or a adaptive controller, for example. The surgical instrument 750 can include a power source to convert the signal from the feedback controller to a physical input such as case voltage, PWM voltage, voltage modulated by frequency, current, torque and / or force, for example.

[0506] The actual drive system of the surgical instrument 750 is configured to drive the displacement member, the cutting member or the beam with I 764 profile, by a brushed DC motor with gearbox and mechanical connections to a joint and / or knife system. Another example is the 754 electric motor that operates the displacement member and the articulation drive, for example from an interchangeable drive shaft assembly. An external influence is an excessive and unpredictable influence of things like tissue, surrounding bodies, and friction in the physical system. This external influence can be called drag, which acts in opposition to the 754 electric motor. External influence, like the drag, can cause the functioning of the physical system to deviate from a desired operation of the physical system.

[0507] Several exemplifying aspects are directed to a surgical instrument 750 that comprises an end actuator 752 with surgical implements of stapling and cutting driven by motor. For example, a 754 motor can drive a displacement member distally and proximally along a longitudinal axis of the end actuator 752. The end actuator 752 can comprise an articulating anvil 766 and, when configured for use , an ultrasonic blade 768 positioned on the opposite side of the anvil 766. A doctor can hold the tissue between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768, as described in the present invention. When ready to use the 750 instrument, the physician can provide a trigger signal, for example, by pressing a trigger on the 750 instrument. In response to the trigger signal, motor 754 can drive the displacement member distally along the longitudinal geometrical axis of end actuator 752 from a proximal start position to an end position distal from the start position. As the displacement member moves distally, the I-profile beam 764 with a cutting element positioned at a distal end, can cut the fabric between the staple cartridge 768 and the anvil 766.

[0508] In several examples, the surgical instrument 750 may comprise a control circuit 760 programmed to control the distal translation of the displacement member, such as the beam with I-shaped profile 764, for example, based on one or more more tissue conditions. The control circuit 760 can be programmed to directly or indirectly detect tissue conditions, such as thickness, as described here. Control circuit 760 can be programmed to select a control program based on tissue conditions. A trigger control program can describe the distal movement of the displacement member. Different trigger control programs can be selected to better treat different tissue conditions. For example, when a thicker tissue is present, control circuit 760 can be programmed to move the displacement member at a lower speed and / or with a lower power. When a thinner fabric is present, the control circuit 760 can be programmed to move the displacement member at a higher speed and / or with greater power.

[0509] In some examples, control circuit 760 may initially operate motor 754 in an open circuit configuration for a first open circuit portion of a travel of the travel member. Based on a response from instrument 750 during the open circuit portion of the course, control circuit 760 can select a trip control program. The response of the instrument may include a travel distance of the displacement member during the open circuit portion, a time elapsed during the open circuit portion, the energy supplied to the motor 754 during the open circuit portion, a sum pulse widths of a motor start signal, etc. After the open circuit portion, control circuit 760 can implement the selected trigger control program for a second portion of the travel member travel. For example, during the closed loop portion of the stroke, control circuit 760 can modulate motor 754 based on the translation data that describes a position of the displacement member in a closed circuit manner to translate the member displacement at a constant speed. Additional details are disclosed in US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 720,852, entitled "SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A DISPLAY OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT", filed on September 29, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by way of reference in its entirety.

[0510] Figure 57 is a schematic diagram of a 790 surgical instrument configured to control various functions in accordance with an aspect of the present description. In one aspect, the surgical instrument 790 is programmed to control the distal translation of a displacement member, such as the I-profile beam 764. Surgical instrument 790 comprises an end actuator 792 that can comprise an anvil 766 , a beam with I-shaped profile 764 and a removable staple cartridge 768 that can be interchanged with an RF cartridge 796 (shown in dashed line).

[0511] In one aspect, the 788 sensors can be implemented as a limit switch, electromechanical device, solid state switches, Hall effect devices, MRI devices, GMR devices, magnetometers, among others. In other implementations, 638 sensors can be solid state switches that operate under the influence of light, such as optical sensors, infrared sensors, ultraviolet sensors, among others. In addition, the switches can be solid state devices such as transistors (for example, FET, junction FET, MOSFET, bipolar, and the like). In other implementations, 788 sensors can include driverless electric switches, ultrasonic switches, accelerometers, inertia sensors, and more.

[0512] In one aspect, the 784 position sensor can be implemented as an absolute positioning system, which comprises a rotating magnetic absolute positioning system implemented as a single integrated circuit rotating magnetic position sensor , AS5055EQFT, available from Austria Microsystems, AG. The position sensor 784 can interface with the control circuit 760 to provide an absolute positioning system. The position can include multiple Hall effect elements located above a magnet and coupled to a CORDIC processor, also known as the digit by digit method and Volder's algorithm, which is provided to implement a simple and efficient algorithm for calculating hyperbolic and trigonometric functions that require only addition, subtraction, bit shift and lookup table operations.

[0513] In one aspect, the beam with I-shaped profile 764 can be implemented as a knife member comprising a knife body that operationally supports a fabric cutting blade therein and may additionally include flaps or latching features anvil and channel hitch features or a base. In one aspect, the staple cartridge 768 can be implemented as a standard (mechanical) surgical clamp cartridge. In one aspect, the RF cartridge 796 can be implemented as an RF cartridge. These and other sensor arrangements are described in US patent application Common Ownership No. 15 / 628,175, entitled "TECHNIQUES FOR ADAP-

I HAVE CONTROL OF MOTOR VELOCITY OF A SURGICAL STAPLING AND CUTTING INSTRUMENT ", filed on June 20, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0514] The position, movement, displacement and / or translation of a linear displacement member, such as the beam with I 764 profile, can be measured by an absolute positioning system, sensor arrangement and position sensor represented as the position sensor 784. Since the I-beam beam 764 is coupled to the longitudinally movable drive member, the position of the I-beam beam 764 can be determined by measuring the position of the longitudinally mobile drive member that employs the position 784. Consequently, in the description below, the position, displacement and / or translation of the I-profile beam 764 can be obtained by the position sensor 784, as described in the present invention. A control circuit 760 can be programmed to control the translation of the displacement member, such as the beam with I-shaped profile 764, as described here. The control circuit 760, in some examples, may comprise one or more microcontrollers, microprocessors or other suitable processors to execute the instructions that cause the processor or processors to control the displacement member, for example, the beam with profile in I 764, as described. In one aspect, a timer / counter 781 provides an output signal, such as elapsed time or a digital count, to control circuit 760 to correlate the beam position with I-shaped profile 764 as determined by the position sensor 784 with the output of the timer / counter 781 so that the control circuit 760 can determine the position of the beam with I-shaped profile 764 at a specific moment (t) in relation to an initial position. The 781 timer / counter can be configured to measure elapsed time, count external events, or measure timeless events.

[0515] Control circuit 760 can generate a 772 motor setpoint signal. The 772 motor setpoint signal can be supplied to a 758 motor controller. The 758 motor controller can comprise one or more circuits configured to provide a motor 774 drive signal to motor 754 to drive motor 754, as described in the present invention. In some instances, the 754 motor may be a DC motor with a brushed DC electric motor. For example, the speed of motor 754 can be proportional to the drive signal of motor 774. In some instances, motor 754 can be a brushless DC electric motor and the motor drive signal 774 can comprise a PWM signal provided for a or more motor stator windings 754. In addition, in some examples, motor controller 758 may be omitted, and control circuit 760 can generate motor drive signal 774 directly.

[0516] The 754 motor can receive power from a power source

762. The 762 power source can be or include a battery, a super capacitor, or any other suitable power source. The 754 motor can be mechanically coupled to the I-profile beam 764 by means of a 756 transmission. The 756 transmission can include one or more gears or other connecting components to couple the 754 motor to the I-profile beam 764. A sensor of position 784 can detect a position of the beam with an I-profile 764. The position sensor 784 can be or can include any type of sensor that is capable of generating position data that indicate a position of the beam with an I-profile 764 In some examples, the position sensor 784 may include an encoder configured to supply a series of pulses to the control circuit 760 according to the beam with I-shaped profile 764 translated distally and proximally. The control circuit 760 can track the pulses to determine the position of the I-profile beam 764. Other suitable position sensors can be used, including, for example, a proximity sensor. Other types of position sensors can provide other signals that indicate the movement of the beam with I-764 profile. In addition, in some examples, the position sensor 784 may be omitted. When the motor 754 is a stepper motor, the control circuit 760 can track the position of the I-profile beam 764 by adding the number and orientation of the steps that the motor has been instructed to perform. Position sensor 784 can be located on end actuator 792 or any other portion of the instrument.

[0517] The control circuit 760 can be in communication with one or more sensors 788. The sensors 788 can be positioned on the end actuator 792 and adapted to work with the surgical instrument 790 to measure the various derived parameters, such as distance span in relation to time, compression of the tissue in relation to time and anvil effort in relation to time. The 788 sensors may comprise a magnetic sensor, a magnetic field sensor, a stress meter, a pressure sensor, a force sensor, an inductive sensor such as a eddy current sensor,

a resistive sensor, a capacitive sensor, an optical sensor and / or any other sensors suitable for measuring one or more parameters of the 792 end actuator. The 788 sensors may include one or more sensors.

[0518] The one or more sensors 788 may comprise a stress meter, such as a microstrain meter, configured to measure the magnitude of the stress on the anvil 766 during a stuck condition. The effort meter provides an electrical signal whose amplitude varies with the magnitude of the effort. The 788 sensors can comprise a pressure sensor configured to detect a pressure generated by the presence of compressed tissue between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768. The 788 sensors can be configured to detect the impedance of a section of fabric located between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768 which is indicative of the thickness and / or completeness of the fabric located between them.

[0519] The 788 sensors can be configured to measure the forces exerted on the anvil 766 by the closing drive system. For example, one or more sensors 788 may be at a point of interaction between a closing tube and anvil 766 to detect the closing forces applied by a closing tube to anvil 766. The forces exerted on anvil 766 can be represented - sensations of the tissue compression experienced by the tissue section captured between the anvil 766 and the staple cartridge 768. The one or more sensors 788 can be positioned at various points of interaction along the closing drive system to detect the closing forces applied to the anvil 766 by the closing drive system. The one or more 788 sensors can be sampled in real time during a gripping operation by a processor portion of the 760 control circuit. The 760 control circuit receives sample measurements in real time to provide and analyze information. time-based formations and assess, in real time, the closing forces applied to the anvil 766.

[0520] A current sensor 786 can be used to measure the current drained by the 754 motor. The force required to advance the beam with I-shaped profile 764 corresponds to the current drained by the motor.

754. The force is converted into a digital signal and supplied to the control circuit 760.

[0521] An RF power source 794 is coupled to the end actuator 792 and is applied to the RF 796 cartridge when the RF 796 cartridge is loaded on the end actuator 792 in place of the staple cartridge 768. The circuit Control Panel 760 controls the supply of RF energy to the 796 RF cartridge.

[0522] Additional details are disclosed in US Patent Application Serial No. 15 / 636,096, entitled "SURGICAL SYSTEM COUPLABLE WITH STAPLE CARTRIDGE AND RADIO FREQUENCY CARTRIDGE, AND METHOD OF USING SAME", filed on June 28, 2017, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Generator hardware

[0523] Figure 58 is a simplified block diagram of a generator 800 configured to provide adjustment without inductor, among other benefits. Additional details of generator 800 are described in US patent no.

9,060,775, entitled "SURGICAL GENERATOR FOR ULTRASONIC AND ELECTROSURGICAL DEVICES", granted on June 23, 2015, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Generator 800 may comprise an isolated stage of patient 802 in communication with a non-isolated stage 804 via a power transformer 806. A secondary winding 808 of power transformer 806 is contained in isolated stage 802 and may comprise a bypass configuration (for example, a central bypass or non-central bypass configuration) to define the trigger signal outputs 810a, 810b and 810c, in order to provide trigger signals to different surgical instruments, such as an ultrasonic surgical device, an RF electrosurgical instrument and a multifunctional surgical instrument that includes RF and ultrasonic energy modes that can be delivered alone or simultaneously. In particular, trigger signal emissions 810a and 810c can provide an ultrasonic trigger signal (for example, a 420 V mean square value (RMS) trigger signal) to an ultrasonic surgical instrument, and emissions of drive signal 810b and 810c can provide an RF electrosurgical drive signal (for example, a 100 V RMS drive signal) to an RF electrosurgical instrument, with output 810b corresponding to the central branch of the power transformer 806.

[0524] In certain forms, ultrasonic and electrosurgical trigger signals can be provided simultaneously to different surgical instruments and / or to a single surgical instrument, such as the multifunctional surgical instrument, with the ability to supply both ultrasonic and electrosurgical energy to the fabric. It will be noted that the electrosurgical signal provided by both the dedicated electrosurgical instrument and the electro-surgical / ultrasonic multifunctional combined instrument can be both a therapeutic and subtherapeutic signal, where the subtherapeutic signal can be used, for example, to monitor tissue or the conditions of the instruments and provide feedback to the generator. For example, RF and ultrasonic signals can be supplied separately or simultaneously from a generator with a single output port in order to provide the desired output signal to the surgical instrument, as will be discussed in more detail below. Consequently, the generator can combine the RF electrosurgical and ultrasonic energies and supply the combined energies to the multi-functional electrosurgical / ultrasonic instrument. Bipolar electrodes can be placed in one or both of the claws of the end actuator. A claw can be triggered by ultrasonic energy in addition to RF electrosurgical energy, working simultaneously. Ultrasonic energy can be used to perform tissue dissection while RF electrosurgical energy can be used to cauterize vessels.

[0525] The non-isolated stage 804 may comprise a power amplifier 812 having an output connected to a primary winding 814 of the power transformer 806. In certain forms the power amplifier 812 may comprise an amplifier of the type push and pull. For example, the non-isolated stage 804 may additionally contain a logic device 816 to provide a digital output to a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) circuit 818 which, in turn, provides an analog signal corresponding to a power amplifier 812 input. In some ways, logic device 816 may comprise a programmable gate array (PGA), an FPGA (field-programmable FPGA) gate array "), a programmable logic device (PLD, for" programmable logic device "), among other logic circuits, for example. The logic device 816, by controlling the input of the power amplifier 812 through the DAC 818, can therefore control any one of several parameters (for example, frequency, waveform, amplitude of the waveform) trigger signals appearing at the trigger signal outputs 810a, 810b and 810c. In certain ways and as discussed below, logic device 816, in conjunction with a processor (for example, a DSP discussed below), can implement a number of DSP-based control algorithms and / or other control algorithms. control for control parameters of the drive signals provided by the generator

800.

[0526] Power can be supplied to a power rail of the power amplifier 812 by a key mode regulator 820, such as a power converter. In certain forms, the key mode regulator 820 may comprise, for example, an adjustable buck regulator. The non-isolated stage 804 may further comprise a first processor 822 which, in one form, may comprise a DSP processor as an ADSP-21469 SHARC DSP analog device, available from Analog Devices, Norwood, MA, USA , for example, although in any form any suitable processor can be used. In certain ways, the DSP processor 822 can control the operation of the key mode regulator 820 responsive to voltage feedback data from the power amplifier 812 by the DSP processor 822 via an ADC 824 circuit. Thus, for example, the DSP 822 processor can receive input via the ADC 824 circuit, and the waveform envelope of a signal (for example, an RF signal) is amplified by the power amplifier 812 The DSP processor 822 can then control the key mode regulator 820 (for example, via a PWM output so that the rail voltage supplied to the power amplifier 812 follows the waveform envelope of the amplified signal By dynamically modulating the rail voltage of the 812 power amplifier based on the waveform envelope, the efficiency of the 812 power amplifier can be significantly improved over rail voltage amplifier schemes. fixed.

[0527] In certain forms, the logic device 816, in conjunction with the DSP processor 822, can implement a digital synthesis circuit as a control scheme with direct digital synthesizer to control the waveform, frequency and / or the amplitude of the drive signals emitted by the generator 800. In one way, for example, the logic device 816 can implement a DDS control algorithm by retrieving waveform samples stored in a lookup table (LUT , "look-up table") updated dynamically, as a LUT RAM that can be integrated into an FPGA.

This control algorithm is particularly useful for ultrasonic applications in which an ultrasonic transducer, such as an ultrasonic transducer, can be driven by a clean sinusoidal current at its resonant frequency. as other frequencies can excite parasitic resonances, minimizing or reducing the total distortion of the current of the motion branch can correspondingly minimize or reduce the undesirable effects of resonance.

As the waveform of a drive signal output by generator 800 is impacted by various sources of distortion present in the output drive circuit (for example, power transformer 806, power amplifier 812), data voltage and current feedback based on the trigger signal can be provided to an algorithm, such as an error control algorithm implemented by the DSP 822 processor, which compensates for the distortion by adequate pre-distortion or modification of the shape samples. stored in the LUT dynamically and continuously (for example, in real time). In one way, the amount or degree of pre-distortion applied to the LUT samples can be based on the error between a current from the computerized motion branch and a desired current waveform, the error being determined in a sample by sample basis.

In this way, pre-distorted LUT samples, when processed through the drive circuit, can result in a trigger signal from the motion branch that has the desired waveform (for example, sine wave) to drive optimally the ultrasonic transducer. In such forms, the LUT waveform samples will therefore not represent the desired waveform of the trigger signal, but rather the waveform that is necessary to ultimately produce the desired waveform. of the trigger signal of the movement branch, when the distortion effects are taken into account.

[0528] The non-isolated stage 804 can additionally comprise a first ADC 826 circuit and a second ADC 828 circuit coupled to the output of the power transformer 806 by means of the respective isolation transformers, 830 and 832, for the respective sample the voltage and current of drive signals emitted by generator 800. In certain ways, the ADC 826 and 828 circuits can be configured for high speed sampling (eg, 80 mega samples per second (MSPS)) to allow oversampling - trigger signal activation. In one way, for example, the sampling speed of the ADC 826 and 828 circuits can allow an oversampling of approximately 200x (depending on the frequency) of the drive signals. In certain ways, the sampling operations of the ADC 826 and 828 circuit can be performed by a single ADC circuit receiving voltage and current input signals through a bidirectional multiplexer. The use of high-speed sampling in the forms of the generator 800 can make it possible, among other things, to calculate the complex current flowing through the branch of motion (which can be used in certain ways to implement the control of waveform based on DDS described above), accurate digital filtering of the sampled signals and the calculation of actual energy consumption with a high degree of accuracy. The feedback data on voltage and current emitted by the ADC 826 and 828 circuits can be received and processed (for example, first-in-first-out (FIFO) type storage, multiplexer) by logic device 816 and stored in data memory for subsequent retrieval, for example, by the 822 processor. As noted above, feedback data about voltage and current can be used as input to an algorithm for pre-distortion or modification of waveform samples in the LUT , dynamically and continuously. In certain ways, this may require that each stored voltage and current feedback data pair be indexed based on, or otherwise associated with, a sample of the corresponding LUT that was provided by logic device 816 when the pair of feedback data on voltage and current was captured. The synchronization of the LUT samples with the feedback data about voltage and current in this way contributes to the correct timing and stability of the pre-distortion algorithm.

[0529] In certain forms, voltage and current feedback data can be used to control the frequency and / or amplitude (for example, current amplitude) of the drive signals. In one form, for example, feedback data on voltage and current can be used to determine the impedance phase. The frequency of the trigger signal can then be controlled to minimize or reduce the difference between the determined impedance phase and an impedance phase setpoint (eg 0 °), thereby minimizing or reducing the effects of harmonic distortion and, correspondingly, improving the accuracy of the measurement of the impedance phase. The determination of phase impedance and a frequency control signal can be implemented in the DSP 822 processor, for example, with the frequency control signal being supplied as input to a DDS control algorithm implemented by the device programmable logic 816.

[0530] In another form, for example, the current feedback data can be monitored in order to maintain the current amplitude of the drive signal at a current amplitude setpoint. The current amplitude set point can be specified directly or indirectly determined based on the specified set points for voltage and power amplitude. In certain ways, the control of the current amplitude can be implemented by the control algorithm, for example, a proportional-integral-derivative control algorithm (PID), in the DSP processor

822. Variables controlled by the control algorithm to adequately control the current amplitude of the trigger signal may include, for example, the scaling of LUT waveform samples stored in logic device 816 and / or the voltage full-scale output of the DAC circuit 818 (which provides input to the power amplifier 812) through a DAC circuit 834.

[0531] The non-isolated stage 804 may additionally comprise a second processor 836 to provide, among other things, the functionality of the user interface (UI). In one form, the 836 processor may comprise an Atmel AT91SAM9263 processor with an ARM 926EJ-S core, available from Atmel Corporation, of San Jose, California, USA, for example. Examples of UI functionality supported by the UI 836 processor may include audible and visual feedback from the user, communication with peripheral devices (eg via a USB interface), communication with the foot switch, communication with a device data entry (for example, a touchscreen) and communication with an output device (for example, a speaker). The UI processor 836 can communicate with the DSP processor 822 and logic device 816 (for example, via SPI buses). Although the UI 836 processor can primarily support UI functionality, it can also coordinate with the DSP 822 processor to implement risk mitigation in certain ways. For example, the UI 836 processor can be programmed to monitor various aspects of inputs by the user and / or other inputs (for example, touchscreen inputs, foot switch inputs, temperature sensor inputs) and it can disable the drive output of generator 800 when an error condition is detected.

[0532] In certain ways, both the DSP 822 processor and the UI 836 processor can, for example, determine and monitor the operational state of generator 800. For the DSP 822 processor, the operational state of generator 800 can determine, for example, which control and / or diagnostic processes are implemented by the DSP 822 processor. For the UI 836 processor, the operating state of the generator 800 can determine, for example, which elements of a UI (for example, display, sounds) are presented to a user. The respective UI and DSP processors, 822 and 836, can independently maintain the current operational state of generator 800, as well as recognize and evaluate possible transitions out of the current operational state. The DSP 822 processor can function as the master in this relationship, and can determine when transitions between operational states should occur. The UI 836 processor can recognize valid transitions between operational states, and can confirm that a specific transition is appropriate. For example, when the DSP 822 processor instructs the UI 836 processor to transition to a specific state, the UI 836 processor can verify that the requested transition is valid. If a requested transition between states is determined to be invalid by the UI 836 processor, the UI 836 processor can cause generator 800 to enter a fault mode.

[0533] The non-isolated stage 804 may also contain an 838 controller for monitoring input devices (for example, a capacitive touch sensor used to turn generator 800 on and off, a capacitive touch screen) . In certain ways, controller 838 may comprise at least one processor and / or another controller device in communication with the UI processor 836. In one form, for example, controller 838 may comprise a processor (e.g., a controller Meg168 8-bit available from Atmel) configured to monitor user inputs via one or more capacitive touch sensors. In one way, the 838 controller can comprise a touchscreen controller (for example, a QT5480 touchscreen controller available from Atmel) to control and manage the capture of touch data from a capacitive touchscreen to the touch.

[0534] In certain forms, when generator 800 is in an "off" state, controller 838 can continue to receive operational power (for example, through a line from a generator 800 power supply, such as power supply 854 discussed below). In this way, controller 838 can continue to monitor an input device (for example, a capacitive touch sensor located on a front panel of generator 800) to turn generator 800 on and off. When generator 800 is in the off state, the controller 838 can wake up the power supply (for example, enable the operation of one or more DC / DC voltage converters 856 of the power supply 854), if the activation of the input device "on" is detected / off "by a user. Controller 838 can therefore initiate a sequence to transition the generator 800 to an "on" state. On the other hand, controller 838 can initiate a sequence to transition the generator 800 to the off state if activation of the "on / off" input device is detected, when the generator 800 is in the on state. In certain ways, for example, controller 838 can report the activation of the "on / off" input device to processor 836 which, in turn, implements the process sequence necessary to transition the generator 800 to the off state. In such ways, controller 838 may not have any independent capacity to cause the removal of power from generator 800 after its on state has been established.

[0535] In certain forms, controller 838 may cause generator 800 to provide audible feedback or other sensory feedback to alert the user that an on or off sequence has been initiated. This type of alert can be provided at the beginning of a sequence on or off, and before the start of other processes associated with the sequence.

[0536] In certain embodiments, the isolated stage 802 may comprise an instrument interface circuit 840 to, for example, offer a communication interface between a control circuit of a surgical instrument (for example a control circuit (comprising handle keys) and non-isolated stage 804 components, such as logic device 816, DSP processor 822 and / or UI processor 836. Instrument interface circuit 840 can exchange information with stage components non-isolated 804 by means of a communication link that maintains an adequate degree of electrical isolation between the isolated and non-isolated stages 802 and 804, for example, an infrared (IR) based communication link. Power can be supplied to the instrument interface circuit 840 using, for example, a low-voltage voltage regulator powered by an isolation transformer driven from the non-isolated stage 804.

[0537] In one form, the instrument interface circuit 840 may comprise a logic circuit 842 (for example, a logic circuit, a programmable logic circuit, PGA, FPGA, PLD) in communication with a conditioner circuit. signal 844. Signal conditioning circuit 844 can be configured to receive a periodic signal from logic circuit 842 (for example, a 2 kHz square wave) to generate a bipolar interrogation signal that has an identical frequency. The question mark can be generated, for example, using a bipolar current source powered by a differential amplifier. The question mark can be communicated to a surgical instrument control circuit (for example, by using a conductor pair on a cable connecting the generator 800 to the surgical instrument) and monitored to determine a circuit state or configuration of control. The control circuit can comprise a number of switches, resistors and / or diodes to modify one or more characteristics (for example, amplitude, rectification) of the question mark so that a state or configuration of the control circuit is discernible, so unambiguous, based on one or more characteristics. In one form, for example, the signal conditioning circuit 844 may comprise an ADC circuit for generating samples of a voltage signal appearing between inputs of the control circuit, resulting from the passage of the interrogation signal through it. The logic instrument 842 (or a non-isolated stage component 804) can then determine the status or configuration of the control circuit based on the samples of ADC circuits.

[0538] In one form, the instrument interface circuit 840 may comprise a first data circuit interface 846 to enable the exchange of information between logic circuit 842 (or another element of the instrument interface circuit 840) and a first data circuit disposed in a surgical instrument or otherwise associated with it. In certain forms, for example, a first data loop may be arranged on a wire integrally attached to a handle of the surgical instrument, or on an adapter to interface between a specific type or model of surgical instrument and the generator 800 The first data circuit can be deployed in any suitable way and can communicate with the generator according to any suitable protocol, including, for example, as described here with respect to the first data circuit. In certain ways, the first data circuit may comprise a non-volatile storage device, such as an EEPROM device. In certain ways, the first data circuit interface 846 can be implemented separately from logic circuit 842 and comprises a suitable circuit set (for example, separate logic devices, a processor) to allow communication between logic circuit 842 and the first data loop. In other ways, the first data circuit interface 846 can be integral with logic circuit 842.

[0539] In certain ways, the first data circuit can store information related to the specific surgical instrument with which it is associated. This information may include, for example, a model number, a serial number, a number of operations in which the surgical instrument was used, and / or any other types of information. This information can be read by the instrument interface circuit 840 (for example, logic circuit 842), transferred to a non-isolated stage component 804 (for example, to logic device 816, the DSP processor 822 and / or the UI 836 processor) for presentation to a user via an output device and / or to control a function or operation of the 800 generator.

In any case, any type of information can be communicated to the first data circuit for storage in it through the first interface of data circuit 846 (for example, using logic circuit 842). This information may include, for example, an updated number of operations in which the surgical instrument was used and / or the dates and / or times of its use.

[0540] As discussed earlier, a surgical instrument can be removable from a handle (for example, the multifunctional surgical instrument can be removable from the handle) to promote interchangeability and / or disposability of the instrument. In such cases, conventional generators may be limited in their ability to recognize specific instrument configurations being used, as well as to optimize the control and diagnostic processes as needed. The addition of readable data circuits to surgical instruments to resolve this issue is problematic from a compatibility point of view, however. For example, designing a surgical instrument so that it remains retrocompatible with generators lacking the indispensable data reading functionality may be impractical, for example, due to different signaling schemes, design complexity and cost. The forms of instruments discussed here address these concerns through the use of data circuits that can be implemented in existing surgical instruments, economically and with minimal design changes to preserve the compatibility of surgical instruments with current generator platforms.

[0541] Additionally, forms of the generator 800 may enable communication with instrument-based data circuits. For example, generator 800 can be configured to communicate with a second data circuit contained in an instrument (for example, the multifunctional surgical instrument). In some ways, the second data circuit can be implemented in a manner similar to that of the first data circuit described here. The instrument interface circuit 840 may comprise a second data circuit interface 848 to enable such communication. In one form, the second data circuit interface 848 can comprise a three-state digital interface, although other interfaces can also be used. In certain ways, the second data circuit can generally be any circuit for transmitting and / or receiving data. In one form, for example, the second data circuit can store information related to the specific surgical instrument with which it is associated. This information may include, for example, a model number, a serial number, a number of operations in which the surgical instrument was used, and / or any other types of information.

[0542] In some ways, the second data circuit can store information about the ultrasonic and / or electronic properties of an associated ultrasonic transducer, end actuator or ultrasonic drive system. For example, the first data loop can indicate an initialization frequency slope, as described here. In addition or alternatively, any type of information can be communicated to the second data circuit for storage in it via the second data circuit interface 848 (for example, using logic circuit 842). This information may include, for example, an updated number of operations in which the surgical instrument was used and / or the dates and / or times of its use. In certain ways, the second data circuit can transmit data captured by one or more sensors (for example, an instrument-based temperature sensor). In certain ways, the second data circuit can receive data from generator 800 and provide an indication to a user (for example, a light-emitting indication or other visible indication) based on the received data.

[0543] In certain ways, the second data circuit and the second data circuit interface 848 can be configured so that communication between logic circuit 842 and the second data circuit can be carried out without the need to provide additional conductors. - for this purpose (for example, dedicated cable conductors connecting a handle to the 800 generator). In a mode, for example, information can be communicated to and from the second data circuit using a wire bus communication scheme, implemented in the existing wiring, as one of the conductors used to transmit interrogation signals. from signal conditioning circuit 844 to a control circuit on a handle. In this way, changes or modifications to the design of the surgical device that may otherwise be necessary are minimized or reduced. In addition, due to the fact that different types of communications implemented on a common physical channel can be separated based on frequency, the presence of a second data circuit can be "invisible" to generators that do not have the indispensable data reading functionality, which, therefore, allows the backward compatibility of the surgical instrument.

[0544] In certain forms, the isolated stage 802 may comprise at least one blocking capacitor 850-1 connected to the output of the trigger signal 810b to prevent the passage of direct current to a patient. A single blocking capacitor may be required to comply with medical regulations and standards, for example. Although failures in designs with a single capacitor are relatively uncommon, this type of failure can still have negative consequences. In one form, a second blocking capacitor 850-2 can be placed in series with the blocking capacitor 850-1, with current dispersion of one point between the blocking capacitors 850-1 and 850-2 being monitored, for example , by an ADC 852 circuit for sampling a voltage induced by leakage current. Samples can be received, for example, via logic circuit 842. Based on changes in the scattering current (as indicated by the voltage samples), generator 800 can determine when at least one of the blocking capacitors 850-1, 850-2 failed, thus offering a benefit over single capacitor designs that have a single point of failure.

[0545] In certain forms, the non-isolated stage 804 can comprise a power supply 854 to provide direct current power with adequate voltage and current. The power supply can comprise, for example, a 400 W power supply to deliver a system voltage of 48 VDC. The power supply 854 can additionally comprise one or more DC / DC voltage converters 856 to receive the power supply output to generate DC outputs at the voltages and currents required by the various components of the generator 800. As discussed above in relation to to controller 838, one or more of the 856 dc / dc voltage converters can receive an input from controller 838 when the activation of the "on / off" input device by a user is detected by controller 838, to enable operation or the awakening of the 856 DC / DC voltage converters.

[0546] Figure 59 illustrates an example of generator 900, which is a form of generator 800 (Figure 58). The 900 generator is configured to supply multiple types of energy to a surgical instrument. The 900 generator provides ultrasonic and RF signals to supply energy to a surgical instrument, independently or simultaneously. Ultrasonic and RF signals can be provided alone or in combination and can be provided simultaneously.

As indicated above, at least one generator output can provide multiple energy modes (for example, ultrasonic, bi-polar or monopolar RF, irreversible and / or reversible electroporation, and / or microwave energy , among others) through a single port, and these signals can be supplied separately or simultaneously to the end actuator to treat tissue.

[0547] Generator 900 comprises a processor 902 coupled to a waveform generator 904. Processor 902 and waveform generator 904 are configured to generate various signal waveforms based on information stored in a memory. coupled to processor 902, not shown for clarity of description. The digital information associated with a waveform is provided to the waveform generator 904 that includes one or more DAC circuits to convert the digital input to an analog output. The analog output is powered by an amplifier 1106 for signal conditioning and amplification. The conditioned and amplified output of the amplifier 906 is coupled to a power transformer 908. The signals are coupled by the power transformer 908 to the secondary side, which is on the patient isolation side. A first signal of a first energy modality is supplied to the surgical instrument between the terminals identified as ENERGY1 and RETURN. A second signal of a second energy modality is coupled by a capacitor 910 and is supplied to the surgical instrument between the terminals identified as ENERGY2 and RETURN. It will be recognized that more than two types of energy can be issued and, therefore, the subscript "n" can be used to designate that up to n ENERGIAn terminals can be provided, where n is a positive integer greater than 1. It will also be recognized that up to "n" return paths, RETURN can be provided without departing from the scope of the present description.

[0548] A second voltage detection circuit 912 is coupled through the terminals identified as ENERGY1 and the BACK path to measure the output voltage between them. A second voltage detection circuit 924 is coupled through the terminals identified as ENERGY2 and the RETURN path to measure the output voltage between them. A current detection circuit 914 is arranged in series with the RETURN leg on the secondary side of the power transformer 908 as shown to measure the output current for any energy modality. If different return paths are provided for each energy modality, then a separate current detection circuit would be provided on each return leg. The outputs of the first and second voltage detection circuits 912, 924 are supplied to the respective isolation transformers 916, 922 and the output of the current detection circuit 914 is supplied to another isolation transformer 918. The outputs of the isolation transformers lament 916, 928, 922 on the primary side of the power transformer 908 (non-isolated side of the patient) are supplied to one or more ADC circuits

926. The digitized output from the ADC 926 circuit is provided to the 902 processor for further processing and computation. The output voltages and the output current feedback information can be used to adjust the output voltage and the current supplied to the surgical instrument, and to compute the output impedance, among other parameters. Input / output communications between the 902 processor and the patient's isolated circuits are provided via a 920 interface circuit. The sensors can also be in electrical communication with the 902 processor via the interface circuit. 920.

[0549] In one aspect, impedance can be determined by processor 902 by dividing the output of the first voltage detection circuit 912 coupled over the terminals identified as ENERGY1 / RETURN or the second voltage detection circuit 924 coupled over the terminals identified as ENERGY2 / RETURN, through the output of the current detection circuit 914 arranged in series with the RETURN leg on the secondary side of the power transformer 908. The outputs of the first and second voltage detection circuits 912 , 924 are provided for separating the isolating transformers 916, 922 and the output of the current sensing circuit 914 is provided for another isolating transformer 916. The digitized voltage and current detection measurements of the ADC 926 circuit are provided. supplied to the 902 processor to compute the impedance. As an example, the first energy modality ENERGIA1 can be ultrasonic energy and the second energy modality ENERGIA2 can be RF energy. However, in addition to the ultrasonic and bipolar or monopolar RF energy modes, other energy modalities include irreversible and / or reversible electroporation and / or microwave energy, among others. In addition, although the example illustrated in Figure 59 shows a single RETURN return path that can be provided for two or more energy modes, in other respects, multiple RETORN return paths can be provided for each ENER- GIAn. Thus, as described here, the impedance of the ultrasonic transducer can be measured by dividing the output of the first voltage detection circuit 912 by the current detection circuit 914 and the tissue impedance can be measured by dividing the output of the second circuit detection voltage 924 by current detection circuit 914.

[0550] As shown in Figure 59, generator 900 comprising at least one output port may include a power transformer 908 with a single output and multiple taps to provide power in the form of one or more modes of energy, such as ultrasonic, bipolar or monopolar RF, irreversible and / or reversible electroporation, and / or microwave energy, among others, for example to the end actuator depending on the type of tissue treatment being performed. For example, the 900 generator can supply energy with higher voltage and lower current to drive an ultrasonic transducer, with lower voltage and higher current to conduct RF electrodes to seal the tissue or with a coagulation waveform for spot coagulation using monopolar or bipolar RF electrosurgical electrodes. The output waveform of generator 900 can be oriented, switched or filtered to supply the frequency to the end actuator of the surgical instrument. The connection of an ultrasonic transducer to the output of generator 900 would preferably be located between the output labeled ENERGY1 and RETURN as shown in Figure 59. In one example, a connection of bipolar RF electrodes to the output of generator 900 would be preferable. - primarily located between the outlet identified as ENERGY2 and the RETURN. In the case of a monopolar output, the preferred connections would be an active electrode (for example, light beam or other probe) for the ENERGIA2 output and a suitable return block connected to the RETURN output.

[0551] Additional details are revealed in US Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0086914 entitled "TECHNIQUES FOR OPERATING

GENERATOR FOR DIGITALLY GENERATING ELECTRICAL SIGNAL WAVEFORMS AND SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS ", which was published on March 30, 2017, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0552] As used throughout this description, the term "wireless" and its derivatives can be used to describe circuits, devices,

systems, methods, techniques, communication channels, etc., which can communicate data using modulated electromagnetic radiation through a non-solid medium. The term does not imply that the associated devices do not contain any wires, although in some aspects they may not. The communication module can implement any of a number of wireless and wired communication standards or protocols, including, but not limited to, Wi-Fi (IEEE family

802.11), WiMAX (IEEE 802.16 family), IEEE 802.20, long-term evolution (LTE, "long-term evolution"), Ev-DO, HSPA +, HSDPA +, HSUPA +, EDGE, GSM, GPRS, CDMA, TDMA, DECT, Bluetooth, Ethernet derivatives thereof, as well as any other wireless and wired protocols that are designated as 3G, 4G, 5G, and beyond. The computing module can include a plurality of communication modules. For example, a first communication module can be dedicated to short-range wireless communications like Wi-Fi and Bluetooth, and a second communication module can be dedicated to longer-range wireless communications like GPS, EDGE, GPRS, CDMA , Wi-MAX, LTE, Ev-DO, and others.

[0553] As used in the present invention, a processor or processing unit is an electronic circuit that performs operations on some external data source, usually memory or some other data flow. The term is used in the present invention to refer to the central processor (central processing unit) in a computer system or systems (specifically systems on a chip (SoCs)) that combine several specialized "processors".

[0554] As used here, a system on a chip or system on the chip (SoC or SOC) is an integrated circuit (also known as an "IC" or "chip") that integrates all components of a computer

other electronic systems. It can contain digital, analog, mixed and often radio frequency functions - all on a single substrate. A SoC integrates a microcontroller (or microprocessor) with advanced peripherals such as a graphics processing unit (GPU), i-Fi module, or coprocessor. An SoC may or may not contain internal memory.

[0555] As used here, a microcontroller or controller is a system that integrates a microprocessor with peripheral circuits and memory. A microcontroller (or MCU for microcontroller unit) can be implemented as a small computer on a single integrated circuit. It can be similar to a SoC; a SoC can include a microcontroller as one of its components. A microcontroller can contain one or more core processing units (CPUs) along with memory and programmable input / output peripherals. Program memory in the form of ferroelectric RAM, NOR flash or OTP ROM is also often included on the chip, as well as a small amount of RAM. Microcontrollers can be used for integrated applications, in contrast to microprocessors used in personal computers or other general-purpose applications that consist of several separate integrated circuits.

[0556] As used in the present invention, the term controller or microcontroller can be an independent chip or IC (integrated circuit) device that interfaces with a peripheral device. This can be a connection between two parts of a computer or a controller on an external device that manages the operation of (and connection to) that device.

[0557] Any of the processors or microcontrollers in the present invention can be any implemented by any single-core or multi-core processor, such as those known under the trade name ARM Cortex by Texas Instruments. In one respect, the processor may be a Core Cortex-M4F LM4F230H5QR ARM processor, available from Texas Instruments, for example, which comprises an integrated 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a seek-ahead buffer to optimize performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), an internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with the StellarisWare® program, memory programmable read-only and electrically erasable (EEPROM) of 2 KB, one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more analogs of quadrature encoder (QEI) inputs, one or more converters 12-bit analog to digital (ADC) with 12 channels of analog input, details of which are available for the product data sheet.

[0558] In one aspect, the processor may comprise a safety controller that comprises two controller-based families, such as TMS570 and RM4x, known under the trade name Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also by Texas Instruments . The safety controller can be configured specifically for the critical safety applications IEC 61508 and ISO 26262, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while providing scalable performance, connectivity and memory options.

[0559] The modular devices include the modules (as described in connection with Figures 41 and 48, for example) that are receivable within a central surgical controller and the devices or surgical instruments that can be connected to the various modules a in order to connect or pair with the corresponding central surgical controller. Modular devices include, for example, smart surgical instruments, medical imaging devices, suction / irrigation devices, smoke evacuators, power generators, fans, insufflators and displays. The modular devices described here can be controlled by control algorithms. The control algorithms can be executed on the modular device itself, on the central surgical controller to which the specific modular device is paired, or on both the modular device and the surgical central surgical controller (for example, through a distributed computing architecture) . In some examples, the control algorithms of the modular devices control the devices based on the data detected by the modular device itself (that is, by sensors in, on or connected to the modular device). These data can be related to the patient being operated on (for example, tissue properties or insufflation pressure) or to the modular device itself (for example, the rate at which a knife is being advanced, the motor current, or energy levels). For example, a control algorithm for a surgical stapling and cutting instrument can control the rate at which the instrument's motor drives its knife through the fabric according to the resistance encountered by the knife as it progresses. Situational recognition

[0560] Situational recognition is the ability of some aspects of a surgical system to determine or infer information related to a surgical procedure from data received from databases and / or instruments. The information may include the type of procedure being performed, the type of tissue in which it is being operated, or the body cavity that is the object of the procedure. Having contextual information related to the surgical procedure, the surgical system can, for example, improve the way in which it controls the modular devices (for example a robotic arm and / or a robotic surgical instrument) connected to it , and provide the surgeon with contextual information or suggestions during the course of the surgical procedure.

[0561] Now with reference to Figure 60, a timeline 5200 is shown representing the situational recognition of a central controller, such as central surgical controller 106 or 206, for example. Timeline 5200 is an illustrative surgical procedure and the contextual information that the central surgical controller 106, 206 can derive from data received from data sources at each stage in the surgical procedure. Timeline 5200 represents typical steps that would be taken by nurses, surgeons, and other medical personnel during the course of a pulmonary segmentectomy procedure, starting with the setup of the operating room and ending with the transfer of the patient to a recovery room in the postoperative period.

[0562] The central surgical controller with situational recognition 106, 206 receives data from data sources throughout the course of the surgical procedure, including the data generated each time medical personnel use a modular device that is paired with the control. central surgical controller 106, 206. central surgical controller 106, 206 can receive this data from paired modular devices and other data sources and continuously derive inferences (that is, contextual information) about the ongoing procedure as new data is received , such as which step of the procedure is being performed at any given time. The situational recognition system of the central surgical controller 106, 206 is, for example, able to record data referring to the procedure to generate reports, verify the steps being taken by medical personnel, provide data or warnings (for example , through a display screen) that may be relevant to the specific step of the procedure, adjust the modular devices based on the context (for example, activate monitors, adjust the field of view (FOV) of the medical imaging device, or change the energy level of an ultrasonic surgical instrument or RF electrosurgical instrument), and take any other action described above.

[0563] In the first step 5202, in this illustrative procedure, the members of the hospital team retrieve the electronic patient record (PEP) from the hospital's PEP database. Based on the patient selection data in the PEP, the central surgical controller 106, 206 determines that the procedure to be performed is a thoracic procedure.

[0564] In the second step 5204, the team members scan the incoming medical supplies for the procedure. The central surgical controller 106, 206 cross-references the scanned supplies with a list of supplies that are used in various types of procedures and confirms that the supply combination corresponds to a thoracic procedure. In addition, the central surgical controller 106, 206 is also able to determine that the procedure is not a wedge procedure (because the inlet supplies have an absence of certain supplies that are necessary for a thoracic cuff procedure or, otherwise, that the inlet supplies do not correspond to a thoracic wedge procedure).

[0565] In the third step 5206, medical personnel scan the patient's bracelet with a scanner that is communicably connected to the central surgical controller 106, 206. The central surgical controller 106, 206 can then confirm the patient's identity based on the scanned data.

[0566] In the fourth step 5208, the medical staff turns on the auxiliary equipment. The auxiliary equipment being used may vary according to the type of surgical procedure and the techniques to be used by the surgeon, but in this illustrative case they include a smoke evacuator, an insufflator and a medical imaging device.

When activated, auxiliary equipment that is a modular device can automatically pair with the central surgical controller 106, 206 which is located within a specific vicinity of the modular devices as part of its initialization process. The central surgical controller 106, 206 can then derive contextual information about the surgical procedure by detecting the types of modular devices that correspond with it during that preoperative or initialization phase. In this particular example, the central surgical controller 106, 206 determines that the surgical procedure is a VATS ("Video-Assisted Tho- crooscopic Surgery" procedure) based on this specific combination of paired modular devices. Based on the combination of data from the electronic patient record (PEP), the list of medical supplies to be used in the procedure, and the type of modular devices that connect to the central controller, the central surgical controller 106, 206 it can, in general, infer the specific procedure that the surgical team will perform. After surgical hub 106, 206 recognizes which specific procedure is being performed, surgical hub 106, 206 can then retrieve the steps of that process from memory or from the cloud and then cross-reference the data it subsequently receives from connected data (for example, modular devices and patient monitoring devices) to infer which stage of the surgical procedure the surgical team is performing.

[0567] In the fifth step 5210, the team members fix the electrocardiogram (ECG) electrodes and other patient monitoring devices on the patient. ECG electrodes and other patient monitoring devices are able to pair with surgical hub 106, 206. As surgical hub 106, 206 begins to receive data from patient monitoring devices, the surgical hub

106, 206 thus confirms that the patient is in the operating room.

[0568] In the sixth step 5212, medical personnel induce anesthesia in the patient. Surgical hub 106, 206 can infer that the patient is under anesthesia based on data from modular devices and / or from patient monitoring devices, including ECG data, blood pressure data, ventilator data, or combinations thereof, for example. After the completion of the sixth step 5212, the preoperative portion of the lung segmentectomy procedure is completed and the operative portion begins.

[0569] In the seventh step 5214, the lung of the patient being operated on is retracted (while ventilation is switched to the contralateral lung). Surgical hub 106, 206 can infer from the ventilator data that the patient's lung has been retracted, for example. Surgical hub 106, 206 can infer that the operative portion of the procedure started when it can compare the detection of the patient's lung collapse at the expected stages of the procedure (which can be accessed or retrieved earlier) and thus determine that lung retraction is the first operative step in this specific procedure.

[0570] In the eighth step 5216, the medical imaging device (for example, a video endoscope) is inserted and the video from the medical imaging device is started. Surgical hub 106, 206 receives data from the medical imaging device (i.e., video or image data) through its connection to the medical imaging device. Upon receipt of data from the medical imaging device, surgical hub 106, 206 can determine that the portion of the laparoscopic surgical procedure has started. Additionally, surgical hub 106, 206 can determine that the specific procedure being performed is a segmentectomy, rather than a lobectomy (note that a wedge procedure has already been discarded by surgical hub 106, 206 based on data received on the second step 5204 of the procedure). Data from the medical imaging device 124 (Figure 40) can be used to determine contextual information regarding the type of procedure being performed in a variety of ways, including by determining the angle at which the medical imaging device is. oriented towards visualizing the patient's anatomy, monitoring the number of medical imaging devices being used (ie, which are activated and paired with the central surgical controller 106, 206), and monitoring the types of display used.

For example, a technique for performing a VATS lobectomy places the camera in the lower anterior corner of the patient's chest cavity above the diaphragm, while a technique for performing a VATS segmentectomy places the camera in an anterior intercostal position in relation to segmental fissure.

With the use of standard recognition or machine learning techniques, for example, the situational recognition system can be trained to recognize the positioning of the medical imaging device according to the visualization of the patient's anatomy.

As another example, one technique for performing a VATS lobectomy uses a single medical imaging device, while another technique for performing a VATS segmentectomy uses multiple cameras.

As yet another example, a technique for performing a VATS segmentectomy uses an infrared light source (which can be communicably coupled to the central surgical controller as part of the visualization system) to visualize the segmental fissure, that is not used in a VATS lobectomy.

By tracking any or all of this data from the medical imaging device, the hub

surgical 106, 206 can thus determine the specific type of surgical procedure being performed and / or the technique being used for a specific type of surgical procedure.

[0571] In the ninth step 5218 of the procedure, the surgical team starts the dissection step. Surgical hub 106, 206 can infer that the surgeon is in the process of dissection to mobilize the patient's lung because he receives data from the RF or ultrasonic generator that indicate that an energy instrument is being fired. Surgical hub 106, 206 can cross-check the received data with the steps retrieved from the surgical procedure to determine that an energy instrument being fired at that point in the process (that is, after completing the previously discussed steps of the procedure) corresponds to the dissection step. In certain cases, the energy instrument can be a power tool mounted on a robotic arm in a robotic surgical system.

[0572] In the tenth step 5220 of the procedure, the surgical team proceeds to the connection step. Surgical hub 106, 206 can infer that the surgeon is linking arteries and veins because he receives data from the surgical stapling and cutting instrument indicating that the instrument is being fired. Similar to the previous step, surgical hub 106, 206 can derive this inference by crossing the reception data from the stapling and surgical cutting instrument with the steps recovered in the process. In certain cases, the surgical instrument can be a surgical tool mounted on a robotic arm of a robotic surgical system.

[0573] In the eleventh step 5222, the segmentectomy portion of the procedure is performed. Surgical hub 106, 206 can infer that the surgeon is transecting the parenchyma based on data from the surgical stapling and cutting instrument, including data from its cartridge. The cartridge data can correspond to the size or type of clamp being triggered by the instrument, for example. As different types of staples are used for different types of fabrics, the cartridge data can thus indicate the type of fabric being stapled and / or transected. In this case, the type of clamp that is fired is used for the parenchyma (or other similar types of tissue), which allows the surgical hub 106, 206 to infer which segmentectomy portion of the procedure is being performed.

[0574] In the twelfth step 5224, the node dissection step is then performed. Surgical hub 106, 206 can infer that the surgical team is dissecting the node and performing a leak test based on data received from the generator that indicates which ultrasonic or RF instrument is being triggered. For this specific procedure, an RF or ultrasonic instrument being used after the parenchyma has been transected corresponds to the node dissection step, which allows the surgical hub 106, 206 to make this inference. It should be noted that surgeons regularly alternate between surgical stapling / cutting instruments and surgical energy instruments (ie, RF or ultrasonic) depending on the specific step in the procedure because different instruments are better adapted for specific tasks. Therefore, the specific sequence in which the cutting / stapling instruments and the surgical energy instruments are used can indicate which step of the procedure the surgeon is performing. In addition, in certain cases, robotic tools can be used for one or more steps in a surgical procedure and / or hand-held surgical instruments can be used for one or more steps in the surgical procedure. The surgeon can switch between robotic tools and hand-held surgical instruments and / or can use the devices simultaneously, for example. After the completion of the twelfth stage 5224, the incisions are closed and the post-operative portion of the process begins.

[0575] In the thirteenth stage 5226, the patient's anesthesia is reversed. Surgical hub 106, 206 can infer that the patient is emerging from anesthesia based on ventilator data (i.e., the patient's respiratory rate begins to increase), for example.

[0576] Finally, the fourteenth step 5228 is one in which medical personnel remove the various patient monitoring devices from the patient. Surgical hub 106, 206 can therefore infer that the patient is being transferred to a recovery room when the hub loses ECG data, blood pressure and other data from patient monitoring devices. As can be seen from the description of this illustrative procedure, the surgical hub 106, 206 can determine or infer when each step of a given surgical procedure is taking place according to the data received from the various data sources that are communicably coupled to the surgical hub 106, 206.

[0577] Situational recognition is further described in US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62 / 611,341, entitled "INTEGRACTIVE SURGICAL PLATFORM", filed on December 28, 2017, the description of which is incorporated herein as reference in its entirety. In certain cases, the operation of a robotic surgical system, including the various robotic surgical systems disclosed here, for example, can be controlled by the central controller 106, 206 based on its situational recognition and / or the feedback of its components. components, and / or based on information from the cloud 104. Examples

[0578] Various aspects of the subject described in this document are defined in the numbered examples below.

[0579] Example 1 - A surgical evacuation system comprising a pump, an engine operationally coupled to the pump,

a flow path coupled in fluid communication with the pump and a sensor system. The sensor system comprises a first pressure sensor and a second pressure sensor. The first pressure sensor is positioned along the flow path. The second pressure sensor is positioned along the flow path upstream of the first pressure sensor. The surgical evacuation system additionally comprises a control circuit configured to determine a pressure differential between the first pressure sensor and the second pressure sensor. The control circuit is additionally configured to adjust an engine operating parameter based on the pressure differential.

[0580] Example 2 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 1, which additionally comprises a receptacle and a filter installed in the receptacle. The first pressure sensor is positioned downstream of the filter and the second pressure sensor is positioned upstream of the filter.

[0581] Example 3 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 1 or 2, the control circuit being configured to increase the engine speed when the pressure differential increases above a limit quantity.

[0582] Example 4 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 1, 2 or 3, which additionally comprises a fluid collector, the first pressure sensor being positioned downstream of the fluid collector, and the second pressure sensor pressure is positioned upstream of the fluid collector.

[0583] Example 5 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 4, the pressure differential being indicative of the flow path in relation to the fluid collector.

[0584] Example 6 - The surgical evacuation system in Example

1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, which additionally comprises a cabinet comprising an inlet and an outlet, with the flow path extending between the inlet and outlet, with the first pressure sensor positioned adjacent to the outlet, and the second pressure sensor is positioned adjacent to the inlet.

[0585] Example 7 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, the control circuit being configured to maintain a suction load below the maximum suction load on the pump.

[0586] Example 8 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7, the control circuit comprising a processor communicatively coupled to the sensor system. The control circuit additionally comprises a memory coupled communicatively to the processor, the memory stores instructions executable by the processor.

[0587] Example 9 - A surgical evacuation system comprising a pump comprising an engine, a flow path coupled in fluid communication with the pump and a sensor system. The sensor system comprises a first pressure sensor and a second pressure sensor. The first pressure sensor is positioned along the path to detect a first pressure. The second pressure sensor is positioned along the flow path upstream of the first pressure sensor to detect a second pressure. The surgical evacuation system further comprises a control circuit configured to determine a ratio between the second pressure and the first pressure, and to determine an operating condition of the surgical evacuation system based on the reason.

[0588] Example 10 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 9, the control circuit being additionally configured to adjust an operational parameter of the engine based on the operating condition of the surgical evacuation system.

[0589] Example 11 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 9 or 10, which additionally comprises a receptacle and a filter installed in the receptacle. The first pressure sensor is positioned downstream of the filter. The second pressure sensor is positioned upstream of the filter.

[0590] Example 12 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 9, 10 or 11, the control circuit being additionally configured to increase the engine speed in proportion to the ratio.

[0591] Example 13 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 9, 10, 11, or 12, which additionally comprises a fluid collector, the first pressure sensor being positioned downstream of the fluid collector, the second pressure sensor is positioned upstream of the fluid collector, and the operating condition corresponds to the flow path in relation to the fluid collector.

[0592] Example 14 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 9, 10, 11, 12 or 13, which additionally comprises a cabinet comprising an entrance and an exit, with the flow path extending between the entrance and the the first pressure sensor is positioned adjacent to the outlet, the second pressure sensor is positioned adjacent to the inlet, and the control circuit is additionally configured to keep the suction load on the pump below maximum suction load.

[0593] Example 15 - The surgical evacuation system of Example 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14, the control circuit comprising a processor communicatively coupled to the sensor system. The control circuit additionally comprises a memory communicatively coupled to the processor, and the memory stores instructions executable by the processor.

[0594] Example 16 - A non-transitory, computer-readable medium that stores computer-readable instructions that, when executed, cause a machine to receive a first signal from a first sensor positioned along a flow path through through a surgical evacuation system, receive a second signal from a second sensor positioned along the flow path through the surgical evacuation system, determine a condition of operation of the surgical evacuation system based on the first signal and the second signal , and adjust an operating parameter of the surgical evacuation system based on the operating condition.

[0595] Example 17 - The computer-readable non-transitory media of Example 16, the first sensor comprising a first pressure sensor, and the second sensor comprising a second pressure sensor.

[0596] Example 18 - The computer-readable non-transitory media of Example 16 or 17, the operational condition corresponding to a state of a filtration system of the surgical evacuation system.

[0597] Example 19 - The computer-readable non-transitory media of Example 18, and the computer-readable instructions, when executed, cause the machine to increase the speed of a pump motor to the surgical evacuation system, when the The filtration system must be in a partially blocked state.

[0598] Example 20 - The computer-readable non-transitory media of Example 16, 17, 18 or 19, and computer-readable instructions, when executed, make the machine redirect the flow path through the surgical evacuation system .

[0599] Although several forms have been illustrated and described,

it is not the applicant's intention to restrict or limit the scope of the claims attached to such detail. Numerous modifications, variations, changes, substitutions, combinations and equivalents of these forms can be implemented and will occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the scope of the present description. In addition, the structure of each element associated with the shape can alternatively be described as a means to provide the function performed by the element. In addition, where materials for certain components are revealed, other materials can be used. It must be understood, therefore, that the preceding description and the appended claims are intended to cover all these modifications, combinations and variations covered by the scope of the modalities presented. The attached claims are intended to cover all such modifications, variations, alterations, substitutions, modifications and equivalents.

[0600] The previous detailed description presented various forms of the devices and / or processes through the use of block diagrams, flowcharts and / or examples. Although these block diagrams, flowcharts and / or examples contain one or more functions and / or operations, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that each function and / or operation within these block diagrams, flowcharts and / or examples can be implemented , individually and / or collectively, through a wide range of hardware, software, firmware or almost any combination thereof. Those skilled in the art will recognize, however, that some aspects of the aspects disclosed here, in whole or in part, can be implemented in an equivalent way in integrated circuits, such as one or more computer programs run on one or more computers ( for example, as one or more programs running on one or more computer systems), as one or more programs running on one or more processors (for example, as one or more programs running on one or more microprocessors), as firmware , or virtually as any combination thereof, and that designing the circuitry and / or writing the code for the software and firmware would be within the scope of practice of those skilled in the art, in light of this description. In addition, those skilled in the art will understand that the mechanisms of the subject described herein can be distributed as one or more program products in a variety of ways and that an illustrative form of the subject described here is applicable regardless of the specific type of transmission medium. signals used to effectively carry out the distribution.

[0601] The instructions used to program the logic to execute various revealed aspects can be stored in a memory in the system, such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM), cache, flash memory or other storage. In addition, instructions can be distributed over a network or via other computer-readable media. In this way, a machine-readable media can include any mechanism to store or transmit information in a machine-readable form (for example, a computer), but is not limited to, floppy disks, optical discs, compact memory disc read-only (CD-ROMs), and optical-dynamo discs, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), read-only memory pro- electrically erasable (EEPROM), magnetic or optical cards, flash memory, or machine-readable tangible storage media used to transmit information over the Internet via an electrical, optical, acoustic cable or other forms of signal processing. paid (for example, carrier waves, infrared signal, digital signals, etc.). Consequently, computer-readable non-transitory media includes any type of machine-readable media suitable for storing or transmitting instructions or electronic information in a machine-readable form (for example, a computer).

[0602] As used in any aspect of the present invention, the term "control circuit" can refer to, for example, a set of wired circuits, programmable circuits (for example, a computer processor comprising one or more cores individual instruction processing units, processing unit, processor, microcontroller, microcontroller unit, controller, digital signal processor (DSP), programmable logic device (PLD), programmable logic matrix (PLA), or port arrangement field programmable (FPGA)), state machine circuits, firmware that stores instructions executed by the programmable circuit, and any combination of them. The control circuit can, collectively or individually, be incorporated as a circuit that is part of a larger system, for example, an integrated circuit (IC - "integrated circuit"), an integrated circuit of specific application (ASIC - "Application-Specific Integrated Circuit"), a system on a chip (SoC - "System on Chip"), desktop computers, laptop computers, tablet computers, servers, smartphones, etc. Consequently, as used in the present invention, "control circuit" includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuits that have at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuits that have at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuits that have at least one integrated circuit for a specific application, electrical circuits that form a general-purpose computing device configured by a computer program (for example, a general-purpose computer configured by a computer program that at least partially runs processes and / or devices described here, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program that at least partially performs the processes and / or devices described here), electrical circuits that form a memory device (for example, forms of random access memory ), and / or electrical circuits that form a communications device (for example, a modem, routed optical or electrical equipment). Those skilled in the art will recognize that the subject described here can be implemented in an analog or digital way, or in some combination of these.

[0603] As used in any aspect of the present invention, the term "logical" can refer to an application, software, firmware and / or circuit configured to perform any of the aforementioned operations. The software can be incorporated as a software package, code, instructions, instruction sets and / or data recorded on the computer-readable non-transitory storage media. The firmware can be embedded as code, instructions or instruction sets and / or data that are hard-coded (for example, non-volatile) in memory devices.

[0604] As used in any aspect of the present invention, the terms "component", "system", "module" and the like may refer to a computer-related entity, be it hardware, a combination of hardware and software, software or software running.

[0605] As used here in one aspect of the present invention, an "algorithm" refers to the self-consistent sequence of steps that lead to the desired result, where a "step" refers to the manipulation of physical quantities and / or logical states that can, although they do not necessarily need to, take the form of electrical or magnetic signals that can be stored, transferred, combined, compared and manipulated in any other way. It is common use to call these signs bits, values, elements, symbols, characters, terms, numbers or the like. These terms and similar terms may be associated with the appropriate physical quantities and are merely convenient identifications applied to these quantities and / or states.

[0606] A network can include a packet switched network.

Communication devices may be able to communicate with each other using a selected packet-switched network communications protocol.

An exemplary communications protocol may include an ethernet communications protocol that may be able to allow communication using a transmission control protocol / Internet protocol (TCP / IP). The Ethernet protocol can conform to or be compatible with the Ethernet standard published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) entitled "IEEE 802.3 Standard", published in December 2008 and / or later versions of this standard.

Alternatively or additionally, communication devices may be able to communicate with each other using an X.25 communications protocol. The X.25 communications protocol can conform or be compatible with a standard promulgated by the International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T). Alternatively or in addition, communication devices may be able to communicate with each other using a frame-relay communications protocol.

The frame-relay communications protocol can conform or be compatible with a standard promulgated by the Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone (CCITT) and / or the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Alternatively or additionally, transceivers may be able to communicate with each other using an ATM communication protocol ("asynchronous transfer mode"). The ATM communication protocol can conform to or be compatible with an ATM standard published by the ATM forum entitled "ATM-MPLS Network Interworking 2.0" published in August 2001, and / or later versions of that standard.

Obviously, different and / or post-developed connection-oriented network communication protocols are also contemplated in the present invention.

[0607] Unless otherwise stated, as is evident from the description mentioned above, it is understood that, throughout the above description, discussions that use terms such as "processing", "computation", "calculation" , "determination", "display", or similar, refer to the action and processes of a computer system, or similar electronic computing device, which manipulates and transforms data represented as physical (electronic) quantities in the records and computer system memories in other data represented in a similar way as physical quantities in the memories or records of the computer system, or in other similar devices for storing, transmitting or displaying such information.

[0608] One or more components in the present invention may be called "configured for", "configurable for", "operable / operational for", "adapted / adaptable for", "capable of", "according to movable / conformed to ", etc. Those skilled in the art will recognize that "configured for" can, in general, encompass components in an active state and / or components in an inactive state and / or components in a standby state, except when the context dictates otherwise.

[0609] The terms "proximal" and "distal" are used in the present invention with reference to a physician who handles the handle portion of the surgical instrument. The term "proximal" refers to the portion closest to the doctor, and the term "distal" refers to the portion located opposite the doctor. It will also be understood that, for the sake of convenience and clarity, spatial terms such as "vertical", "horizontal", "up" and "down" can be used in the present invention with respect to drawings. However, surgical instruments can be used in many orientations and positions, and these terms are not intended to be limiting and / or absolute.

[0610] Persons skilled in the art will recognize that, in general, the terms used here, and especially in the appended claims (for example, bodies of the appended claims) are generally intended as "open" terms (for example, the term "including" should be interpreted as "including, but not limited to", the term "having" should be interpreted as "having, at least", the term "includes" should be interpreted as "includes, but not limits to ", etc.). It will also be understood by those skilled in the art that, when a specific number of a claim statement entered is intended, that intention will be expressly mentioned in the claim and, in the absence of such mention, no intention will be present. For example, as an aid to understanding, the following appended claims may contain the use of the introductory phrases "at least one" and "one or more" to introduce claim statements. However, the use of such phrases should not be interpreted as implying that the introduction of a claim statement by the indefinite articles "one, ones" or "one, ones" limits any specific claim containing the mention of the claim entered to claims that contain only such a mention, even when the same claim includes the introductory phrases "one or more" or "at least one" and indefinite articles, such as "one, ones" or "one, ones" (for example, "one , ones "and / or" one, ones "should typically be interpreted as meaning" at least one "or" one or more "); the same goes for the use of defined articles used to introduce claims.

[0611] Furthermore, even if a specific number of an introduced claim statement is explicitly mentioned, those skilled in the art will recognize that that statement needs to be typically interpreted as meaning at least the number mentioned

(for example, the mere mention of "two mentions", without other modifiers, typically means at least two mentions, or two or more mentions). In addition, in cases where a convention analogous to "at least one of A, B and C, etc." is used, in general this construction is intended to have the meaning in which the convention would be understood by (for example, "a system that has at least one of A, B and C" would include, but not be limited to, systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and / or A, B and C together, etc.). In cases in which a convention analogous to "at least one among A, B or C, etc." is used, in general this construction is intended to have the meaning in which the convention would be understood by (for example, "a system that has at least one of A, B and C "would include, but not be limited to, systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and / or A, B and C together, etc.). It will be further understood by those skilled in the art that typically a disjunctive word and / or phrase presenting two or more alternative terms, whether in the description, in the claims or in the drawings, should be understood as contemplating the possibility of including one of the terms - mos, either term or both terms, except when the context determines to indicate something different. For example, the phrase "A or B" will typically be understood to include the possibilities of "A" or "B" or "A and B".

[0612] With respect to the attached claims, those skilled in the art will understand that the operations mentioned in the same can, in general, be carried out in any order. In addition, although several operational flow diagrams are presented in one or more sequences, it must be understood that the various operations can be performed in other orders than those shown, or can be performed simultaneously. Examples of such alternative orderings may include overlapping, interleaved, interrupted, reordered, incremental, preparatory, supplementary, simultaneous, inverse or other variant orders, unless the context determines otherwise. Furthermore, terms such as "responsive to", "related to" or other adjectival principles are not generally intended to exclude these variants, except when the context determines otherwise.

[0613] It is worth noting that any reference to "one (1) aspect", "one aspect", "an exemplification" or "one (1) exemplification", and the like means that a particular resource, structure or characteristic described in connection with the aspect is included in at least one aspect. Thus, the use of expressions such as "in one (1) aspect", "in one aspect", "in an exemplification", "in one (1) exemplification", in several places throughout this specification necessarily refers to the same aspect. In addition, specific resources, structures or characteristics can be combined in any appropriate way in one or more aspects.

[0614] Any patent application, patent, publication of a non-patent or other description material mentioned in this specification and / or mentioned in any order data sheet is hereby incorporated by reference, to the extent that the incorporated materials are not inconsistent with this document. Accordingly, and to the extent necessary, the description as explicitly presented herein replaces any conflicting material incorporated into the present invention for reference. Any material, or portion thereof, which is incorporated herein by reference, but which conflicts with the definitions, statements, or other description materials contained herein, will be incorporated here only to the extent that there is no conflict between the embedded material and the existing description material.

[0615] In summary, numerous benefits have been described that result from the use of the concepts described in this document. The previously mentioned description of one or more modalities has been presented for purposes of illustration and description.

This description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form disclosed.

Modifications or variations are possible in light of the above teachings.

One or more modalities were chosen and described in order to illustrate the principles and practical application to, thus, allow those skilled in the art to use the various modalities and with various modifications, as they are convenient to the specific use contemplated.

It is intended that the claims presented in the annex define the global scope.

Claims (20)

1. Surgical evacuation system characterized by comprising: a pump; a motor operationally coupled to said pump; a flow path coupled in fluid communication with said pump; a sensor system, comprising: a first pressure sensor positioned along said flow path; and a second pressure sensor positioned along said flow path upstream of said first pressure sensor; and a control circuit configured to: determine a pressure differential between said first pressure sensor and said second pressure sensor; and adjust an operational parameter of said engine based on the pressure differential. 2. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 1, characterized by additionally comprising: a receptacle; and a filter installed in said receptacle, said first pressure sensor being positioned downstream of said filter, and said second pressure sensor being positioned upstream of said filter. 3. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 2, characterized in that said control circuit is configured to increase the speed of said engine when the pressure differential increases above a limit quantity. 4. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 1, characterized by additionally comprising a fluid collector, said first pressure sensor being positioned downstream of said fluid collector, and said second sensor pressure is positioned upstream of said fluid collector. 5. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 4, characterized in that the pressure differential is indicative of the flow path in relation to said fluid collector. 6. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 1, characterized by additionally comprising a cabinet comprising an entrance and an exit, the said flow path extending between said entrance and said exit, being that said first pressure sensor is positioned adjacent to said outlet, and said second pressure sensor is positioned adjacent to said inlet. 7. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 6, characterized in that said control circuit is configured to maintain in the said pump a suction load below a maximum suction load. 8. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 1, characterized in that said control circuit comprises: a processor communicatively coupled to said sensor system; and a memory communicatively coupled to said processor, said memory stores instructions executable by the processor. 9. Surgical evacuation system characterized by comprising: a pump comprising an engine; a flow path coupled in fluid communication with said pump; a sensor system, comprising: a first pressure sensor positioned along said path to detect a first pressure; and a second pressure sensor positioned along said flow path upstream of said first pressure sensor to detect a second pressure; a control circuit configured to: determine a ratio between said second pressure and said first pressure; and determining an operating condition of the surgical evacuation system based on said reason. 10. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 9, characterized in that said control circuit is additionally configured to adjust an operational parameter of said engine based on the said operating condition of the surgical evacuation system . 11. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 10, characterized by additionally comprising: a receptacle; and a filter installed in said receptacle, said first pressure sensor being positioned downstream of said filter, and said second pressure sensor being positioned upstream of said filter. 12. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 11, characterized in that said control circuit is additionally configured to increase the speed of said engine in proportion to said reason. 13. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 9, characterized by additionally comprising a fluid collector, said first pressure sensor being positioned downstream of said fluid collector, said second pressure sensor pressure is positioned upstream of said fluid collector, and the said operating condition corresponds to said flow path in relation to said fluid collector. 14. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 9, characterized by additionally comprising a cabinet comprising an entrance and an exit, the said flow path extending between said entrance and said exit, being that said first pressure sensor is positioned adjacent to said outlet, said second pressure sensor is positioned adjacent to said inlet, and said control circuit is additionally configured to maintain the suction load in the said pump below a maximum suction load. 15. Surgical evacuation system, according to claim 9, characterized in that said control circuit comprises: a processor communicatively coupled to said sensor system; and a memory communicatively coupled to said processor, said memory stores instructions executable by the processor. 16. Non-transient, computer-readable media characterized by storing computer-readable instructions that, when executed, make a machine: receive a first signal from a first sensor positioned along a flow path through a surgical evacuation system ; receiving a second signal from a second sensor positioned along the flow path through the surgical evacuation system; determining an operating condition of the surgical evacuation system based on the first signal and the second signal; and adjust an operating parameter of the surgical evacuation system based on the operating condition. 17. Computer readable non-transitory media according to claim 16, characterized in that the first sensor comprises a first pressure sensor, and the second sensor comprises a second pressure sensor. 18. Computer-readable non-transitory media according to claim 16, characterized in that the operational condition corresponds to a state of a filtration system of the surgical evacuation system. 19. Computer readable non-transitory media, according to claim 18, characterized in that the computer-readable instructions, when executed, make the machine increase the speed of a pump motor for the surgical evacuation system, when the state the filtration system comprises a partially blocked state. 20. Non-transient, computer-readable media according to claim 16, characterized in that the computer-readable instructions, when executed, make the machine redirect the flow path through the surgical evacuation system.